Operator Manual Kobelco Sk140srlc-5

APPLICABLE No.
SK140SRLC-5 YH08-11001~
SK140SRL-5 LK08-02501~
READ, UNDERSTAND AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS FOUND IN THIS
MANUAL BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE.
Book Code No. S2YH00011ZE10 2018.10

Original instructions Destination : EUR
Copyright©2018 Kobelco Construction Machinery Co.,Ltd. All rights reserved. [S2YH00011ZE10] [1115CsCshWbYs]
［CONTENTS］
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
PREFACE ................................................................................................................................................0-3
STORE OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS ON THE MACHINE ..................................................0-4
SAFETY INFORMATION IN MESSAGES OR LABELS IN THIS MANUAL AND ON THE MACHINE ...............0-5
SAFETY LABELS ..................................................................................................................................0-5
SUMMARY OF THE MACHINE ..................................................................................................................0-7
QUALIFICATION FOR OPERATING THE MACHINE ...................................................................................0-8
FLUORINATED GREENHOUSE GASES ....................................................................................................0-9
"EC" DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ..................................................................................................0-10
VIBRATION TO THE OPERATOR ............................................................................................................0-12
NOISE LEVEL ........................................................................................................................................0-13
CAB WITH ROPS (ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE)/FALLING OBJECTS PROTECTIVE
STRUCTURE.....................................................................................................................................0-14
ORDERING PARTS AND SERVICE .........................................................................................................0-15
WARRANTY ...........................................................................................................................................0-16
IMPORTANT NOTIFICATION...................................................................................................................0-17
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.1 SAFETY LABELS & DECALS ............................................................................................................1-3
1.1.1 ALWAYS MAKE SURE ALL OF THE SAFETY LABELS ARE LEGIBLE AND NOT
DAMAGED.......................................................................................................................................1-3
1.1.2 LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS & DECALS ...............................................................................1-4
1.1.3 SAFETY LABELS........................................................................................................................1-7
1.2 PRE-START SAFETY......................................................................................................................1-13
1.2.1 OPERATION RULES.................................................................................................................1-13
1.2.2 PROTECTION TOOLS ..............................................................................................................1-14
1.2.3 ABNORMAL AND EMERGENCY CONDITION............................................................................1-15
1.2.4 POTENTIAL HAZARDS WHEN OPERATING .............................................................................1-16
1.2.5 FIRE PREVENTION ..................................................................................................................1-17
1.2.6 GETTING ON AND OFF THE MACHINE ....................................................................................1-18
1.2.7 PRE-START UP INSPECTION ON THE MACHINE .....................................................................1-19
1.3 SECURE VISIBILITY .......................................................................................................................1-20
1.3.1 BE AWARE OF YOUR SURROUNDINGS...................................................................................1-20
1.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION ..................................................................................................1-21
1.4.1 STARTING ...............................................................................................................................1-21
1.4.2 TRAVELING .............................................................................................................................1-25
1.4.3 PROHIBITED OPERATIONS .....................................................................................................1-28
1.4.4 SAFETY CHECK ON THE PARKING MACHINE .........................................................................1-35
1.5 AT THE END OF EACH SHIFT.........................................................................................................1-36
1.6 PRECAUTIONS OF INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE .......................................................................1-37
1.6.1 PERIODIC INSPECTIONS ........................................................................................................1-37
1.6.2 BEFORE INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE .................................................................................1-38
1.6.3 DURING INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE .................................................................................1-39
1.6.4 PROHIBITED IN INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ......................................................................1-44
1.6.5 AFTER INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE....................................................................................1-45
1.7 PRECAUTIONS FOR BATTERY ......................................................................................................1-46
1.7.1 HANDLING THE BATTERY .......................................................................................................1-46
1
［CONTENTS］
1.8 HANDLING OF THE ACCUMULATOR OR GAS SPRING ..................................................................1-48

1.9 TOWING THE MACHINE.................................................................................................................1-49
1.9.1 TOWING METHOD OF THE MACHINE ......................................................................................1-49
2. MACHINE FAMILIARIZATION
2.1 BASIC COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE ........................................................................................2-3
2.2 OPERATOR'S STATION NOMENCLATURE .......................................................................................2-5
2.3 GAUGE CLUSTER............................................................................................................................2-7
2.3.1 MULTI-DISPLAY .........................................................................................................................2-8
2.3.2 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE METER ..............................................................................2-8
2.3.3 FUEL LEVEL METER..................................................................................................................2-8
2.3.4 DEF/ADBLUE LEVEL GAUGE .....................................................................................................2-9
2.3.5 HOUR METER............................................................................................................................2-9
2.3.6 SCREEN CHANGE SWITCH .....................................................................................................2-10
2.3.7 BUZZER STOP SWITCH........................................................................................................... 2-11
2.3.8 WORK MODE SELECT SWITCH ...............................................................................................2-14
2.3.9 WASHER SWITCH ...................................................................................................................2-15
2.3.10 WIPER SWITCH .....................................................................................................................2-15
2.3.11 TRAVEL SPEED SELECT SWITCH..........................................................................................2-16
2.3.12 AUTO ACCELERATION SWITCH ............................................................................................2-17
2.3.13 ATTACHMENT MODE SELECT SWITCH .................................................................................2-18
2.3.14 MENU SWITCH ......................................................................................................................2-19
2.3.15 USER MENU SETTING ...........................................................................................................2-20
2.3.16 DISPLAY FOR MAINTENANCE ...............................................................................................2-31
2.3.17 WARNING DISPLAY SCREEN.................................................................................................2-32
2.3.18 CLOGGING DETECTOR OF HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER .............................................................2-36
2.4 HANDLING OF SWITCHES AND METERS ......................................................................................2-37
2.4.1 STARTER SWITCH...................................................................................................................2-37
2.4.2 ENGINE THROTTLE.................................................................................................................2-37
2.4.3 WORKING LIGHT (BOOM AND DECK)......................................................................................2-38
2.4.4 WORKING LIGHT SWITCH (CAB LIGHT) ..................................................................................2-38
2.4.5 MANUAL REGENERATION SWITCH .........................................................................................2-38
2.4.6 PRESSURE RELEASE SWITCH ...............................................................................................2-39
2.4.7 OVERLOAD ALARM SELECT SWITCH .....................................................................................2-39
2.4.8 CAB ROTATING LIGHT SWITCH ...............................................................................................2-40
2.4.9 QUICK HITCH OPERATION SWITCH ........................................................................................2-40
2.4.10 CAP (OPTION SWITCH) .........................................................................................................2-41
2.4.11 HORN SWITCH.......................................................................................................................2-41
2.4.12 ENGINE THROTTLE FOR REDUNDANT MODE ......................................................................2-42
2.4.13 SWING PARKING BRAKE RELEASE SWITCH .........................................................................2-43
2.4.14 KPSS RELEASE SWITCH .......................................................................................................2-43
2.4.15 ENGINE STOP SWITCH .........................................................................................................2-44
2.4.16 12 V POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................................2-44
2.4.17 USB PORT/EXTERNAL INPUT TERMINAL (AUX) ....................................................................2-45
2.5 HANDLING OF LEVERS AND PEDALS............................................................................................2-46
2.5.1 LOCATION OF LEVERS AND PEDALS ......................................................................................2-46
2
［CONTENTS］
2.5.2 Pilot Control Shut-Off Lever........................................................................................................2-47

2.5.3 OPERATOR CONTROL LEVERS ..............................................................................................2-48
2.5.4 TRAVEL LEVER & PEDAL.........................................................................................................2-49
2.6 HANDLING OF FUSE & RELAY BOX ...............................................................................................2-50
2.6.1 ABOUT FUSE & RELAY BOX ....................................................................................................2-50
2.6.2 REPLACING FUSES.................................................................................................................2-50
2.6.3 FUSE CAPACITY AND CIRCUIT NAME .....................................................................................2-51
2.7 HANDLING OF FUSIBLE LINK (FOR STARTER) ..............................................................................2-52
2.7.1 FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT...........................................................................2-52
2.8 CONTROLLER ...............................................................................................................................2-53
2.9 DUAL MONITOR.............................................................................................................................2-54
2.9.1 NAME OF EACH PART .............................................................................................................2-54
2.9.2 MENU SCREEN .......................................................................................................................2-54
2.9.3 MAIN MENU .............................................................................................................................2-55
2.9.4 PICTURE ADJUSTMENT (PICTURE) ........................................................................................2-55
2.9.5 SETTING OF CAMERA RELATED ITEMS (CAMERA).................................................................2-56
2.9.6 SWITCHING OF DIMMER (LIGHT ADJUSTMENT) (DIMMER).....................................................2-57
2.10 HANDLING OF RADIO ..................................................................................................................2-58
2.10.1 NAME OF EACH PART ...........................................................................................................2-58
2.10.2 RECEIVABLE FREQUENCY....................................................................................................2-59
2.10.3 SOURCE ON ..........................................................................................................................2-59
2.10.4 SWITCHING SOURCE ............................................................................................................2-60
2.10.5 FM/AM ...................................................................................................................................2-61
2.10.6 USB AUDIO ............................................................................................................................2-64
2.10.7 BLUETOOTH AUDIO ..............................................................................................................2-69
2.10.8 AUX .......................................................................................................................................2-70
2.10.9 CLOCK DISPLAY ....................................................................................................................2-70
2.10.10 VOLUME CONTROL .............................................................................................................2-71
2.10.11 DISPLAY CHANGE................................................................................................................2-72
2.10.12 MENU ..................................................................................................................................2-74
2.10.13 BLUETOOTH AUDIO FUNCTION, AND USB PORT/EXTERNAL INPUT TERMINAL .................2-82
2.10.14 DESCRIPTION OF BUILT-IN WIRELESS EQUIPMENT ...........................................................2-83
2.11 AIR CONDITIONER.......................................................................................................................2-91
2.11.1 GRILLE (AIR OUTLET) ............................................................................................................2-91
2.11.2 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL PANEL ....................................................................................2-92
2.11.3 AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION PANEL .................................................................................2-93
2.11.4 HOW TO USE AIR CONDITIONER...........................................................................................2-96
2.11.5 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION IN DISPLAY MONITOR .............................................................2-98
2.11.6 HANDLING AT IN-SEASON/OFF-SEASON...............................................................................2-99
2.12 HANDLING OF SEAT BELT ......................................................................................................... 2-100
2.12.1 HOW TO FASTEN SEAT BELT............................................................................................... 2-100
2.12.2 HOW TO UNFASTEN SEAT BELT.......................................................................................... 2-100
2.13 HANDLING OF OPERATOR'S SEAT ............................................................................................ 2-101
2.13.1 HEIGHT AND TILT ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................... 2-101
2.13.2 RECLINING ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................... 2-102
2.13.3 FRONT/REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................... 2-102
2.13.4 ARM REST ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................... 2-102
3
［CONTENTS］
2.13.5 HEAD REST ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................. 2-102

2.13.6 ADJUSTING AIR SUSPENSION ............................................................................................ 2-102
2.13.7 SEAT HEATER (OPTION)...................................................................................................... 2-102
2.13.8 LUMBAR SUPPORT ............................................................................................................. 2-102
2.14 HANDLING OF OPERATOR'S SEAT ............................................................................................ 2-103
2.14.1 DAMPER ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................................... 2-103
2.14.2 WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................................ 2-104
2.14.3 HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................... 2-104
2.14.4 RECLINING ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................... 2-105
2.14.5 FRONT/REAR ADJUSTMENT OF SEAT ................................................................................ 2-105
2.14.6 TILT ADJUSTMENT OF SEAT SEATING SURFACE ................................................................ 2-105
2.14.7 FRONT/REAR ADJUSTMENT OF SEAT SEATING SURFACE................................................. 2-105
2.14.8 ARM REST ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................... 2-105
2.14.9 HEAD REST ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................. 2-105
2.14.10 SEAT HEATER.................................................................................................................... 2-106
2.14.11 LUMBAR SUPPORT............................................................................................................ 2-106
2.15 HANDLING PARTS INSIDE CAB.................................................................................................. 2-107
2.15.1 CAB DOOR LOCK................................................................................................................. 2-107
2.15.2 OPENING DOOR FROM INSIDE OF CAB .............................................................................. 2-107
2.15.3 OPENING/CLOSING FRONT WINDOW (UPPER)................................................................... 2-108
2.15.4 RETRACTING FRONT WINDOW (LOWER) ........................................................................... 2-109
2.15.5 CAB ROOM LAMP ................................................................................................................ 2-109
2.16 EMERGENCY ESCAPE FROM OPERATOR'S STATION............................................................... 2-110
2.17 OTHER ACCESSORIES.............................................................................................................. 2-111
2.17.1 TOOL BOX ........................................................................................................................... 2-111
2.17.2 GREASE GUN HOLDER ....................................................................................................... 2-111
2.17.3 CUP HOLDER ...................................................................................................................... 2-111
2.17.4 GUARD/SIDE DOOR (WITH LOCK) ....................................................................................... 2-112
2.18 BATTERY POWER-OFF SWITCH ................................................................................................ 2-114
2.19 FUEL SUPPLY PUMP.................................................................................................................. 2-115
3. MACHINE OPERATION
3.1 EVERYDAY CHECK-UP ....................................................................................................................3-3
3.2 CHECK BEFORE STARTING ENGINE ...............................................................................................3-4
3.2.1 CHECKING COOLANT LEVEL AND REFILLING ..........................................................................3-4
3.2.2 CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL OF ENGINE OIL PAN AND REFILLING.......................................3-5
3.2.3 CHECKING FUEL LEVEL AND REFUELING ................................................................................3-7
3.2.4 DRAINING FUEL PRE-FILTER ....................................................................................................3-8
3.2.5 CHECKING OIL LEVEL OF HYDRAULIC OIL TANK ......................................................................3-9
3.2.6 CHECKING FAN BELT AND AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR BELT.....................................3-10
3.2.7 CHECKING RADIATOR, OIL COOLER AND FILTER................................................................... 3-11
3.2.8 CHECKING DEF/ADBLUE LEVEL AND REFILLING ................................................................... 3-11
3.2.9 ADJUSTMENT OF OPERATOR'S SEAT.....................................................................................3-12
3.2.10 ADJUSTMENT OF MIRRORS..................................................................................................3-13
3.2.11 CHECKING MULTI-DISPLAY ...................................................................................................3-16
3.2.12 CHECKING WORKING LIGHT.................................................................................................3-16
4
［CONTENTS］
3.2.13 CHECKING OF AIR CLEANER INLET ......................................................................................3-16

3.3 STARTING ENGINE ........................................................................................................................3-17
3.3.1 START-UP UNDER NORMAL TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS.....................................................3-17
3.3.2 START UP IN COLD CONDITIONS ............................................................................................3-19
3.3.3 USING JUMPER CABLES .........................................................................................................3-20
3.4 STOPPING MACHINE ENGINE .......................................................................................................3-22
3.5 CHECK AFTER STARTING ENGINE................................................................................................3-23
3.5.1 CHECK OF PILOT CONTROL SHUT-OFF LEVER ......................................................................3-23
3.5.2 CHECK OF ENGINE AND MULTI-DISPLAY................................................................................3-24
3.6 WARMING-UP ................................................................................................................................3-25
3.6.1 ENGINE WARMING-UP ............................................................................................................3-25
3.6.2 WARMING-UP HYDRAULIC OIL................................................................................................3-26
3.7 AUTO IDLING STOP FUNCTION .....................................................................................................3-27
3.7.1 RESTART AFTER AUTO IDLE STOP .........................................................................................3-27
3.8 SELECTION OF WORK MODE........................................................................................................3-28
3.9 SWITCHING ATTACHMENT MODE .................................................................................................3-29
3.10 MACHINE OPERATION.................................................................................................................3-30
3.10.1 PRECAUTIONS OF MACHINE OPERATION ............................................................................3-30
3.10.2 TRAVEL PROCEDURES .........................................................................................................3-31
3.10.3 CHANGING TRAVEL SPEED (1ST AND 2ND) ..........................................................................3-33
3.10.4 MACHINE OPERATION IN WATER OR ON SOFT GROUND.....................................................3-34
3.10.5 GETTING OUT OF SOFT GROUND.........................................................................................3-35
3.10.6 SWING AND ATTACHMENT/EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS.........................................................3-36
3.11 WORK PROCEDURES OF MACHINE ............................................................................................3-39
3.11.1 DIGGING WORK.....................................................................................................................3-39
3.11.2 LOADING WORK ....................................................................................................................3-39
3.12 ALWAYS PARK MACHINE PROPERLY ..........................................................................................3-40
3.12.1 PARKING MACHINE ON SLOPE .............................................................................................3-40
3.13 INSPECTION AND CHECK AFTER OPERATION............................................................................3-41
3.14 MACHINE OPERATION IN ADVERSE CONDITIONS ......................................................................3-42
3.14.1 OPERATION IN COLD CONDITION .........................................................................................3-42
3.14.2 OPERATION AT SEASHORE...................................................................................................3-43
3.14.3 OPERATION IN SANDY AND DUSTY AREAS...........................................................................3-43
3.15 PRECAUTIONS FOR LONG-TERM STORAGE ..............................................................................3-44
3.15.1 WASHING MACHINE ..............................................................................................................3-44
3.15.2 REFILLING OIL/GREASING ....................................................................................................3-44
3.15.3 BATTERY ...............................................................................................................................3-44
3.15.4 COOLANT ..............................................................................................................................3-44
3.15.5 PREVENTION OF DUST AND MOISTURE ...............................................................................3-45
3.15.6 PERIODICAL LUBRICATING OPERATION (DURING STORAGE) .............................................3-45
3.15.7 TREATMENT AFTER LONG-TERM STORAGE.........................................................................3-45
4. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

4.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................4-3
4.2 INSPECTING AND MAINTAING MACHINE.........................................................................................4-4
4.2.1 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE............................................................................4-4
5
［CONTENTS］
4.2.2 PRECAUTIONS OF INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ..............................................................4-5

4.3 EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE .................................................................................................4-6
4.3.1 ABOUT EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE ...............................................................................4-6
4.3.2 ABOUT AUTOMATIC REGENERATION .......................................................................................4-6
4.3.3 ABOUT MANUAL REGENERATION.............................................................................................4-7
4.3.4 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................4-8
4.3.5 PRECAUTIONS OF USING EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE .................................................4-8
4.4 SCR SYSTEM AND DEF/ADBLUE .....................................................................................................4-9
4.4.1 SCR ...........................................................................................................................................4-9
4.4.2 DEF/AdBlue................................................................................................................................4-9
4.4.3 DEF/AdBlue CIRCUIT AND BATTERY..........................................................................................4-9
4.4.4 STORING DEF/ADBLUE .............................................................................................................4-9
4.4.5 PURCHASING DEF/ADBLUE ......................................................................................................4-9
4.4.6 LOW DEF/ADBLUE LEVEL .......................................................................................................4-10
4.4.7 QUALITY PROBLEMS OF DEF/ADBLUE ...................................................................................4-10
4.4.8 DRAINING DEF/ADBLUE .......................................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.9 FAILURE OF EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE .....................................................................4-12
4.4.10 EMERGENCY EVACUATION MODE........................................................................................4-13
4.4.11 SCR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE .................................................................................4-13
4.5 LUBRICANT, FUEL & COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS .........................................................................4-14
4.6 ABOUT USE OF BIO-OIL (BIODEGRADABLE HYDRAULIC OIL).......................................................4-16
4.6.1 GREASE AND OIL FOR USE ....................................................................................................4-16
4.6.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR BIO-OIL ...................................................................................................4-16
4.6.3 REPLACEMENT INTERVAL OF BIO-OIL....................................................................................4-16
4.6.4 FLUSHING PROCEDURES OF BIO-OIL ....................................................................................4-16
4.7 MAINTENANCE PARTS ..................................................................................................................4-17
4.8 TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR BOLTS & NUTS (SPECIFIC POSITIONS) ..........................................4-18
4.9 TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR BOLTS & NUTS ................................................................................4-20
4.10 TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR JOINTS & HYDRAULIC HOSES ......................................................4-22
4.11 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE CHART...................................................................................4-24
4.12 MAINTENANCE WHEN REQUIRED...............................................................................................4-29
4.12.1 CHECKING AND REPLACING WIPER BLADES.......................................................................4-29
4.12.2 WASHER FLUID INSPECTION ................................................................................................4-29
4.12.3 REPLACING BUCKET.............................................................................................................4-30
4.12.4 REPLACING TOOTH POINT AND SIDE CUTTER.....................................................................4-32
4.12.5 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF BUCKET GAP ADJUSTMENT MECHANISM...................4-35
4.12.6 BLEEDING AIR FROM FUEL PIPING.......................................................................................4-36
4.12.7 RELEASING INTERNAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM................................................4-37
4.13 8 HOUR (DAILY) INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES..................................................4-38
4.13.1 GREASING ATTACHMENT .....................................................................................................4-38
4.14 50 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ............................................................4-40
4.14.1 INSPECTING AND MAINTAINING BATTERY............................................................................4-40
4.14.2 DRAINING WATER AND SEDIMENT IN FUEL TANK.................................................................4-43
4.14.3 ADJUSTING CRAWLER TENSION ..........................................................................................4-44
4.15 120 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ..........................................................4-46
4.15.1 CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL OF SWING REDUCTION UNIT...............................................4-46
4.15.2 CHECKING OIL LEVEL OF TRAVEL REDUCTION UNIT...........................................................4-47
6
［CONTENTS］
4.16 250 HOUR (3-MONTH) INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ........................................4-48

4.16.1 ADJUSTING FAN BELT AND AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR BELT..................................4-48
4.16.2 CHECKING INTAKE SYSTEM RUBBER HOSE ........................................................................4-51
4.16.3 CHECKING RADIATOR HOSES ..............................................................................................4-52
4.16.4 CLEANING OR REPLACING AIR CONDITIONER FILTERS ......................................................4-54
4.16.5 INSPECTING, CLEANING, OR REPLACING AIR CLEANER ELEMENT.....................................4-56
4.16.6 CLEANING OR REPLACING RADIATOR CAP..........................................................................4-58
4.16.7 INSPECTING SCR SYSTEM ...................................................................................................4-58
4.16.8 CLEANING RADIATOR, OIL COOLER CORE AND FILTER .......................................................4-59
4.17 500 HOUR (6-MONTH) INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ........................................4-61
4.17.1 REPLACING ENGINE OIL AND ENGINE OIL FILTER ...............................................................4-61
4.17.2 REPLACING FUEL PRE-FILTER .............................................................................................4-64
4.17.3 REPLACING FUEL FILTER .....................................................................................................4-65
4.17.4 GREASING SWING BEARING.................................................................................................4-66
4.17.5 CHECKING SWING BEARING MOUNTING BOLT FOR LOOSENESS .......................................4-66
4.17.6 CLEANING FUEL TANK CAP AND STRAINER .........................................................................4-67
4.17.7 LUBRICATING PUSH ROD OF CONTROL LEVER ...................................................................4-68
4.17.8 CHECKING AIR CONDITIONER REFRIGERANT .....................................................................4-69
4.17.9 CLEANING OR REPLACING ELECTROMAGNETIC FUEL PUMP .............................................4-71
4.18 1000 HOUR (12-MONTH) INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ....................................4-73
4.18.1 REPLACING RETURN FILTER ................................................................................................4-73
4.18.2 REPLACING AIR BREATHER ELEMENT .................................................................................4-75
4.18.3 CHECKING ENGINE MOUNTING BRACKET FOR TIGHTENING CONDITION...........................4-76
4.18.4 CHECKING BATTERY VOLTAGE.............................................................................................4-77
4.19 2000 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ........................................................4-78
4.19.1 REPLACING COOLANT ..........................................................................................................4-78
4.19.2 REPLACING OIL IN SWING REDUCTION UNIT .......................................................................4-80
4.19.3 REPLACING OIL IN TRAVEL REDUCTION UNITS ...................................................................4-81
4.19.4 CLEANING SUCTION STRAINER............................................................................................4-82
4.19.5 GREASING SWING REDUCTION UNIT ...................................................................................4-83
4.19.6 CHECKING GREASE IN SWING GREASE BATH .....................................................................4-84
4.19.7 CLEANING PILOT LINE FILTER ..............................................................................................4-85
4.20 5000 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ........................................................4-86
4.20.1 REPLACING HYDRAULIC OIL.................................................................................................4-86
4.20.2 REPLACING DEF/AdBlue SUPPLY MODULE FILTER...............................................................4-89
5. TRANSPORTATION
5.1 TRANSPORTATION ..........................................................................................................................5-3
5.1.1 STRICTLY OBSERVE TRANSPORTATION RELATED REGULATIONS..........................................5-3
5.2 LOADING/UNLOADING THE MACHINE.............................................................................................5-5
5.2.1 LOADING ...................................................................................................................................5-6
5.2.2 FIXING THE MACHINE ...............................................................................................................5-8
5.2.3 UNLOADING ..............................................................................................................................5-9
5.3 MACHINE LIFTING .........................................................................................................................5-10
5.3.1 THE POSITION OF THE LIFTED MACHINE ...............................................................................5-10
5.4 INSTALLING AND REMOVING MIRROR.......................................................................................... 5-11
7
［CONTENTS］
6. SPECIFICATION
6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................................................6-3
6.1.1 SK140SRLC-5, SK140SRL-5 .......................................................................................................6-3
6.2 SHOE TYPES AND USES .................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.1 SK140SRLC-5 ............................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.2 SK140SRL-5...............................................................................................................................6-5
6.3 WORKING RANGES .........................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.1 BACKHOE ATTACHMENT (SK140SRLC-5)..................................................................................6-6
6.3.2 BACKHOE ATTACHMENT (SK140SRL-5) ....................................................................................6-7
6.4 ATTACHMENT TYPE AND COMBINATION ........................................................................................6-8
6.4.1 FRONT ATTACHMENT VARIATION .............................................................................................6-8
6.5 LIFTING CAPACITY ..........................................................................................................................6-9
6.5.1 SK140SRLC-5:4.68m (15'4") BOOM ............................................................................................6-9
6.5.2 SK140SRLC-5:4.68m (15'4") BOOM ..........................................................................................6-10
6.5.3 SK140SRL-5:4.68m (15'4") BOOM ............................................................................................. 6-11
7. MACHINE OPERATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

7.1 MACHINE OPERATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .............................................................................7-3
7.2 REMOTE DOWNLOAD SYSTEM.......................................................................................................7-4
7.3 DESCRIPTION OF BUILT-IN WIRELESS EQUIPMENT.......................................................................7-6
8. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
8.1 OPERATION OF HYDRAULIC BREAKER AND NIBBLER (CRUSHER) ................................................8-3
8.1.1 DO NOT USE FOR DEMOLITION OPERATION............................................................................8-3
8.1.2 SELECTION OF HYDRAULIC BREAKER AND NIBBLER (CRUSHER) ..........................................8-3
8.1.3 BEFORE OPERATING HYDRAULIC BREAKER ...........................................................................8-3
8.1.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR IMPURITY AND HYDRAULIC OIL ...............................................................8-3
8.1.5 PRECAUTIONS IN USE OF BREAKER........................................................................................8-3
8.1.6 PRECAUTIONS IN USE OF NIBBLER (CRUSHER) ......................................................................8-9
8.2 SELECTION OF ATTACHMENT MODE AND SELECTOR VALVE ......................................................8-14
8.2.1 SELECTION OF ATTACHMENT MODE ......................................................................................8-14
8.2.2 SWITCHING SELECTOR VALVE ...............................................................................................8-16
8.3 SWITCHING STOP VALVE ..............................................................................................................8-17
8.4 FLOW RATE ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................................8-18
8.5 CONTROL OF PROPORTIONAL HAND CONTROL EXTRA, NIBBLER (CRUSHER),
BREAKER .........................................................................................................................................8-19
8.5.1 EXTRA HAND CONTROL .........................................................................................................8-20
8.5.2 HORN SWITCH ........................................................................................................................8-20
8.5.3 NIBBLER (CRUSHER) OPERATION ..........................................................................................8-20
8.5.4 BREAKER OPERATION............................................................................................................8-21
8.6 CONTROL OF PROPORTIONAL HAND CONTROL NIBBLER (CRUSHER), BREAKER .....................8-22
8.6.1 HORN SWITCH ........................................................................................................................8-23
8.6.2 NIBBLER OPERATION .............................................................................................................8-23
8.6.3 BREAKER OPERATION............................................................................................................8-24
8.7 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF NIBBLER (CRUSHER) AND BREAKER ...............8-25
8
［CONTENTS］
8.7.1 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE CHART OF NIBBLER (CRUSHER) AND

BREAKER .....................................................................................................................................8-25
8.7.2 REINFORCEMENT OF ATTACHMENT.......................................................................................8-25
8.8 PRECAUTIONS FROM BREAKER MANUFACTURERS....................................................................8-26
8.8.1 INSTALL HIGH- AND LOW-PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS ........................................................8-26
8.8.2 ACCUMULATOR INSTALLATION CRITERIA ..............................................................................8-26
8.8.3 INSTALL RELIEF VALVE ...........................................................................................................8-27
8.9 OBJECT HANDLING .......................................................................................................................8-28
8.9.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........................................................................................................8-28
8.9.2 LIFTING WORK ........................................................................................................................8-29
8.9.3 RATED LIFT CAPACITY CHART................................................................................................8-31
8.10 QUICK HITCH...............................................................................................................................8-32
8.10.1 PROHIBITED WORKS ............................................................................................................8-32
8.10.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE ......................................................................................................8-33
8.10.3 REMOVING FRONT ATTACHMENT.........................................................................................8-34
8.10.4 INSTALLING FRONT ATTACHMENT........................................................................................8-35
8.10.5 MANUAL SWITCHING OF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE FOR QUICK HITCH........................8-36
8.11 TRAVEL ALARM SWITCH .............................................................................................................8-37
9. SPECIAL PROCEDURES
9.1 SPECIAL PROCEDURES AT ENGINE FAILURE ................................................................................9-3
9.2 LOWERING ATTACHMENT TO GROUND..........................................................................................9-4
9.3 RELEASING TRAVEL MOTOR BRAKES ............................................................................................9-5
9.4 RELEASING SWING BRAKES...........................................................................................................9-8
9.4.1 SWING BRAKE RELEASE PROCEDURE WITH HYDRAULIC HAND PUMP ..................................9-8
9.4.2 SWING BRAKE RELEASE PROCEDURE BY DISASSEMBLY.....................................................9-10
9
［CONTENTS］
10
［IMPORTANT INFORMATION］
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
0-1
0-2
PREFACE
• Read, understand and follow the safety messages and instructions in this manual and the safety messages on
the machine. If these safety messages are not followed, serious injury or death could occur.
• Always be aware of your surroundings when operating this machine and understand the capabilities of this
machine and the attachment/equipment.
• Always use caution to safely operate this machine.
Use of this product and this manual
• Improper operation, maintenance or repair of this machine may cause serious injury, death or damage to the
machine.
• Do not operate this machine for the first time or perform any inspection, maintenance or repair on this machine,
until you have carefully read and understand the operation, inspection, maintenance, and repair information in
this manual.
– Operation related activities include setting up, rectifying malfunctions and the disposal of materials.
– Maintenance related activities include lubrication, maintenance, inspection and repair work.
– Transportation related activities include loading and unloading the machine.
• For machines equipped with a specialized attachment, read the section related to the specialized attachment in
this manual and any additional manuals for the specialized attachment.
• If this manual is lost, damaged or unreadable, order a replacement from your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
• This manual is a part of this machine and should be transferred with the machine to new users or owners.
• Always use genuine KOBELCO parts. Do not use aftermarket or non-KOBELCO parts on your machine.
• Manufacturers cannot anticipate every possible scenario and potential hazard that may arise during operation,
inspection and maintenance activities. Therefore, the warnings in this manual and on the product may not
communicate all of the possible safety precautions for your situation. When performing any operation, inspection
and maintenance activities that are not contained in this manual, proceed at your own risk and do not perform
any unsafe acts. You should also ensure the machine will not be damaged or create an unsafe condition by your
actions. Always follow the safety procedures in this manual and for your worksite. Never perform any task or
operation prohibited by this manual.
• If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not specifically recommended by KOBELCO is used,
you must evaluate that it is safe for yourself and others to proceed. You should also ensure the machine will not
be damaged or create an unsafe condition by the operation, maintenance and/or repair procedures you choose.
Never perform any task or operation prohibited by this manual.
• The information, specification, and illustrations in this manual are based on information available at the time it
was written. KOBELCO may change the specifications, torques, pressures, measurements, adjustments,
illustrations, and other content at anytime without any obligation to notify the users/owners of these changes.
Your KOBELCO authorized dealer will have the most current information available.
• Should there be questions, errors, omissions or other issues that need to be communicated to the manufacturer,
contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
• KOBELCO provides machines produced in accordance with regulations and standards of a country in which the
machine is sold to the first owner. If you have a machine purchased in a foreign country or from a person or
company in another country, your machine may lack safety devices or machine components or not meet a safety
standard required in your country. Please contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer to ask whether your
machine's specifications meet the regulations and the standards in your country.
The copyright of this manual belongs to KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY CO., LTD. Copy, reproduction,
distribution, and delivery (including these actions on the Internet) of all or part of this manual are prohibited without permission
of KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY CO., LTD.
0-3
STORE OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS ON THE MACHINE

Always store all manuals for this machine and any
attachments, including this manual and the related
manuals, in the pocket located at the rear side of the
operator's seat. Check the manuals are in this location
as a part of your pre-start inspection. If the manuals are
not present during your pre-start inspection, inform your
supervisor and order replacement manuals from your
KOBELCO authorized dealer.
0-4
SAFETY INFORMATION IN MESSAGES OR LABELS IN THIS

MANUAL AND ON THE MACHINE
Many accidents are the result of not following basic safety precautions and could have been avoided by
recognizing potentially hazardous situations.
Proper risk assessment can prevent many accidents from occurring. During operation, always pay attention to the
potential hazards near the machine and at your worksite.
• Improper operation, inspection, maintenance and repair could cause serious injury, death or property damage.
Before operating, inspecting and maintaining this machine, carefully read and understand this manual, the
related manuals, and any attachment manuals that may be provided to you.
• Only allow trained and experienced personnel to operate, to inspect and to maintain this machine. These
individuals must also comply with all applicable employment, industry, and governmental rules, standards, and
regulations.
Many safety messages in this manual or on the labels on this machine contain signal words. Signal words are used
to identify safety messages and property damage messages and designate a level of hazard seriousness. Many of
these safety messages may also contain avoidance information.
This safety alert symbol identifies important safety messages in this manual. When you
see this symbol, be alert, your safety is involved, carefully read the message that follows,
and inform other operators.
The three signal words are DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION. Each alerts the viewer to the existence and
relative seriousness of a hazard. They are reserved for personal injury hazards.
Safety signs identified by DANGER shall be used sparingly and only for those situations presenting the most
serious hazards. Hazards identified by WARNING present a lesser degree of risk of injury or death than those
identified by DANGER.
DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Other than the above-mentioned signal words, the following words identify important information which must be
kept for the protection of the machine and may be helpful for the operator.
Notice indicates information considered important, but not hazard related .

(e.g., messages related to property damage)
Note indicates information that may be helpful for the operator.
SAFETY LABELS
Safety labels are affixed to machine to alert the operator and surrounding personnel of hazardous situations during
operation, inspection or maintenance.
There are two types of "safety labels" on this machine. One is "SAFETY LABEL INCLUDING SIGNAL WORDS"
and the other is "PICTORIAL ONLY SAFETY LABELS".
0-5
Example of the safety label including signal words
W A R N IN G
Example of a pictorial only safety label

The pictorial only safety label is used to alert the
operator and surrounding personnel of potentially
hazardous situations.
For pictorial only safety label, the hazard pictorial is in
the upper or left box, and the avoidance information is in
the lower or right box.
Z L 1 1 M 0 2 7 08
0-6
SUMMARY OF THE MACHINE

APPLICABLE WORKS
Use this machine in the following applications:
• Digging
• Trenching
• Loading
• Leveling
• Demolishing
Never use the machine for any purpose other than the above applications.
For details of work procedures, please refer to "MACHINE OPERATION" in Chapter 3 and "OPTIONAL
EQUIPMENT" in Chapter 8.
FRONT, REAR, RIGHT & LEFT OF THE MACHINE

This manual refers to the front, rear, right & left of this
machine as seen when sitting in the operator's seat with Tra ck idle r whe e l
the machine in the normal travel position. The normal Front
travel position is when the idler wheels are positioned at
Operator ’s
the front under the cab and the drive sprockets are seat
positioned at the rear.
Left-hand Right-hand
side side
Tra ve l mote r
Sprockets
Rear
BREAK-IN OPERATION
Prior to shipment, this machine was inspected and adjusted by KOBELCO. Future performance and service life of
this machine depends on how the machine is operated during the break-in period.
Hour Meter Load Status

Less than 10 hours About 60%
Less than 100 hours About 80%
100 hours and more Full load
During the break-in period

• Always sufficiently warm-up the engine and the hydraulic oil.
• Do not operate with loads that exceed the recommended load status for each phase shown in the table or
operate at high speeds.
• Do not perform a sudden start, sudden acceleration, or other sudden changes in engine speed.
• Avoid unnecessary sudden stops or sudden changes in driving direction.
• Do not operate the engine at high speed for extended periods of time.
Operating with heavy loads during the first 100 hours of operation may significantly affect the performance and the
life of the machine. Use extreme caution if operating with heavy loads during the break-in period.
0-7
QUALIFICATION FOR OPERATING THE MACHINE

If a license or other special qualification is required to operate a hydraulic excavator in the country where this
machine will be operated, all operators of this machine must meet those requirements and have a valid (not
expired) license or qualification.
0-8
FLUORINATED GREENHOUSE GASES

REGULATION (EU) No 517/2014 OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE
COUNCIL
of 16 April 2014
on fluorinated greenhouse gases and repealing Regulation (EC) No 842/2006
Contains fluorinated greenhouse gases.
TYPE OF F GAS HFC-134a

TOTAL F GAS MASS 0.8
(kg)
TOTAL EQ(CO2) 1.2

(t)
GWP 1,430
(Global warming potential)
0-9
"EC" DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

On the following pages, a facsimile copy of the "EC" Declaration of Conformity (EC DoC) is provided.
The EC DoC is the manufacturer's declaration about equipment compliance to relevant EU provisions.
Please keep the original document in a safe place. Local authorities may require you to show this document in
order to assure compliance of your equipment.
IMPORTANT: an original of this "EC" declaration is supplied with each machine and must be kept carefully by the
owner.
IMPORTANT: the official documents supplied with the machine must be kept by the owner so as to be able to
present them to any inspecting authority which may request them.
• Under point 1.2 those options or variants are listed which have safety related functions. Some of them are
standard provided, like the falling objects protective structure and the roll-over protective structure (please refer
to the next page for other detail).
Others, like object handling kit required to lift loose objects, are available upon Customer request. Please
address to your KOBELCO authorized dealer to know the availability of variants/optionals provided for your
machine.
• Under point 2 all information required by EU "Outdoor Noise" Directive 2000/14/EC is given.
Please refer to your own original EC DoC for specific machine information. Other information about equipment
guaranteed sound power level (LWA) can be found on the paragraph of "NOISE LEVEL". On the same page,
information about operator's station noise level (LpA) is given, which is not matter of above-mentioned EU
Directive and therefore not indicated on it.
• Generic serial number for this machine type.
The sequence of letters and numbers may vary depending on machine configuration.
• EC DoC serial number.
Please make reference to this number when requiring information or support from KOBELCO about EC DoC.
• Signature of a person authorized to sign the document on behalf of the company.
0-10
0-11
VIBRATION TO THE OPERATOR

The level of vibrations transmitted to the operator depends mainly upon the conditions of the ground on which
operations take place, the mode of operation of the machine and its equipment.
Thus, the exposure to vibrations can be considerably reduced when the following recommendations are complied
with:
• Use equipment compatible with the machine and the type of work to be done;
• Adjust and lock the seat in the correct position; also inspect regularly the suspensions of the seat, performing the
adjustments and repairs as required;
• Perform regularly the current maintenance operations of the machine at the prescribed intervals;
• Operate the equipment in a uniform manner, preventing, as far as possible, sharp movements or excessive
loads;
• When travelling, avoid, as far as possible, particularly rough terrain or the impact against possible obstacles.
This machine is equipped with an operator's seat complying with the requisites of standard ISO 7096:2008. This
ensures that the exposure of the operator's body to vibrations comply with the protection requisites for the
protection against vibrations when the machine operates as required by the operational scopes, in accordance with
the prescriptions of this manual.
The operator's seat has been tested in accordance with EM6 input spectral class and has a seat transmissibility
factor < 0.7.
• The weighted average quadratic acceleration value to which the operator's arms are subjected does not exceed
2.5 m/s2.
• The weighted average quadratic acceleration value to which the operator's body is subjected does not exceed
0.5 m/s2.
These results were obtained using an acceleration gauge while digging ditches.
The Whole-Body exposure value is determined under particular operating and terrain conditions and therefore may
not be representative for all the possible operating conditions within the intended use of the machine. Consequently
this single Whole-Body vibration emission value is not intended to determine the Whole-Body vibration exposure as
required by European Directive 2002/44/EC. For this purpose it is recommended to conduct working conditions
measurement. If this is not feasible use of information provided in the table below from ISO/TR 25398:2006 (*).
Basic emissions value Standard deviation

Working conditions 1.4*aw,eqx 1.4*aw,eqy aw,eqz 1.4*sx 1.4*sy sz
[m/s2] [m/s2] [m/s2] [m/s2] [m/s2] [m/s2]
Excavation 0.44 0.27 0.30 0.24 0.16 0.17

Hydraulic hammer 0.53 0.31 0.55 0.30 0.18 0.28
Mine 0.65 0.42 0.61 0.21 0.15 0.32
Travel 0.48 0.32 0.79 0.19 0.20 0.23
(*) ISO/TR 25398:2006 Mechanical vibrations - Guidelines for assessment of exposure to whole-body vibration of
ride-on machine - Use of harmonized data measured by international institutes, organizations and manufacturers.
0-12
NOISE LEVEL
Sound power level
LWA = 95 dB (A)
Guaranteed sound level power, determined in
accordance with EC Directive 2000/14/EC.
Level of sound pressure at operator's compartment

LpA = 71 dB (A)
Cab with door and windows closed and the heating /
conditioning fan in operation at mid-range speed,
measured on identical machine, in accordance with
Standard ISO 6396:2008.
0-13
CAB WITH ROPS (ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE)/

FALLING OBJECTS PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
When ROPS CERTIFICATION as shown in the
illustration is placed inside the cab, that cab is equipped
with the roll-over protective structure (ROPS) and the
falling objects protective structure (top guard level I).
Observe the following to ensure the function of the
protective structures.
• Do not modify the cab and the protective structures by
welding, drilling, or performing other modification on
them.
Even a slight modification can decrease the strength
of the protective structures.
• Do not correct or repair the cab and the protective
structures without contacting your KOBELCO
authorized dealer.
Ask your KOBELCO authorized dealer for inspection
for damages of the cab caused by fire, corrosion,
collision, or others.
The all damaged parts shall be restored by using the
genuine parts. For structural changes or part
replacements, be sure to ask your KOBELCO
authorized dealer.
• Fasten your seat belt during operation.
The protective structures are designed based on the
premise of fastening the seat belt.
Always fasten your seat belt during operation.
• Pay attention to the operating mass.
If the operating mass exceeds MAX. MASS
(maximum operating mass) described on ROPS
CERTIFICATION with the special attachment or others installed, it will cause insufficient protective function,
resulting in serious accidents or death when the machine tips/rolls over.
When the top guard is equipped with OPERATION PROTECTIVE GUARD CERTIFICATION, that cab is equipped
with the falling objects protective structure (top guard level II).
When the front guard is equipped with OPERATION PROTECTIVE GUARD CERTIFICATION, that cab is equipped
with the flying objects protector (front guard level II).
0-14
ORDERING PARTS AND SERVICE

When ordering parts and service, have the machine serial number, the engine serial number and the current hours
of operation available for your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
The machine serial number and the engine serial number are stamped in the locations shown below. For future
reference, confirm and record these numbers in the spaces below.
MACHINE TYPE MACHINE SERIAL No. ENGINE SERIAL No. HOUR METER
S
12h
K
. ENGINE SERIAL No.

(” ”means engine serial number)
. HOUR METER
. MACHINE SERIAL No.
0-15
WARRANTY
This machine is warranted as per the warranty attached to this machine. In case of any failures are proved to be
KOBELCO's responsibility, KOBELCO will repair or replace any parts or components for free of charge to the extent
specified in the attached warranty. KOBELCO shall not be liable for any improper operation, maintenance,
modification, and alteration etc., other than described in this manual.
0-16
IMPORTANT NOTIFICATION
To show additional detail of parts and components or show motion of this machine, some illustrations may show the
machine with safety related equipment, including guards, doors, covers and shields, either removed or not in place.
To prevent serious injury, death, or property damage, all of the safety related equipment must be properly installed
and secured, before starting this machine.
In addition, some illustrations may show features or functions that differ from your machine. If you have any
questions, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
Example
This illustration shows the machine with the battery
cover removed.
0-17
0-18
［1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS］
1. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1-1
1-2
1.1 SAFETY LABELS & DECALS
READ THE OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Read, understand and follow the safety messages and instructions in this manual. If these safety messages are not
followed, serious injury or death could occur.
SAFETY MESSAGES
Several labels for specific safety messages are attached to this machine. The exact location and description of the
hazards are reviewed in this section.
1
Please read and understand all safety messages in this manual and on the machine.
1.1.1 ALWAYS MAKE SURE ALL OF THE SAFETY LABELS ARE LEGIBLE
AND NOT DAMAGED
• Clean the safety labels or replace the safety labels if you can not read the words or see the illustrations.
To clean the safety labels, only use a cloth, water and soap. Do not use any solvent, gasoline or other harsh
chemicals to clean the safety labels. Solvents, gasoline or harsh chemicals could loosen the adhesive that
secures the safety labels and allow the label to fall off the machine.
• Always replace any safety label that is damaged or missing. If a safety label is attached to a part that is replaced,
you will need to install a safety label on the replacement part. Your KOBELCO authorized dealer can provide
new safety labels.
• Never remove any safety labels attached to this machine. For all other labels on the machine, clean and replace
as needed in accordance with the instructions above.
1-3
1.1.2 LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS & DECALS

aa 30
31
30
III
I
29
bb
32
31
A A
dd
35 cc
1-4
ee
37
20
41
38
18
23
39 V
22
26
IV
33
3
DETAIL a a
VIEW I SHOWS INSIDE P ANEL
1-5
13
34
VIEW II
DETAIL bb
SHOWS INSIDE P ANEL
31
DETAIL dd
SHOWS BACK SIDE OF P ANEL
36 DETAIL cc
SHOWS INSIDE P ANEL
SECTION AA
31
17
DETAIL e e
SHOWS INSIDE P ANEL
24
VIEW III VIEW IV
1-6
1.1.3 SAFETY LABELS

PRESSURIZED HOT OIL
Location:3
Part Number:YN20T01355P1
YN 2 0 T 0 1 3 5 5 P 1
1
HANDLING BATTERY
Location:7
Read this manual to handle the battery properly.
YN 2 0 T 0 2 6 2 5 P 1
HOT COOLANT
Location:13
Part Number:ZL21N00404
Never loosen or open the radiator cap when coolant is
hot. Stream of hot coolant will spout and could cause
burns.
Before opening the radiator cap:
• Cool down the engine completely.
• Cover the radiator with cloth rag.
• Loosen the cap slowly to relieve pressure.
ZL2 1 N 0 0 4 0 4
DO NOT INSERT HAND IN THE MOVING PART

Location:17
Part Number:ZL21M03708
Be careful not to pinch your hand(s).
If the moving part catches your hand(s), it may result in
personal injury.
Z L2 1 M0 3 7 0 8
1-7
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STOPPING ENGINE

Location:18
Part Number:YY20T01635P1 N OT IC E
KEEP CLEAR WORKING AREA

Location:20
Make sure the area is clear of obstacles and persons
before beginning the operation of the machine.
Always look around before you start the swing operation.
Make sure everyone is cleared in your worksite. Sound
horn before beginning swing operation.
ZL31N07508
ATTACHMENT MODE SELECT SWITCH

Location:22
Part Number:YN20T02766P1 N OT IC E
CHECKING CONTROL LEVER PATTERN

Location:23
Part Number:YN20T02643P1 C AU T IO N
1-8
LOCK THE FRONT WINDOW AT THE HOUSED POSITION

Location:24
Lock the front window at the housed position securely, or
it may slip down and may personal injury.
HANDLING THE QUICK HITCH

Location:26
Part Number:YY20T01577P1 DAN G E R
DO NOT USE COUNTERWEIGHT LIFTING

Location:29
Part Number:YN20T02741P1 WARNING
WORKING ABOVE GROUND

Location:30
Part Number:YY20T01568P1
There is a danger of falling when working on areas
above ground.
• Do not approach edges.
• Use the appropriate equipment, such as ladders or
platform when working above ground. In addition,
strap yourself to the proper equipment accordingly.
• Avoid spillage of any oil or grease.
• Do not leave any tools around the working area.
• Use extreme caution to avoid slipping while walking.
• Do not jump on or from the machine. Use the steps and handrails and securely maintain a three point contact
while mounting or dismounting at all times.
1-9
HOT PARTS
Location:31
Part Number:PS20T01092P1
Do not touch the engine until it cools down.
Because it could be high temperature and cause burns.
ENGINE ROTATING PARTS WARNING

Location:32
Keep away from the fan and belt when the engine is
running. Rotating parts can cause personal injury.
Stop the engine before servicing.
PRECAUTIONS OF HANDLING DEF/AdBlue

Location:33
MACHINE LIFTING
Location:34
• Lift up the machine in the position as shown in right
figure.
• The lifting up position shown in the figure is for the
standard machine. For details, refer to the lifting
procedure.
SWING
Location:35
Do not enter in the swing area.
Stay away from the machine during operation to prevent
you from contacting with or being crushed between
machine components.
1-10
HANDLING BATTERY
Location:36
WORKING ABOVE GROUND 1

Location:37
When getting on the step, hold the handrail.
PRECAUTIONS OF HANDLING QUICK HITCH

Location:38
Be sure to read this manual before removing / installing
the attachment.
HANDLING EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE

Location:39
1-11
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Location:41
YN20T02630P1
• READ THIS MANUAL

Read and understand this manual before operating, maintaining, disassembling, assembling or transporting this
machine.
If the instructions and procedures in this manual are ignored or not followed, it may result in severe personal
injury or death.
• HANDLING OF CONTROL LOCK LEVER
Before leaving the cab, park the machine on the level and firm ground and lower the attachment/equipment to
the ground, make sure to pull up the control lock lever to the "LOCKED" position and then stop the engine.
• ELECTRICAL POWER LINES
Keep the machine and attachment/equipment at a safe distance from electrical power lines.
Contact with electrical power lines can cause electric shock.
• ATTACHMENT/EQUIPMENT INTERFERENCE WITH CAB
Check clearance between the attachment and the cab before starting operation because a certain kinds of
attachment/equipment and a certain combination of the option and the machine may cause interference
between the attachment/equipment and the cab or some other parts of the machine.
Be sure to check the clearance between the attachment/equipment and the cab whenever the attachment/
equipment or the combination is changed.
• PRECAUTIONS WHEN TIPPING OVER
When the machine tips over, the operator can be thrown out of the cab and crushed under the machine.
Be sure to fasten the seat belt during operation.
1-12
1.2 PRE-START SAFETY

1.2.1 OPERATION RULES

1
ALWAYS OBSERVE BASIC SAFETY RULES AND PRECAUTIONS
All operators are required to receive training before operating this machine.
If a license or other special qualification is required to operate a hydraulic excavator in the country where this
machine will be operated, all operators of this machine must meet those requirements and have a valid (not
expired) license or qualification.
• Follow all safety precautions and procedures described in this manual while operating, inspecting and
maintaining this machine.
• Never operate this machine if you are under the influence of drugs (including those which may make you
drowsy) or alcohol. If you are not alert, do not operate the machine.
• To prevent accidents, confirm all working procedures before starting work. If a signal person is needed, Always
agree on the hand signals and designate a signal person before starting work.
All personnel must know and understand all the signals. The operator shall respond to signals only from the
appointed signal person, but shall obey a stop signal from anyone at any time. The signal person must stand in a
clearly visible location when giving the signals.
ENSURE WORKSITE SAFETY

Understand your task and the potential hazards:
• Before operation, conduct a risk assessment with the site manager and confirm that all necessary safety
precautions have been taken for the task. Always ask the site manager if there are any additional safety
precautions or regulations for the task.
Know your working area:
• Visually survey the area around the working site before operating the machine.
Look for mud or other soft ground that could cause the machine to become stuck or unstable when operating the
machine. Use signs to identify soft shoulders and soft ground. If needed, use a signal person.
• Choose operating locations where landslide will not occur or where falling rocks or building debris will not land
on the machine.
• Set up barricades to prevent unauthorized personnel and/or machines from entering the working site.
• If working near a road, use a signal person and signs to alert vehicles and pedestrians of potential hazards and
falling objects.
Know your machine.
• You must have completed the required training.
• If a license or special qualification is required, you must have a valid (not expired) license or qualification.
• Always read and understand the operator's manual for the machine and the attachment.
• Always confirm the pattern for the operator controls before operating the machine.
KEEP AWAY OTHER PEOPLE FROM THE MACHINE AND ATTACHMENT / EQUIPMENT DURING
OPERATION
To prevent serious injury or death:
• Never allow anyone to stand on the machine, including the attachment /equipment and the upper structure,
when operating.
• Never allow anyone to stand or to ride on a suspended load or the attachment/equipment.
1-13
OPTIONAL ATTACHMENT / EQUIPMENT

Use only KOBELCO attachment /equipment or those approved for use by KOBELCO.
• Use of an unapproved attachment /equipment may cause serious injury, death, or damage to the machine and
the attachment /equipment, including reducing the life of the machine.
• The use of the unapproved attachment /equipment voids KOBELCO's liability for the machine.
• Always read, understand and follow the instructions both in this manual and the manual for the attachment.
• Consult your KOBELCO authorized dealer about which attachment /equipment is approved for use on your
machine before connecting an attachment /equipment to your machine.
1.2.2 PROTECTION TOOLS

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
Wear fitted clothing and protective gears.
• Always change any clothing that has become
contaminated with oil, fuel or other flammable
substances.
• Do not wear loose fitting clothing, jewelry or any
accessory and restrain long hair that can get caught in
moving parts or that can catch on controls and result
in unintended movement of the machine or the
attachment /equipment.
• Always wear the proper personal protective
equipment for the task you will be performing. This
may include a hard hat, safety shoes, safety glasses,
face shield, respirator, gloves, ear protection, and/or a reflective vest. Consult with your supervisor to confirm
you have the proper personal protective equipment for the task.
• Use ear protection when operating in noisy areas. Prolonged exposure to loud noises can cause hearing
damage and even total hearing loss.
• Inspect all personal protective equipment for damage prior to use. If any personal protective equipment is
damaged, or past its expiration date, do not use the equipment and contact your supervisor to obtain a
replacement before operating machine.
• Other personnel working in the vicinity of the machine, including the signal person, should also wear the
proper personal protective equipment appropriate for the worksite and for the task.
This may include a hard hat, safety shoes, safety glasses, face shield, respirator, gloves, ear protection, and/or a
reflective vest. Consult with your supervisor to confirm that personnel working in the vicinity of the machine have
the proper personal protective equipment for the worksite and the task.
PREPARE FOR EMERGENCY

In case of emergency, know where the fire extinguishers
and the first aid kit are located.
• Know how to use a fire extinguisher.
• Inspect and maintain the fire extinguishers in
compliance with your local/national regulations.
• Determine what emergency communication devices
are necessary for your location and have a list of
important telephone numbers available.
• Periodically inspect the first aid kit. Replenish items
and replace expired items as necessary.
1-14
1.2.3 ABNORMAL AND EMERGENCY CONDITION

WHEN A FAILURE IS FOUND
When operating, inspecting or maintaining the machine, if there is an unusual noise, vibration, smell, instrument
malfunction, smoke, oil leak, a warning light illuminates or a warning is on the multi-display, do not continue to
operate the machine.
• Always park on a firm, level location, lower the attachment to the ground, stop the engine, pull the control lock
lever to the locked position, and remove the key.
• Contact your supervisor.
• Contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer for repair. 1
EMERGENCY ESCAPE FROM THE CAB
If the normal operator's exit is blocked in an emergency,
stop the engine, use the life hammer to break a window,
and exit the cab. See "EMERGENCY ESCAPE FROM
OPERATOR'S STATION" in Chapter 2.
IN THE EVENT OF A FIRE OR OTHER EMERGENCY

• Stop the engine.
• Use hand rails and steps to dismount machine. Do not jump from machine.
1-15
1.2.4 POTENTIAL HAZARDS WHEN OPERATING

PAY ATTENTION TO FALLING MATERIALS AND FLYING DEBRIS
To prevent serious injury or death, confirm the appropriate cab guards are installed for your task and for the
attachment /equipment prior to operation. If needed, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer before starting
work.
• Always use the front guard, and the top guard when
performing building demolition work or operating at
working sites (including mining or quarry sites) where
falling material and flying debris may occur.
• If working with the hydraulic breaker or another
attachment and if objects will not fall on the machine,
only the front guard may be needed.
• When performing work that may result in falling
material and flying debris, keep people a safe
distance away from the work area.
• Always close the front window and doors before
operating.
CHECK SAFETY RELATED GUARDS AND EQUIPMENT

• Check all safety related guards, covers, windows and mirrors are not damaged and secure prior to operation. If
any damage or other issue is found, do not use the machine until the safety related parts and equipment has
been replaced. Never attempt to repair safety related parts and equipment.
• Understand how the safety systems and the safety related equipment protects you as the operator and others
around the machine.
• Never remove safety related parts and equipment from the machine.
LIMITED PROTECTION FROM OBJECTS FALLING ON THE CAB

When operating near areas where landslides may occur
or where rocks or other debris may fall, be aware that the
cab and the guards installed provide limited protection
for the operator and may not prevent serious injury or
death.
• Never weld, drill or modify the top guard or other
protective structures. Any modification could weaken
the structural integrity of these protective structures,
resulting in serious injury or death in case of collision,
falling objects or landslides.
• Do not install any cab lifting device to the top guard or
other protective structures.
• If an accident occurs, do not try to straighten or repair the top guard or other protective structures. If required,
contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer for functional verification or replacement of any of the protective
structures.
1-16
1.2.5 FIRE PREVENTION

FIRE CAUSED BY FLAMMABLE SUBSTANCES
Fuel, oil, electrolyte, antifreeze/coolant, windshield washer fluid and other chemicals are flammable.
To prevent serious injury or death from possible fire:
• Remove flammables such as leaves, wooden debris,
paper waste, etc. from the areas of exhaust manifold,
muffler, battery, and undercover, etc.
• Do not smoke or bring other ignition sources near
areas where flammables are stored and/or handled.
• Refuel only after stopping the engine.
1
• Do not leave the machine when refueling or when
refilling with oil.
• Try not to spill fuel on heated surfaces or on electrical
parts. Clean any spills immediately.
• After refueling or refilling with oil, securely tighten the
fuel and the oil caps and clean up any spills
immediately.
• Store fuel and oil in designated areas and restrict access to only authorized personnel.
• Remove all flammable materials in the area before performing grinding or welding work.
• Do not weld or perform gas cutting on pipes and tubes which contain combustible liquids.
• Only use flammable oils to wash parts. Do not use flammable oils, such as diesel fuel or gasoline, to wash parts.
FIRE CAUSED BY THE ELECTRIC SYSTEM

Short-circuits in the electrical system may cause fire.
• Check all wiring harness connections are clean and secure.
• Inspect wiring harnesses, connectors, and clamps periodically. Repair, replace, or tighten connectors and
clamps if any damage or loose connections are found.
FIRE CAUSED BY LEAK

Check all clamps, guards, protective cushions for the hoses and the tubes are secure.
During operation, machine vibration may cause loose hoses or loose tubes to be damaged from contact with other
parts and leak high pressure oil or other fluids and result in a fire and serious injury or death.
If any issue is found, immediately tighten, repair or replace it.
Do not operate machine with damaged or bent hoses or tubes.
USE ANTI-EXPLOSION WORK LIGHTS

Use only work lights with anti-explosion specification to prevent serious injury or death.
Lighting must meet the requirements for areas where explosive concentrations of vapors and dusts could exist to
prevent a fire or explosion when performing inspection and maintenance activities.
1-17
1.2.6 GETTING ON AND OFF THE MACHINE

PRECAUTIONS OF GETTING ON AND OFF THE MACHINE
• Clean all slippery substances such as grease, oil,
mud, and others attached to the steps and handrails.
• Inspect appearances and mounting portions of the
steps and handrails. Replace any damaged parts and
tighten any loose bolts or nuts.
• Always use the steps and handrails to get on and off
the machine.
• Always face the machine and maintain three points of
contact with the steps and handrails.
• Do not use the control lock lever and control levers as
hand holds.
• Do not have anything in your hands, including tools,
when getting on and on and off the machine.
• Never jump on and off the machine or attempt to get
on or off a moving machine.
1-18
1.2.7 PRE-START UP INSPECTION ON THE MACHINE

Always perform a pre-startup inspection before operating this machine to check for any potential issues.
For more information, refer to "EVERYDAY CHECK-UP" in Chapter 3 in this manual.
ATTACH A "DO NOT OPERATE" TAG

To prevent serious injury or death, never allow
unauthorized personnel to start the engine or touch the
control levers during inspection and maintenance
activities. Always lower the attachment, pull the control
lock lever up, stop the engine, and remove the key
before performing inspection and maintenance.
1
Use a temporary hang tag to communicate that the
machine is out of service. You many need to use more
than one temporary hang tag depending on the
inspection and maintenance activities to be performed.
ALWAYS KEEP THE MACHINE CLEAN

Always keep the machine clean and free of scattered
debris, and spilled lubricant and oil.
If electrical components or systems get wet, then
equipment malfunction, short circuit, or fire may result in
serious injury or death.
Never use pressurized water or steam to clean inside the
operator cab or any electrical components, such as
sensors and connectors.
KEEP INSIDE OF OPERATOR CAB CLEAN

• To prevent slippery pedals, always remove mud, grease, oil, and other substances from the soles of your shoes
before entering the cab.
• Secure parts and tools inside the cab before operating.
To prevent fire:
• Do not bring explosive or flammable materials into the cab.
• Do not leave your cigarette lighter inside the cab.
If the cab temperature becomes too hot, the lighter may explode.
• After smoking, always put out your cigarette and shut the ashtray lid.
• Do not leave plastic bottles inside the cab or attach suction cups to the windows.
These items may act as lenses and could start a fire.
SEAT BELT INSPECTION

Check if seatbelt is cut or frayed and check if mounting hardware is damaged or loose before fastening the seatbelt.
If an issue is found with the seatbelt or the mounting hardware, do not use machine until the issue has been
repaired.
Replace seatbelts every 3 (three) years or more frequently if damaged or frayed.
1-19
1.3 SECURE VISIBILITY

1.3.1 BE AWARE OF YOUR SURROUNDINGS

When operating or traveling in the machine, the operator may not observe people and obstacles near the machine.
To prevent serious injury, death or damage to the machine.
• Adjust the mirrors for maximum visibility around the machine before operating. If needed, clean the mirrors.
• If your machine is equipped with the rearview camera and the side camera, clean the lens as needed before
operating.
• Move the attachment /equipment as needed to improve visibility of the right side during machine travel.
• If needed, use a signal person. The operator should always be alert and follow the signals from the signal
person. The operator shall respond to signals only from the appointed signal person, but shall obey a stop signal
from anyone at any time.
• When operating in dark locations, turn on the work light. Additional lighting may be needed to illuminate the work
area.
• Stop work if you have poor or limited visibility because of darkness, fog, rain, especially lightning, snow, or other
causes.
• Never attach mirrors or other articles to the handrails. Over time, excessive vibration may weaken the handrail
and cause it to fail.
• If a failure occurs on the rearview camera or the side camera, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer for
repair.
• Do not operate the machine without the monitor pictures of the rearview camera and the side camera being
displayed.
MIRROR AND CAMERA LOCATION

Only use genuine KOBELCO mirrors (A), rearview camera system (B), and side camera system (C).
Regarding adjustment of the mirrors and the rearview camera, see "ADJUSTMENT OF MIRRORS" in Chapter 3.
C
A
1-20
1.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION

1.4.1 STARTING
1
CHECK A "DO NOT OPERATE" TAG
Before starting the engine, check display of warning
tags.
If warning tags are displayed, do not start the engine.
The warning tags are used to notify that the machine is
in an inoperable condition.
Report this situation to a supervisor of the machine and
do not start the engine until the warning tags are
removed.
ONLY THE OPERATOR IS ALLOWED IN THE CAB

The operator is the only person that should be on or near the machine and in the cab. Do not allow any other
personnel to be present in the cab or on the machine.
CHECK WORKING SITE AND SET UP BARRICADES

To prevent serious injury, death and property damage,
before you start the engine and before you move the
machine:
• Check that no one is on, under, and around the
machine. Make sure that all personnel are clear of the
machine and surrounding area.
• Check there are no other machines or obstacles in the
area surrounding the machine.
• Set up barricades to prevent unauthorized personnel
and / or machines from entering the working site.
PRE-OPERATION SAFETY CHECK

To prevent serious injury or death, before operating:
• Close and lock the doors and windows. The window guard may not prevent flying debris from striking the
operator inside the cab.
• Adjust mirrors for maximum visibility around the machine. See "ADJUSTMENT OF MIRRORS" in Chapter 3 for
additional information.
• Check the horn and the travel alarm (if equipped) function properly.
1-21
FASTEN YOUR SEATBELT

To prevent serious injury or death, always fasten your
seatbelt before starting the machine and keep your
seatbelt fastened during operation.
Sit in operator's seat and adjust seat so you can properly
operate all of the machine controls.
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

• Check the pilot control shut-off lever is in the
"LOCKED" (up) position. A
• Confirm that all control levers have returned to
neutral.
• Sound horn to alert personnel near the machine.
• Always be seated in the operator's seat with your
seatbelt fastened.
A: Locked Position
B
B: Unlocked Position
Only start the engine from the operator's seat. Never

attempt to start the engine by connecting the starter
terminals to the batteries.
Unexpected machine movement could result in serious
injury, death, or damage to the machine and electrical
system.
WARM UP
To prevent serious injury or death, always allow the machine to warm up prior to operation, especially in cold
weather. Do not start operation as soon as the engine is started. If not warmed up, there could be a delay between
when the control levers are moved and when the machine or the attachment /equipment responds, resulting in
unintended or unexpected movement of the machine or attachment /equipment.
1-22
ATTACHMENT MODE SELECT SWITCH

This machine has 3 attachment modes: "Bucket",
"Crusher" and "Breaker".
Check the attachment installed matches the selected S
K
attachment mode and is appropriate for the task to be
performed. If the attachment mode selected does not
match the attachment, the machine will not work properly
and it will result in serious injury, death, or property
damage.
See "SWITCHING ATTACHMENT MODE" in Chapter 3
for additional information. 1
CHECK CONTROL PATTERN BEFORE OPERATING

Before operation, always check the operation of each control lever and each pedal.
If the movement of the machine does not match the control pattern selected, stop the work and shut down the
machine. The machine movement must match with the operating pattern indicated on the card.
If the machine movement does not match the card displayed in the cab, change the card so as to match the
machine control pattern.
CHECK WARNING DEVICES

Make sure that the travel alarm (if equipped), and all other warning devices are warning properly.
AVOID INTERFERENCE BETWEEN THE ATTACHMENT AND THE MACHINE

Check clearance between the attachment and the cab
before starting operation because a certain kinds of
attachment and a certain combination of the option and
the machine may cause the contact of the attachment
and the cab or some other parts of the machine.
1-23
PRECAUTIONS OF SWINGING / TRAVELING

• Always sound the horn before starting the engine,
traveling the machine, or swinging the upper structure
to alert people in the vicinity of the machine.
• Always operate at a safe distance from other
machines or obstacles in the vicinity of the machine.
• Place a signal person at poor visibility area.
1-24
1.4.2 TRAVELING
ALWAYS CONFIRM DIRECTION OF TRAVEL
Before moving the machine, check the position of the
undercarriage (tracks). The normal travel position is for
the idler wheels(1) to the front under the cab and the
drive sprockets(2) to the rear.
When the undercarriage (tracks) is reversed, the
directional controls operate in the opposite directions
compared to when the idler wheels(1) are in the front.
Move the travel levers slowly and travel at a low speed. 1
1 2
MOVE TRAVEL LEVERS IN A SLOW AND DELIBERATE MANNER

• Gradually increase speed. Moving the travel levers quickly will cause the machine to accelerate quickly and
result in a sudden start or sudden acceleration.
• Do not move the travel levers from forward to reverse or vice versa rapidly.
• Do not perform an abrupt pivot turn or spin turn.
• Do not stop quickly by releasing your grip on the levers during travel.
PRECAUTIONS IN TRAVELING
Travel on a level and firm ground as much as possible.
• Keep the bucket at the position possible to lower the
bucket to the ground immediately when stopping the
machine in an emergency.
• Travel slowly on a rough terrain.
• Do not go over obstacles. When going over obstacles
inevitably, go slowly with the attachment positioned
close to the ground as much as possible. Because the
machine may tip/roll over.
1-25
TRAVELING ON SLOPES
Traveling up and down the slopes of 30 degrees or more is not allowed to avoid a risk of tipping/rolling over.
• When traveling on slopes, keep the bucket at the
position possible to lower the bucket to the ground
immediately when stopping the machine in an
emergency. When traveling down the slopes, go
extremely slowly.
• Travel slowly on grasses, leaves and wet steel/wood
plates as the surfaces such are slippery.
Traveling up slope
Traveling down slope
• When traveling up steep slopes, extend the front

attachment to balance the machine and travel slowly.
Traveling up steep slope
1-26
PRECAUTION OF TRAVELING ON SLOPES

When traveling on the slopes, be careful of tipping/rolling
over and skidding. Keep the bucket at the position
possible to lower the bucket to the ground immediately
when stopping the machine in an emergency. Do not turn
the machine direction on or go across the slopes. Go
down to a level ground and take a detour-route for
safety.
OK 1
TRAVELING ON FROZEN OR SNOW COVERED GROUND

Use extreme care when operating on frozen or snow covered ground.
• The ground may be extremely slippery and the machine can slide or skid.
• Do not perform abrupt start, stop, or movements or the machine could become unstable and tip or roll over.
• Snow can make elevation changes (e.g., road shoulders or steep banks) hard to perceive.
• Snow can cover obstacles or obstructions and make them difficult to recognize.
• During the day as ambient temperatures rise, frozen ground may thaw and become soft and cause the machine
to become unstable or stuck.
TRAVEL ON WET OR LOW TRACTION SURFACES

Use caution when travelling on an incline over wet surfaces, including wood, steel, and piles of wet leaves and
branches. The machine could slide or skid and result in serious injury, death or property damage.
1-27
1.4.3 PROHIBITED OPERATIONS

Always follow the procedures in this manual when operating this machine. Abuse and misuse may result in serious
injury, death, and property damage and reduce the life of the machine. Never attempt the following under any
circumstances.
NEVER USE THE SWING POWER TO PERFORM WORK

Never apply swinging force (slewing force) to rock sliding
work and side wall breaking work.
If the swing power is used to perform work, excessive
force may be exerted on the machine and the
attachment /equipment resulting in damage to the
machine and the attachment /equipment and may
reduce the life of the swing system.
NEVER USE THE TRAVEL POWER TO PERFORM WORK

Do not use the travel power to perform digging or
leveling work with the attachment in contact with the
ground.
If the travel power is used to perform work, excessive
force may be exerted on the machine and the
attachment /equipment resulting in damage to the
machine and the attachment /equipment.
DO NOT PERFORM "HAMMERING" OPERATIONS WITH THE BUCKET

Never use the bucket for hammering and piling. It will
cause severe damage to the machine and its
components.
1-28
DO NOT USE MACHINE WEIGHT FOR DIGGING OPERATION

Do not use the machine weight to obtain power to dig.
This could cause severe damage to the machine and its
components.
Before digging the hard bedrock, crack the hard bedrock
into pieces by another method and then dig it. It will not
damage the machine and result in more economical way.
OPERATING ON A SLOPE
• There is a risk of the machine losing the balance to
tip/roll over when operating on a slope. Pay attention
to the operation.
• When the machine is on a slope, do not swing the OK
machine to the downhill side.
• If swinging is unavoidable, make an embankment for
the machine to be as level as possible to swing on a
slope.
CALL BEFORE YOU DIG

Confirm the local government or the public service
company for locations of underground utilities of gas,
water, phone, electrical power, and so forth before
working in the area seemingly with these lines.
Always inspect the worksite for evidence of unmarked
utilities and piping and contact others if necessary.
1-29
LIMITED MOVEMENT IN WORK AREA

Use extreme caution when working in areas that
constrain or limit the movements of the machine,
including tunnels, bridges, around electrical power lines,
or inside structures, to prevent the machine or the
attachment /equipment from contacting these obstacles
during operation.
To prevent serious injury, death or property damage,
always use a signal person to assist the operator with
maneuvering in these areas and keep the machine and
the attachment /equipment a safe distance from these
obstacles.
The operator should always be alert and follow the
signals from the signal person. The operator shall respond to signals only from the appointed signal person, but
shall obey a stop signal from anyone at any time.
OPERATING UNDER CLIFF OR OVERHANG

Never undercut or dig beneath a cliff or overhang. A
landslide could occur or rocks and debris could fall on
the machine. Be aware that the cab and the guards
installed provide limited protection for the operator and
may not prevent serious injury or death.
The top guard should not allow loads up to 227 kg (500
lbs.) dropped from a height of 5.22 m (17 ft.) to penetrate
the cab. During demolition or other activities, the load,
the distance of the drop, or both could produce forces
that exceed the limits of the top guard and cause serious
injury or death.
DEEP EXCAVATION OPERATION

To prevent damage to the machine, during deep
excavation or diagonal digging.
• Do not allow the arm or the hydraulic piping to contact
the side of the trench or hole.
• Do not allow the arm to contact the crawler shoe
when operating with the arm below horizontal.
1-30
NO PERSONNEL ALLOWED UNDER THE BUCKET OR ATTACHMENT / EQUIPMENT

Never move a suspended load or the bucket over a
person or above the driver's cab of a truck.
The load could fall and cause serious injury or death.
GROUND CONDITIONS
Always place tracks perpendicular (at a 90 degree angle)
to the edge of a cliff or the road shoulder with the travel
motors(1) positioned away from the edge to prevent the
machine from falling over the edge.
Visually inspect for soft ground near the edge, especially
either any raised ground or any wet ground following a
rain.
Do not dig close to the machine or undercut the bank in
front of the machine to prevent the machine from falling
1
over the edge.
NEVER USE BUCKET TEETH TO HOOK AND MOVE LOADS

Use the proper lifting devices for object handling having
a capacity to handle the load.
Never use the bucket teeth to hook and move loads.
1-31
DO NOT OPERATE THE CYLINDERS TO THE STROKE END

Operate the bucket, boom and arm cylinders to leave
some clearances (A) to the both stroke ends. If the A
cylinder is operated to the stroke end, it will generate an
excessive load and cause damage to not only the
cylinder but also the pin, boom and arm.
DO NOT OPERATE IN TUNNELS

Do not operate the machine in enclosed spaces or, in
any case, without appropriate ventilation. Operations in
tunnels or underground sites where potential explosive
conditions exist are not allowed. There is a danger for
explosions and potentially deadly injuries.
Please comply with the ATEX regulation relative to
devices to be used in a potentially explosive
environment.
Regarding devices to be used and related regulations,
please consult with your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
1-32
ELECTRICAL POWER LINES

Keep a safe distance from electrical power.
Never approach power lines with any part of the machine
and its load unless all local and national required safety
precautions have been taken. Electrocution and death
can result from arcing, touching or even being close to a
machine that is in contact with or near an electrical
source.
• Maintain the maximum possible distance from power
lines and never violate the minimum clearance.
• Always contact the nearest electric utility and
1
determine jointly what specific precautions must be
taken to insure safety.
• Consider all lines to be power lines and treat all power lines as energized even though it is known or believed
that the power is shut off and the line is visibly grounded.
• Use a signal person to observe the approach of any part of the machine or load to the power line.
• Caution all ground personnel to stand clear of the machine and the load at all times.
• If the machine should come in contact with a live electrical source, do not leave the operator's seat. Do not allow
anyone to approach or touch the machine.
The reference of the safe distances from high voltage cables are as follows.
LINE VOLTAGE(V) MINIMUM DISTANCE m(feet)
0 to 50,000 3.0(10) or more
50,000 to 200,000 4.5(15) or more
200,000 to 350,000 6.0(20) or more
350,000 to 500,000 7.5(25) or more
500,000 to 750,000 10.5(35) or more
750,000 to 1,000,000 13.5(45) or more
WORKSITES IN URBAN AREAS

Set up barricades to prevent unauthorized personnel
and/or vehicles from entering the worksite. If working
near a road, use a signal person and signs to alert
vehicles and pedestrians of potential hazards and falling
objects. If needed, use a signal person to direct traffic.
The operator should always be alert and follow the
signals from the signal person. The operator shall
respond to signals only from the appointed signal
person, but shall obey a stop signal from anyone at any
time.
USE WORK LIGHTS

• When operating in dark locations, turn on the work light. If necessary, use additional lighting devices to make the
work areas bright enough to operate.
• Stop work if you have poor or limited visibility because of darkness, fog, rain, especially lightning, snow, or other
causes.
1-33
OPERATING ON SOFT GROUND

When working on soft or wet ground, place logs or lumber horizontally beneath the crawler tracks to prevent the
machine from becoming stuck.
Be aware frozen ground may become soft or wet as the ambient temperature rises during the day and could cause
the machine to become unstable or stuck.
VISUALLY INSPECT GROUND CONDITIONS BEFORE OPERATING

The ground near cliffs, trenches and road shoulders may be too soft to operate the machine. Visually inspect for
soft ground before travelling or working in these areas. Be aware that rain, blasting activities, earthquakes, or other
events may cause the ground to be soft.
To prevent serious injury, death, and property damage, only travel or work on firm ground near sudden elevation
changes, including cliffs, trenches and road shoulders. The weight of the machine or vibration from the machine
may cause the ground to collapse and cause the machine to tip or roll over.
1-34
1.4.4 SAFETY CHECK ON THE PARKING MACHINE

There are risks of creeping, barbarous act or unexpected movement at the time of coming start if the machine is not
parked properly.
Park the machine following the safety parking procedures shown below.
ALWAYS PARK MACHINE PROPERLY

1. Travel machine to a safe location on firm, level
ground.
2. Lower the attachment to the ground.
If equipped with a dozer blade, lower it to the 1
ground.
3. Set the auto acceleration switch to the "OFF"
position.
4. Pull the control lock lever to the "LOCKED" (up)
position.
If not locked, incidental contact with the control
levers, pedals and other control devices may result
in unexpected and unintended machine movement.
5. Allow engine to idle at low speed for about 5 minutes to cool-down engine.
6. Turn the starter switch to the "OFF" position and remove the key.
Close and lock the windows and the cab door. Check the windows, doors and all other machine access covers
are locked and secure.
PARKING MACHINE ON SLOPE

If the machine must be parked on a slope.
1. The undercarriage and the upper structure and the
attachment /equipment must face downhill.
2. Lower the attachment into the ground. If equipped
with a bucket, wedge the bucket into the ground.
If equipped with a dozer blade, lower it to the
ground.
position.
position.
7. Block the tracks in the front and the rear.
1-35
1.5 AT THE END OF EACH SHIFT

Always make sure the machine is secure and ready to be used for the next shift or moved to another job site.
1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.
2. Lower attachment to the ground.
position.
4. Close and secure all windows in place to prevent
water or moisture from damaging any electrical
components.
5. Remove the key from the key switch and lock all
doors and access panels.
6. Refill the fuel tank to the full mark to reduce air
volume and condensation (moisture).
This will decrease the possibility of freezing in the fuel tank, rusting due to moisture and other potential issues.
7. Thoroughly clean and inspect the machine. If any issues are found, always lubricate, repair, or replace any
machine parts and systems prior to restarting the machine.
8. If the machine is stored in cold climates, it may be necessary to remove the batteries from the machine and
store them in a warm, well ventilated area. Re-install the batteries before the next start up. This helps prevent
premature battery deterioration.
1-36
1.6 PRECAUTIONS OF INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE

1.6.1 PERIODIC INSPECTIONS

• Every year, the machine should be inspected by a qualified inspector or a registered inspection agency.
1
• The machine should have an inspection seal to document the month and the year of the last inspection.
• Every month inspect the machine for the following.
See chapter 4. "INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE" for additional information about the monthly inspection &
maintenance requirements for your machine.
Always keep all maintenance and all inspection records, including both the monthly and the yearly inspections,
according to local codes and regulations of your country.
1-37
1.6.2 BEFORE INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE

READ OPERATION/MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES CAREFULLY
Improper maintenance could cause serious injury (crush or burn) and damage the machine.
Read and understand the maintenance procedures (preparation for safe work, proper tools, qualifications,
important parts, supervisor designation and wear the appropriate personal protective equipment, etc.) described in
the manuals before safely and carefully inspecting and performing maintenance on the machine.
CONFIRM JOB PROCEDURES

To prevent accidents, confirm all work procedures before starting.
USE A SIGNAL PERSON AND A FLAGMAN

Know and use the hand signals required for particular jobs and confirm who has the responsibility for signaling:
All personnel must know and understand all the signals.
The operator shall respond to signals only from the appointed signal person, but shall obey a stop signal from
anyone at any time.
The signal person must stand in a clearly visible location when giving the signals.
ORGANIZE AND CLEAN UP WORKING SITE

Inspecting and maintaining the machine at a messy working site may cause personal injury.
Clear obstacles, grease, oil, paint, debris, etc., from the working site.
ATTACH A "DO NOT OPERATE" TAG

• Never allow unauthorized personnel to start the
engine or touch the control levers during inspection
and maintenance activities.
• Always lower the attachment, pull the control lock
lever up, stop the engine, and remove the key before
performing maintenance.
• Use a temporary "DO NOT OPERATE" hang tag to
communicate that the machine is out of service. You
may need to use more than one temporary hang tag
depending on the work to be performed.
• Always have an operator at the controls to shut down
the machine if the machine needs to be running for
maintenance activity or an inspection. The operator
and the maintenance personnel must have a means of communication when performing these tasks.
USE PROPER TOOLS

To prevent serious injury or death, do not use of damaged tools or tools not intended for the task.
1-38
1.6.3 DURING INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE

STOP ENGINE BEFORE PERFORMING INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Always stop the engine and allow the engine and other components to cool before performing inspection or
maintenance activities. Do not touch engine components when the engine is running or immediately after it has
stopped to prevent serious injury or death. There are many hazards that can cause harm, including rotating parts,
high voltage, high pressure fluids, and high temperature.
HOT FLUIDS
To prevent burn injuries.
• Do not remove the radiator cap immediately after 1
stopping operation. Hot radiator fluid may cause
burns. Wait until the radiator cap is cool to the touch,
then slowly loosen to release the internal pressure.
Then remove cap.
• Do not remove the oil cap or plug immediately after
stopping operation. Hot oil may cause burns. Wait
until the oil cap or plug is cool to the touch, then
slowly loosen it to release the internal pressure. Then
remove the oil cap or plug.
HIGH PRESSURE OIL

Do not attempt to repair or tighten hydraulic hoses or
fittings when the engine is running or when the hydraulic
circuit is pressurized.
Pressure can be maintained in the hydraulic circuit long
after the engine has been shut down.
• Always release the pressure on the hydraulic lines
before refilling or draining the oil, or inspecting or
maintaining the machine.
High pressure oil can penetrate the skin or eyes and
cause injury, blindness or death. Fluid escaping from a
small hole can be almost invisible.
OK
• Always wear a face shield, protective glasses and
gloves when inspecting for leaks.
• Always use a piece of cardboard or wood to inspect for suspected leaks.
If oil is injected into the skin, it must be removed within a few hours by a doctor familiar with this type of injury.
High pressure oil from even a pin hole leak can penetrate the skin or eyes and cause severe injury or blindness.
HIGH PRESSURE FUEL IN THE FUEL LINES

The fuel lines operate at high pressure when the engine is running. Before inspecting and maintaining the fuel lines:
• Stop engine and wait at least 30 seconds to allow the fuel line pressure to decrease below its operating
pressure.
• Always release the fuel pressure.
1-39
HIGH PRESSURE OIL HOSE/PIPING

Leakage of oil or fuel from the hose or piping may cause a fire or malfunction of the machine. Stop working
immediately whenever looseness of or leakage from the installation parts of the hoses or piping are found and
tighten or repair them using proper repair procedures and tightening torque.
Consult with your KOBELCO authorized dealer if damage or deformation of the hoses or piping is found.
The hoses in below-mentioned conditions are required to be replaced.
• A damaged hose or hose with a deformed fitting.
• The sheathing material of the hose has scratches or cuttings, or exposes the wire reinforcement layer.
• A part of the sheathing material is swelled.
• A part of the hose shows the sign of "torsion" or "crush".
ROTATING PARTS
Stay clear of all rotating and moving parts.
• Wrapping or entanglement may result in serious injury
or death. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
the rotating fan and running fan belts.
• Do not drop or insert tools and others to the fan and
belt. They will be blown away or damaged, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
• Always have an operator at the controls to shut down
the machine if the machine needs to be running for
maintenance activity or an inspection. The operator
and the maintenance personnel must have a means of communication when performing these tasks.
VENTILATION PRECAUTIONS
Never operate the engine in an enclosed area without
adequate ventilation. Engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide. Inspecting and maintaining the machine
indoors or in a place with poor ventilation could cause
serious injury or death.
Adequate ventilation is needed when inspecting,
maintaining or running the machine indoors. Fully
ventilate the work area, especially when handling fuel,
cleaning solvent or paint.
If the natural ventilation is poor, install ventilators, fans,
exhaust extension pipes or other artificial venting
devices.
CONNECTING, DISCONNECTING AND STORING ATTACHMENT / EQUIPMENT

• Always follow the instructions from your supervisor
and the instructions in this manual when connecting
or disconnecting the attachment /equipment.
• Secure the attachment /equipment to prevent them
from falling over when stored.
• Do not allow unauthorized personnel in the storage
area.
1-40
SECURELY BLOCK THE MACHINE OR ANY COMPONENT THAT MAY FALL

To prevent serious injury or death, always support all the attachment /equipment when performing maintenance or
inspecting underneath the machine or any raised attachment /equipment.
• Before performing maintenance or repairs under the
machine, park the machine on firm level ground,
lower the attachment to the ground, pull the control
lock lever and remove the key.
• Securely block the tracks.
• If you must work beneath the raised machine or
equipment, always use wood blocks, jack-stands or
other rigid and stable supports. Never get under the
1
machine, the arm or the attachment /equipment, if
they are not sufficiently supported. This procedure is
especially important when working on hydraulic
cylinders.
LOCK THE ACCESS PANEL

To prevent serious injury, always secure the door panel in the open position when maintaining the machine. If the
door panel is not secure, it could move and you may be injured.
PREVENT FALLS
• Clean all slippery substances such as grease, oil,
hydraulic oil, mud, and others attached to the steps,
handrails, ladders, and platforms.
• Inspect appearances and mounting portions of the
steps, handrails, ladders, and platforms. Replace any
damaged parts and tighten any loose bolts or nuts.
• Use the proper personal protective equipment, such
as a body harness, if needed.
• Use extreme caution when walking on elevated
surfaces to avoid slipping.
• Always use the steps, handrails, ladders and platforms to access locations above the ground level.
• Always face the machine and maintain three points of contact with the steps and handrails.
• Do not have anything in your hands, including tools, when getting on and off the machine.
• Never jump on and off the machine, or attempt to get on and off a moving machine.
• Clean all spills, and store or secure tools in a strong place properly after working.
DO NOT DROP TOOLS OR PARTS

Falling tools or parts may cause damage to the machine or cause unintended movement of the machine and result
in serious injury or death.
• Retrieve any tools that fall immediately.
• Always secure tools or parts that are near the machine and store tools properly after maintenance is complete.
GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR WELDING

Contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer before welding on the machine.
Welding could damage wires, electronic processors, hoses, and tubes. Do not weld tanks or lines that contain
flammable fluids or flammable material. Empty and purge the lines and tanks. Then clean the lines and tanks with a
nonflammable solvent prior to welding or flame cutting. To prevent serious injury or possible fire, welding work must
be performed by a certified welder at a facility with welding devices suitable for the task.
1-41
BASIC PRECAUTIONS FOR WELDING AND GRINDING

• Before welding, select a location away from flammable items and have a fire extinguisher nearby.
• Perform work in a well-ventilated area.
• Always wear protective gears appropriate for welding.
• Turn the engine off and remove the key.
• Disconnect the negative (-) cable from its battery terminal.
• Remove or adequately shield all components, hoses, tubes, and wires in the area.
• Ensure that the components are properly grounded in order to avoid unwanted arcs. Attach the welder ground
cable directly to the area within 1 m (3 ft.) from the part to be welded and on the same parent material.
If the welder ground cable is attached to the area near electric parts/connectors, these electric parts/connectors
may be damaged.
• Make sure neither the bearing nor the bearing seal is between the welder ground cable and the part to be
welded.
• Do not attach the welder ground cable near the pin or cylinder. It will damage the plating on the pin or cylinder.
• Remove paint from any surface to be welded to avoid generating poisonous gas.
• After grinding or welding, confirm there is no smoke or fire near the work area.
USE CAUTION WHEN ADJUSTING THE TRACK TENSION

The track adjuster contains high pressure grease. If the
tension is adjusted without following the prescribed
procedure, the grease fitting may fly off and discharge
grease, resulting in serious injury.
• Do not put your face, arms, legs or body in front of the
grease fitting. If grease contacts your skin, wash
completely with soap and water to avoid skin
inflammation.
• Loosen the grease fitting one turn to gradually relieve
pressure. If grease does not come out after one turn
of the grease fitting, there is a problem. Call your KOBELCO authorized dealer for assistance.
• Loosen the grease fitting slowly.
After relieving the grease pressure, see "ADJUSTING CRAWLER TENSION" in Chapter 4 for additional
information about how to adjust the track tension.
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE THE RECOIL SPRING

Never attempt to disassemble the recoil spring. The recoil spring assembly acts as a shock absorber for the front
idler and contains a powerful spring under tension. If it is disassembled, the spring will eject from the assembly and
result in severe personal injury or death.
If there is an issue with the recoil spring assembly, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer for repair.
1-42
BEFORE HAMMERING METAL PINS, TEETH OR BEARINGS

Always wear required personal protective equipment such as safety glasses when using hammers, as metal
fragments or other objects can fly and cause serious personal injury.
Broken metal pieces may cause severe personal injury when hammering metal pins, teeth or bearings.
To avoid injury:
• Wear protective gears such as safety glasses, gloves,
hardhat, protective shoes, etc.
• Confirm the work area is clear of personnel before
using hammer.
• Use a piece of wood or similar material to absorb the
direct impact of the hammer when removing metal
1
pins, teeth or bearings.
BE AWARE OF THE HAZARDS WITH THE REFRIGERANT AND THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
• Do not loosen the refrigerant circuit parts. If refrigerant gets in your eyes, it may cause loss of sight including
potential blindness. Do not touch the refrigerant circuit parts. If refrigerant gets on your skin, it may cause
frostbite.
• Do not inhale refrigerant gas; and
• Keep refrigerant gas away from heat sources.
Dispose of refrigerant according to local codes and regulations of each country.
If you need additional assistance, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer about proper disposal of refrigerant.
1-43
1.6.4 PROHIBITED IN INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE

Any welding on structural parts (as undercarriage, upper frame, attachment/equipment, parts, ...) shall only be done
by the manufacturer, or authorized KOBELCO dealer. Welding performed by others will void the warranty for your
machine.
NEVER USE HEAT NEAR HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT, PIPING OR HOSES

When welding, soldering or using a torch, do not expose
piping and hoses containing oil to heat. Heat may create
the potential for exposure to flammable gas and result in
a fire.
Always cover hydraulic equipment, piping, hoses and
other flammable items with fire-proof blankets.
DO NOT HEAT PIPING WITH FLAMMABLE OIL

• Do not weld or perform gas cutting on pipes and tubes filled with flammable oil.
• Remove flammable oil from pipes and tubes using nonflammable solvent before welding and gas cutting.
DO NOT MODIFY MACHINE WITHOUT APPROVAL FROM KOBELCO

• Any and all modifications to this machine must be
approved by KOBELCO.
• Damage to the machine or any failures that may result
from unauthorized modification of the machine are not
covered by the warranty.
1-44
1.6.5 AFTER INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE

AFTER MAINTENANCE
Before returning machine to service, always confirm there are no leaks and the controls are functioning properly.
• Run the engine at low idle speed and check for oil or water leaks.
• Slowly operate each control lever and check that it is functioning properly.
• Then gradually increase the engine speed and check for oil or water leaks again.
• Manipulate each control lever again and check that it is functioning properly.
• Close the doors, guards, engine hood, etc.
1
PROPER WASTE DISPOSAL
• Drain used fluids from the machine into leak proof
containers.
• Never pour used oil or other fluids onto the ground,
down a drain or into any body of water. Improper
disposal can harm the environment.
Contact your local government or public service
company to ask about proper disposal methods.
• Properly dispose of oil, fuel, engine coolant,
refrigerant, solvents, filters, batteries and other
harmful substances according to local codes and
regulations of each country.
1-45
1.7 PRECAUTIONS FOR BATTERY

1.7.1 HANDLING THE BATTERY

PREVENTION OF ELECTROLYTE BURNS
Wear protective glasses or face shield, and chemical
resistant gloves and clothing when handling or servicing
batteries.
Battery electrolyte contains dilute sulfuric acid.
Electrolyte will damage eyes or skin on contact. If battery
electrolyte contacts skin or eyes, flush affected areas
immediately with a large amount of fresh water, then
seek medical attention.
Wash hands after touching batteries and connectors.
BATTERY EXPLOSION PREVENTION

• Always keep cigarettes, flames and other ignition
sources away from batteries.
Batteries give off hydrogen gases that can explode
and cause serious injury or death.
• Always keep all battery caps tightly secured.
CHARGING THE BATTERY

• Turn the starter switch to the "OFF" position and remove the key.
• Turn the battery shut-off switch "OFF".
• Do not connect the positive (+) terminal to the negative (-) terminal using tools or metal objects to check the
battery.
• Never allow tools or metal objects to touch both the battery positive (+) terminal and the machine. The resulting
spark could cause an explosion.
• Remove the battery caps to allow explosive gases to escape in a well-ventilated area.
• Do not charge the frozen battery because it could explode. To prevent the explosion, wait until the battery
temperature rises to 16 degrees C (60 degrees F) or higher. Never attempt to thaw or to warm the battery with
open flames.
• Do not use or charge the battery of which the liquid level is below the lower limit. This might allow gases to build
up inside the battery and explode. Check the battery liquid level periodically, and refill the battery with distilled
water to the proper liquid level.
• See paragraph "INSPECTING AND MAINTAINING BATTERY" in Chapter 4 for details.
1-46
REPLACING THE BATTERY

• Turn the starter switch to the "OFF" position and remove the key.
• Turn the battery shut-off switch "OFF".
• Always disconnect the negative (-) cable first when removing the battery cables.
• Do not connect the positive (+) terminal to the negative (-) terminal using tools or metal objects to check the
battery.
• Never allow tools or metal objects to touch both the battery positive (+) terminal and the machine. The resulting
spark could cause an explosion.
BATTERY DISPOSAL 1
Dispose of batteries according to local codes and regulations of each country.
If you need additional assistance, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer about proper disposal of used
batteries.
1-47
1.8 HANDLING OF THE ACCUMULATOR OR GAS

SPRING

High pressured nitrogen gas is sealed inside the

accumulator or gas spring.
• Never attempt to disassemble accumulator or gas
spring.
• Never drill or weld, or perform gas cutting on
accumulator or gas spring.
• Keep fire away from the accumulator or gas spring.
• Never throw accumulator or gas spring into fire.
• Ask your KOBELCO authorized dealer to vent the gas
from the accumulator or to remove the gas spring
before disposal.
(Accumulators and gas springs collected by KOBELCO will be transferred to the parts manufacturer for
disposal.)
1-48
1.9 TOWING THE MACHINE

To prevent serious injury or death from improper towing methods.

• Always wear leather gloves when handling wire ropes. 1
• Check the wire rope to be used for towing is strong enough to tow the weight of your machine.
• Never use a wire rope which has cut strands (A), reduced diameter (B), kinks (C) or other visible damage or the
wire rope may break while towing.
• Never tow the machine across a slope.
• Never stand between the towing machine and the machine or object that is being towed.
• To prevent damage to the wire ropes, place pads between the wire ropes and edges of the lower frame.
• Do not shock load the wire ropes. Tow slowly and avoid sudden load changes to the wire ropes.
• Shackles must be used for towing.
A B C
1.9.1 TOWING METHOD OF THE MACHINE

• Only tow the machine if absolutely necessary, e.g. moving the machine to a safe location for repair.
• If the machine cannot travel under its own power, attach wire ropes that are strong enough to tow your machine
to the positions on the lower frame as shown. Never use the lower frame holes for towing. Then tow the machine
using another machine.
• Keep the wire ropes level and keep both machines in a straight line when towing as shown in the figure.
• In case of towing needing to disengage the travel motor brakes, chock both track crawlers securely to prevent
the machine from moving uncontrollably before disengaging the travel motor brakes.
OK
1-49
1-50
［2. MACHINE FAMILIARIZATION］
2. MACHINE FAMILIARIZATION 2
2-1
2-2
2.1 BASIC COMPONENTS OF THE MACHINE

1
4
3
33
34 2
35
9 2
36 32
8 10 5
Indicate the right side
18
37 31
6
11
7
38
21
24 20
25
26
23
27 22
19 16
28 17
29
12 14
13 30
39 15
Inside the left side door
2-3
Item Name Item Name Item Name

1 Engine 14 Oil cooler 27 Lower Roller
2 Hydraulic pump 15 Radiator 28 Track guide
3 Exhaust gas cleaning device 16 Intercooler 29 Upper roller
4 SCR 17 Fuel cooler 30 Travel motor

5 Control valve 18 Cab 31 Boom cylinder
6 Hydraulic oil tank 19 Left side door 32 Boom
7 Fuel tank 20 Right side door 33 Arm cylinder
8 DEF/AdBlue pump 21 Engine hood 34 Arm
9 DEF/AdBlue tank 22 Counterweight 35 Bucket cylinder
10 Swing motor 23 Swing bearing 36 Idler link
11 Swivel joint 24 Crawler 37 Bucket link

12 Air cleaner 25 Front idler 38 Bucket
13 Battery 26 Crawler adjuster 39 Battery power-off switch
2-4
2.2 OPERATOR'S STATION NOMENCLATURE

24 11
6 4 5 7
12 25
26
31
3
10
1 2
I
16
17 DETAILA
13
14 23 18
8 21
20 22
23 30
19 29
28
23
15
27
VIEW I
2-5
Item Name Item Name

1 Left control lever (with horn switch) 17 Engine throttle
2 Right control lever 18 Working light (boom and deck)
3 Pilot control shut-off Lever 19 Manual regeneration switch
4 Left travel lever 20 Cab rotating light switch
5 Right travel lever 21 Pressure release switch
6 Left travel pedal 22 Overload alarm select switch
7 Right travel pedal 23 Cap (Optionally installed switch)
8 Operator's seat 24 Engine throttle for redundant mode
9 Life hammer 25 Swing parking brake release switch
10 Cup holder 26 KPSS release switch
11 Fuse and relay box 27 Engine stop switch
12 Gauge cluster 28 USB port/external input terminal (AUX)
13 Radio 29 Working light (cab light)
14 Air conditioner operation panel 30 Travel alarm switch
15 12 V power supply 31 Dual monitor

16 Starter switch
2-6
2.3 GAUGE CLUSTER

The gauge cluster consists of A. meter (fuel level and
engine coolant temperature), B. switch panel, and C.
multi-display. 1 S
12h
2
10
C
12 7
B
9 8
6 14
5 15
11 2
4 13
d a c
Symbol Item Name Item Name
1 Engine coolant temperature meter 3 DEF/AdBlue level gauge

A. Meter
2 Fuel level meter
4 Screen change switch 12 Digging switch
5 Buzzer stop switch 13 Nibbler switch

6 Work mode select switch 14 Breaker switch
7 Washer switch 15 Arrow switch
B. Switch panel
8 Wiper switch a Up arrow switch
9 Travel speed select switch b Down arrow switch
10 Auto acceleration switch c Right arrow switch
11 Menu switch d Left arrow switch

C Display 16 Multi-display
• When a warning is displayed on the multi-display, stop your work immediately and inspect and maintain the
failure part.
For inspecting or maintaining, see "MAINTENANCE" in Chapter 4.
• The indications on the multi-display do not assure the condition of the machine.
• The visual checking should be carried out for the maintenance and inspection of the machine, without relying on
the multi-display only.
2-7
2.3.1 MULTI-DISPLAY
The multi-display can be roughly categorized into the
following six functions.
• Main Screen S
12h
• Switch Operation Display
• Warning Display
• Nibbler and Breaker Mode Display
• User Menu Display
• Fuel Efficiency Graph Display
After starting the engine, usually main screen is shown
as in the figure.
2.3.2 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE METER

The meter indicates the temperature of the engine 1
coolant. After turning the starter switch "ON", the engine
coolant temperature meter is displayed on the multi- 2
display. Water temperature is indicated with a pointer,
and the water temperature is normal if it is within the
white range. When the water temperature is low, it points
the blue range. When it points the red range during 3
operation, it shows overheat state. At that time, put the Engine throttle to the low idle position, and perform stand-by
operation until the pointer is in the white range.
(1) Red: Overheat
(2) White: Normal
(3) Blue: Low
2.3.3 FUEL LEVEL METER

The meter shows the amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
After turning the starter switch "ON", the fuel level meter 2
is displayed on the multi-display. The amount of fuel is
indicated with a pointer, and when the fuel level is low,
the pointer points E. When the fuel level is low, see
"CHECKING FUEL LEVEL AND MAKING UP" in
Chapter 3, and supply fuel. 1
During the low fuel consumption operation, "ECO green mark" turns on.
(1) Red: Refuel is required
(2) Green: ECO green mark
2-8
2.3.4 DEF/ADBLUE LEVEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the DEF/AdBlue level in the DEF/
AdBlue tank. After turning the starter switch "ON", the
level gauge is displayed on the multi-display.
It shows the level in 10 levels. As the DEF/AdBlue S
12h
amount goes lower, the level number decreases. It is
adequate when DEF/AdBlue is Level 3 (Green) or
above. The warning is displayed and the warning sounds
when the level gauge becomes Level 2 (Yellow), Level 1
(Red), and Level 0 (No display). At that time, see
"CHECKING DEF/ADBLUE LEVEL AND REFILLING". in
Chapter 3.
• Level 3 to 10: Green
• Level 2: Yellow
• Level 1: Red 3~10
LEVEL3~10 (gre e n)
• Level 0: No display
2
LEVEL2 (ye llow)
LEVEL1 (re d)
LEVEL0 (no indica tor)
2.3.5 HOUR METER

This indicates the total time the engine has run. As long
as the engine is running the hour meter continues to
count, even if the machine is not traveling. When the
K
engine is running, the meter counts up 1 every hour,
regardless of the engine speed. Use the count as the
reference for inspection and maintenance intervals.
2-9
2.3.6 SCREEN CHANGE SWITCH

After the starter switch is turned "ON" or the engine is
started, the display always shows the screen the last
time the engine was stopped.
S
Each time "screen change switch" (3) is pressed, the 12h
item cycles through "fuel efficiency graph" (a) and "logo

mark" (b) in order.
The fuel consumption from 30 minutes ago to now in a 5
minutes interval is displayed on "fuel efficiency graph"
(a).
To reset, press and hold the down arrow switch while
"fuel efficiency graph " (a) is being displayed until the
screen is reset.
S S
K K
- I

. */
- I
(a) (b)
2-10
2.3.7 BUZZER STOP SWITCH

When a warning indication is displayed on the multi-
display, press buzzer stop switch (4) to stop the buzzer
sound for the items shown in the table. S
12h
Items in the Warning Display Lists

Warning Level and Its Description
Level Description
This is largely-concerned with the safety and machine movement. Stop the machine immediately and perform
1
inspection and maintenance.
2 This notifies of the mode change of the machine.
3 This may lead to the failure of the machine. Immediately perform inspection and maintenance.
4 Difficulty may occur in working. Immediately perform inspection and maintenance.
5 This notifies of the machine status and maintenance.
Buzzer sound type
Buzzer sound type Sounds

Type 1 Continuous
Type 2 Sound 0.2 seconds, stop 0.3 seconds
Type 3 Sound 0.5 seconds, stop 0.5 seconds
Priority Group A
Buzze r
Level Display Warning
· D e ta ils Auto Ma nua l S ta rte r Engine
S top S top Type Ke y ON Running
Me cha tro Controlle r doe s not

1 Unav ailable Ava ila ble 3 Ñ Ñ
s e nd da ta .
The s wing pa rking bra ke re le a s e Ava ila ble

1 s witch is s witche d to the Ava ila ble 2 Ñ Ñ
(5 s e c.)
"RELEAS E LOCK" pos ition.
An e me rge ncy s top is pe rforme d Ava ila ble
1
due to low e ngine oil pre s s ure . Unav ailable 1 Ñ —
(5 s e c.)
2-11
Priority Group B
Buzzer
Level Display Wa rning De ta ils Auto Manual S ta rte r Engine
Type
Stop Stop Ke y ON Running
Displayed when the selector
1 valve malfunctions.
Unavailable Ava ila ble 2
Displayed when the DEF/AdBlue
sensor detects the quality Unavailable Unavailable
1 failure of DEF/AdBlue, and the 1
machine becomes inoperable.
level gauge shows Level 0 Unavailable Unavailable
1 (no display), and the machine 1
becomes inoperable.
Displayed when each device and
sensor of NOx discharge control
system fails or becomes
1 abnormal, and the machine
Unavailable Unavailable 1
P 204F becomesinoperable.
(The failure code is an example)
dosing module fails or becomes
1 abnormal, and the machine Unavailable Unavailable
1
becomes inoperable.
P 204F (The failure code is an example)
Displayed when the EGR valve
fails or becomes abnormal, and
1 the machine becomes inoperable. Unavailable Unavailable
1
P 1459
Displayed when automatic Ava ila ble

2 warming-up is done. (5 seconds)
Unavailable 2
Displayed when regeneration
2 of the exhaust gas cleaning Unavailable Ava ila ble 3
device is required.
2-12
Buzzer
Level Display Wa rning De ta ils Auto Manual S ta rte r Engine
Type
Stop Stop Ke y ON Running
sensor detects the quality failure
2 of DEF/AdBlue, and the engine
Unavailable Unavailable 2
output is limited.
level gauge becomes 2
2 Level 1 (Red), and the engine
Unavailable Unavailable
output is limited.
sensor of the NOx discharge
control system fails or becomes 2
2 abnormal, and the engine output
Unavailable Unavailable
P 204F is limited.
2 abnormal, and the engine output Unavailable Unavailable 2
is limited.
2
2 Unavailable Unavailable 2
the engine output is limited.
P 1459 (The failure code is an example)
Displayed when each device of
NOx discharge control system or
sensor fails or becomes 3
2 abnormal, and the engine output
Unavailable Ava ila ble
P 204F is limited.
2 abnormal, and the engine output Unavailable Ava ila ble 3
is limited.
2 the engine output is limited.
P 1459 (The failure code is an exam)

3 sensor detects the quality failure Unavailable Ava ila ble 3
of DEF/AdBlue.
3 level gauge becomes Unavailable Ava ila ble 3 2 d 1
Level 2 (Yellow).
Displayed when the engine oil
3 pressure reduces, and Unavailable Ava ila ble 2
disconnection is detected.
Displayed when the engine
3 coolant temperature rises.
Displayed when the air cleaner

3 Unavailable Ava ila ble 3
element is clogged.
Self-diagnosis (failure on the
3 pressure sensor , or Unavailable Ava ila ble 3
the proportional valve,etc.)
*1: If the buzzer keeps sounding due to DEF/AdBlue not being refilled, the type of buzzer sound changes.
For details on SCR system related warnings, see "SCR SYSTEM and DEF/AdBlue" in Chapter 4.
2-13
2.3.8 WORK MODE SELECT SWITCH

Select the proper work mode from three modes shown
below according to the work condition and purpose. The
work mode is switched in order of "S" -> "E" -> "H" -> "S"
H
each time Work Mode Select Switch (5) is pressed. 12h
The selected work mode is displayed on the left upper

corner of the multi-display for confirmation.
H: H mode (for heavy digging work)
S: S mode (for standard digging work and loading
operations)
E: E mode (for lower fuel consumption)
The work mode after the engine start always starts from "S" mode.
Before beginning the work, make sure the selected work mode is correct.
For details on the selection criteria of each work mode, see "SELECTION OF WORK MODE" in Chapter 3.
2-14
2.3.9 WASHER SWITCH

While washer switch (6) is being pressed, the washer
fluid is sprayed through the nozzle of front window.
The washer fluid reservoir is located under the floor plate
S
inside the cab. 12h
Make sure that the washer reservoir is filled with the washer fluid before operating the washer.
2.3.10 WIPER SWITCH

Press the switch (7) to operate the wiper on the front
window. When the wiper switch is in operation,
"Intermittent" (a) or "Continuous" (b) is displayed on the
S
upper part of the multi-display. 12h
Press once: The wiper moves intermittently.

Press twice: The wiper moves continuously.
Press three times: The wiper stops moving.
a.
b.
2-15
2.3.11 TRAVEL SPEED SELECT SWITCH
Loading/unloading the machine

LOW 1st (turtle) speed traveling is necessary to load and unload the machine on to a trailer. During loading or
unloading, do not change the travel speed.
The travel speed select switch is located on the gauge

cluster switch panel. Each time the engine is started, the
travel speed is automatically set to LOW 1st (turtle)
S
speed. Press the switch (8) on the gauge cluster. The 12h
speed is changed to the HIGH 2nd speed and a rabbit is

indicated on the multi-display.
LOW 1st speed: turtle Set to LOW 1st speed when moving the machine on the rough or soft ground, slope, or in the
narrow place, or when powerful tractive force is required.
HIGH 2nd speed: rabbit Set to HIGH 2nd speed when moving the machine on a level and firm ground.
2-16
2.3.12 AUTO ACCELERATION SWITCH

When loading or unloading the machine on a trailer, turn the auto acceleration switch off.
If it is operated while the acceleration switch is on, the engine speed changes suddenly.
When switch (9) is pressed to turn on, the auto

acceleration system activates.
It sets the engine speed to low under the following
S
conditions. 12h
• When the acceleration dial position is set at a higher

value than the range of the idle speed.
• When the control levers and/or pedals are not
operated for 4 seconds or more.
When the control levers and/or pedals are operated, the
engine speed rises back to the set level of the 9 2
acceleration dial gradually according to the amount of
operation of the lever and/or pedals.
If the switch (9) is pressed to turnoff during the auto
acceleration operation, the engine speed rises back to
the set level of the acceleration dial gradually.
2-17
2.3.13 ATTACHMENT MODE SELECT SWITCH

Use the attachment mode select switch to switch
between "Digging", "Nibbler", and "Breaker" modes.
Select an appropriate mode corresponding to the
S
attachment from three types: "Digging", "Nibbler", or 12h
"Breaker" modes. Before operation, always check that

the attachment mode is appropriately set.
(11) Digging Switch
(12) Nibbler Switch
(13) Breaker Switch 12
11
13
• When working with a hydraulic breaker or a nibbler (crusher) installed, check that an appropriate attachment
mode is selected, using the attachment mode select switch as well as the multi-display.
• When the attachment mode is inappropriate, use the attachment mode select switch to switch to an appropriate
mode.
• When performing breaker work, always select the breaker mode. Working in a mode other than the breaker
mode causes damage in the hydraulic equipment and/or breaker.
• Be sure to place the attachment to the ground and ensure safety before switching the attachment mode. In
particular, switching to the breaker mode during nibbler work may cause gripped load to fall off.
• When the attachment mode icon of "digging", "nibbler", or "breaker" flickers, it tells that the attachment mode is
not proper.
2-18
2.3.14 MENU SWITCH

Press switch (10) to display the user menu on the multi-
display.
From here, the user menu settings are available.
USER MENU
MAINTENANCE
SWITCH STATUS
OPTION SETTING
CONSUMPTION
SCREEN SET TING
CLOCK SETTING
BACK UP NEXT
HOME DOWN
10
2-19
2.3.15 USER MENU SETTING

The following settings are available in the user menu setting.
• Maintenance schedule setting
• Auto warming up setting
• Auto idling stop function
• Clock Setting
• Contrast adjustment
• Brightness (Day) Adjustment
• Brightness (Night) Adjustment
• Pump flow rate adjustment (Nibbler mode/Breaker mode)
• Consumption
When "Screen Change Switch" (1) is pressed during a adjustment or setting operation, the screen returns to the
main screen.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE SETTING
The replacement interval is shown below.

• Engine oil: 500 hours
• Fuel filter: 500 hours
• Hydraulic oil filter: 1,000 hours
• Hydraulic oil: 5,000 hours
(1) Screen Change Switch

6 7 4 5
(2) Buzzer Stop Switch
(3) Work Mode Select Switch
3 10
(4) Washer Switch
(5) Wiper Switch
(6) Travel Speed Select Switch
(7) Auto Acceleration Switch
(8) Menu Switch
2
(9) Arrow Switch
(10) Attachment Mode Select Switch
1 9 8
2-20
EXCHANGE EXCHANGE
S INTERVAL REMAINDER DAY INTERVAL REMAINDER DAY
12h
USER MENU ENGINE OIL 500Hr 500Hr 08/12/12 ENGINE OIL 500Hr 500Hr 08/12/12
MAINTENANCE
FUEL FILTER 500Hr -100Hr 08/12/12 FUEL FILTER 500Hr -100Hr 08/12/12
SWITCH ST ATUS HYD. FILTER 1000Hr 1000Hr 08/12/12 HYD. FILTER 1000Hr 1000Hr 08/12/12
OPTION SETTING HYD. OIL 5000Hr 5000Hr 08/12/12 HYD. OIL 5000Hr 5000Hr 08/12/12
CONSUMPTION
SCREEN SETTING
CLOCK SETTING
EXCHANGE
INTERVAL REMAINDER DAY
ENGINE OIL 500Hr 500Hr 08/12/12
FUEL FILTER 500Hr -100Hr 08/12/12

BACK UP NEXT
HOME DOWN HYD. FILTER 1000Hr 500Hr 08/12/12
(a) (b) HYD. OIL 5000Hr 3000Hr 08/12/12
EXCHANGE EXCHANGE
INTERVAL REMAINDER DAY INTERVAL REMAINDER DAY
ENGINE OIL 500Hr 500Hr 08/12/12 ENGINE OIL 500Hr 500Hr 08/12/12
FUEL FILTER 500Hr -100Hr 09/01/12 FUEL FILTER 500Hr 500Hr 09/01/12
HYD. FILTER 1000Hr 500Hr 08/12/12 HYD. FILTER 1000Hr 1000Hr 08/12/12
HYD. OIL 5000Hr 3000Hr 08/12/12 HYD. OIL 5000Hr 5000Hr 08/12/12
1. Turn the starter switch "ON" to display main screen (a). Press menu switch (8) to enter user menu screen (b). 2
2. Using the Up and Down arrow switches, move the cursor to "MAINTENANCE". Press the Right arrow switch to
enter the maintenance information setting.
3. Using the Up and Down arrow switches, move the cursor to one of the items from "ENGINE OIL", "FUEL
FILTER", "HYD.FILTER" or "HYD.OIL".
4. Press the Right arrow switch. The background color of "REMAINDER" turns blue.
5. Press "Menu Switch" (8) to reset the remaining time.
To set "REMAINDER" to an arbitrary value, press the Up or Down arrow switch to set the desired value
between the recommended replacement time and zero.
At this time, "EXCHANGE DAY" is updated to the current date.
6. Press the Right arrow to store the value.
At this time, "REMAINDER" turns black.
7. Press "Screen Change Switch" (1) to return to main screen (a).
2-21
AUTO WARMING UP SETTING

6 7 4 5
3 10
(4) Washer Switch
(5) Wiper Switch
(8) Menu Switch
2
(9) Arrow Switch
1 9 8
S
12h
USER MENU USER MENU SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SWING FLASHER OFF SWING FLASHER OFF

SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS
OPTION SETTING OPTION SETTING AUTO WARM-UP OFF AUTO WARM-UP OFF
CONSUMPTION CONSUMPTION
SCREEN SETTING SCREEN SETTING
CLOCK SETTING CLOCK SETTING
BACK UP NEXT BACK UP NEXT BACK UP NEXT BACK UP NEXT

HOME DOWN HOME DOWN HOME DOWN HOME DOWN
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS
SWING FLASHER OFF SWING FLASHER OFF SWING FLASHER OFF

ON ON ON
AUTO WARM-UP ON AUTO WARM-UP ON AUTO WARM-UP OFF
BACK UP NEXT BACK UP BACK UP

HOME DOWN HOME DOWN HOME DOWN
(h) (g) (f)
1. Turn the starter switch "ON" to display main screen (a). Press menu switch (8) to enter user menu screen (b).
2. Using the Up or Down arrow switch, move the cursor to "SWITCH STATUS". Press the Right arrow switch to
enter the switch setting.
3. Using the Up or Down arrow switch, move the cursor to "AUTO WARM-UP".
4. Press the Right arrow switch to enter display (f). The background color of "OFF" turns blue.
5. Using the Up or Down arrow switch, select "ON".
6. Press "Menu Switch" (8) to set the status.
At this time, the background color of "ON" turns black.
7. Turn "OFF" the starter key switch once to store the status.
Once "AUTO WARM-UP" is enabled, there is no need to set it again.
8. Pull up the pilot control shut-off lever to the "LOCKED" position.
2-22
9. When the engine is started in cold condition, "AUTO WARM-UP" starts. During warming up of the engine and
hydraulic oil, "WARM-UP" is indicated.
• If "AUTO WARM-UP" switch is turned "OFF" via the display during hydraulic oil warm-up, the warm-up operation
is forced to stop.
• If a lever is operated during hydraulic oil warm-up, the warm-up operation is stopped temporarily. After that, if the
lever is continuously at the neutral position for about 10 seconds, the warm-up operation starts again.
10. After the warm-up operation, "WARM-UP FINISHED" is indicated and the buzzer sounds for 5 seconds to tell
the completion of the warm-up operation.
2-23
AUTO IDLING STOP SETTING

6 7 4 5
3 10
(4) Washer Switch
(5) Wiper Switch
(8) Menu Switch
2
(9) Arrow Switch
1 9 8
S
12h
USER MENU USER MENU SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SWING FLASHER OFF SWING FLASHER OFF

SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS AUTO IDLING ST OP OFF AUTO IDLING ST OP OFF
OPTION SETTING OPTION SETTING AUTO WARM-UP OFF AUTO WARM-UP OFF

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS
SWING FLASHER OFF SWING FLASHER OFF SWING FLASHER OFF

AUTO IDLING ST OP ON AUTO IDLING ST OP ON AUTO IDLING ST OP OFF
AUTO WARM-UP ON AUTO WARM-UP ON AUTO WARM-UP OFF
BACK UP NEXT BACK UP BACK UP

HOME DOWN HOME DOWN HOME DOWN
(h) (g) (f)
2. Using the Up or Down arrow switch, move the cursor to "SWITCH STATUS". Press the Right arrow switch to
enter the switch setting.
3. Using the Up or Down arrow switch, move the cursor to "AUTO IDLING STOP".
4. Press the Right arrow switch to enter display (f). The background color of "OFF" turns blue.
5. Using the Up or Down arrow switch, select "ON".
6. Press "Menu Switch" (8) to set the status.
At this time, the background color of "ON" turns black.
7. Turn "OFF" the starter key switch once to store the status.
2-24
CLOCK SETTING
6 7 4 5
3 10
(4) Washer Switch
(5) Wiper Switch
(8) Menu Switch
2
(9) Arrow Switch
1 9 8
S
12h
USER MENU USER MENU CLOCK CLOCK
SETTING SETTING
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE YEAR 10 YEAR 10
SWITCH ST ATUS
OPTION SETTING
SWITCH ST ATUS
OPTION SETTING
MONTH
DATE
01
01
MONTH
DATE
01
01
2
CONSUMPTION CONSUMPTION HOUR 13 HOUR 13
SCREEN SETTING SCREEN SETTING MINUTE 25 MINUTE 25

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
CLOCK CLOCK
SETTING SETTING
YEAR 11 YEAR 11
MONTH 01 MONTH 01
DATE 01 DATE 01
HOUR 13 HOUR 13
MINUTE 25 MINUTE 25
BACK UP NEXT BACK

HOME DOWN HOME OK
(g) (f)
2. Using the Up or Down arrow switch, move the cursor to "CLOCK SETTING". Press the Right arrow switch to
enter the clock setting.
3. Using the Up and Down arrow switches, select any of "YEAR/MONTH/DAY/HOUR/MINUTE" as display (d).
4. Press the Right arrow switch to enter display (e). The background color of the value turns blue.
5. Using the Up and Down arrow switches, select the desired value.
6. Press menu switch (8) to set the desired value.
At this time, the background color of the value turns black.
2-25
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
6 7 4 5
3 10
(4) Washer Switch
(5) Wiper Switch
(8) Menu Switch
2
(9) Arrow Switch
1 9 8
S
12h
USER MENU USER MENU SCREEN SCREEN
SETTING SETTING
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE CONTRAST 5 CONTRAST 5
SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS Brightness(day) 100 Brightness(day) 100
OPTION SETTING OPTION SETTING Brightness(night) 50 Brightness(night) 50
BACK UP NEXT BACK UP NEXT BACK UP NEXT BACK UP

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
SCREEN SCREEN
SETTING SETTING
CONTRAST 6 CONTRAST 6
Brightness(day) 100 Brightness(day) 100
Brightness(night) 50 Brightness(night) 50
BACK UP NEXT BACK

HOME DOWN HOME OK
(g) (f)
2. Using the Up or Down arrow switch, move the cursor to "SCREEN SETTING". Press the Right arrow switch to
enter the screen setting.
3. Using the Up or Down arrow switch, move the cursor to "CONTRAST".
4. Press the Right arrow switch to enter display (e). The background color of the value turns blue.
5. Using the Up and Down arrow switches, select the desired values.
The adjustable range is from 1 (Faint) to 10 (Clear).
* The default value is 5.
2-26
BRIGHTNESS (DAY) ADJUSTMENT

6 7 4 5
3 10
(4) Washer Switch
(5) Wiper Switch
(8) Menu Switch
2
(9) Arrow Switch
1 9 8
S
12h
SETTING SETTING
MAINTENANCE
SWITCH ST ATUS
MAINTENANCE
SWITCH ST ATUS
CONTRAST
Brightness(day) 100
5 CONTRAST
Brightness(day)
5
100 2

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
SCREEN SCREEN SCREEN

SETTING SETTING SETTING
CONTRAST 5 CONTRAST 5 CONTRAST 5
Brightness(day) 80 Brightness(day) 80 Brightness(day) 100
Brightness(night) 5 Brightness(night) 50 Brightness(night) 50
BACK UP BACK BACK UP

HOME DOWN HOME OK HOME DOWN
(h) (g) (f)
3. Using the up and down arrow switches, move the cursor to "Brightness (day)" as display (e).
4. Press the Right arrow switch to enter display (f). The background color of the value turns blue.
Adjustable Range: 1 (Dark) to 100 (Bright)
2-27
BRIGHTNESS (NIGHT) ADJUSTMENT

6 7 4 5
3 10
(4) Washer Switch
(5) Wiper Switch
(8) Menu Switch
2
(9) Arrow Switch
1 9 8
S
12h
SETTING SETTING
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE CONTRAST 5 CONTRAST 5
SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS Brightness(day) 100 Brightness(day) 100

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
SCREEN SCREEN SCREEN

SETTING SETTING SETTING
CONTRAST 5 CONTRAST 5 CONTRAST 5
Brightness(day) 100 Brightness(day) 100 Brightness(day) 100
Brightness(night) 60 Brightness(night) 60 Brightness(night) 50
BACK UP BACK BACK UP

HOME DOWN HOME OK HOME DOWN
(h) (g) (f)
3. Using the up and down arrow switches, move the cursor to "Brightness (night)" as display (e).
4. Press the Right arrow switch to enter display (f). The background color of the value turns blue.
Adjustable Range: 1 (Dark) to 100 (Bright)
2-28
PUMP FLOW RATE ADJUSTMENT (NIBBLER MODE/BREAKER MODE)
If there is no switch operation for 20 seconds, the display returns to the main screen.

6 7 4 5
3 10
(4) Washer Switch
(5) Wiper Switch
(8) Menu Switch
2
(9) Arrow Switch
2
1 9 8
In nibbler mode
S S
12h 12h
USER MENU USER MENU NIBBLER
SETTING
FLOW RATE 780 L/min MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SET1 440
MPa
PRESSURE A 50 Mpa SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS SET2 396

MPa
OPTION SETTING OPTION SETTING SET3 352

PRESSURE B 50 Mpa MPa
CONSUMPTION CONSUMPTION SET4 308

MPa
SCREEN SETTING SCREEN SETTING SET5 264

MPa
CLOCK SETTING CLOCK SETTING SET6 220

MPa
L/min
SET7 198
MPa
30
SET8 176
MPa
15 SET9 154
MPa
SET10 132
0 MPa
30 25 20 15 10 5 0
MIN BACK UP NEXT BACK UP NEXT BACK UP
AVERAGE 0.0 L/h RESET HOME DOWN HOME DOWN HOME DOWN OK
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
In breaker mode
S
12h
USER MENU USER MENU BREAKER
SETTING
FLOW RATE 480 L/min MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SET1 220
MPa
PRESSURE A 50 Mpa SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS SET2 198

MPa
OPTION SETTING OPTION SETTING SET3 176

MPa
CONSUMPTION CONSUMPTION SET4 154

MPa
SCREEN SETTING SCREEN SETTING SET5 132

MPa
CLOCK SETTING CLOCK SETTING SET6 110

MPa
L/min
SET7 88
MPa
30
SET8 66
MPa
15 SET9 44
MPa
SET10 30
0 MPa
30 25 20 15 10 5 0
MIN BACK UP NEXT BACK UP NEXT BACK
AVERAGE 0.0 L/h RESET HOME DOWN HOME DOWN HOME OK
(b) (c) (d) (e)
1. Turn the starter switch "ON" to display main screen (a).

2. From main screen (a), press "Nibbler" or "Breaker" switch of "Attachment Mode Select Switch" (10) to change
the attachment mode from the digging mode to the nibbler mode or breaker mode. The flow rate indication
screen (b) appears.
3. Press menu switch (8) to enter user menu screen (c).
4. Using the Up or Down arrow switch, move the cursor to "OPTION SETTING". Press the Right arrow switch to
enter the nibbler or breaker setting.
2-29
5. Using the Up and Down arrow switches, select the desired flow rate.
CONSUMPTION
Use the indicated average fuel consumption for reference.

6 7 4 5
3 10
(4) Washer Switch
(5) Wiper Switch
(8) Menu Switch
2
(9) Arrow Switch
1 9 8
S
12h
USER MENU USER MENU CONSUMPTION CONSUMPTION
L/h L/h
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE 50 50
40 40
SWITCH ST ATUS SWITCH ST ATUS 30 30
20 20
OPTION SETTING OPTION SETTING
10 10
CONSUMPTION CONSUMPTION 0 0
30 25 20 15 10 5 0 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
MIN MIN
WORKTIME 100 HOURS WORKTIME 0 HOURS
CONSUMPTION 100 L CONSUMPTION 0L
AVERAGE 24.4 L/h AVERAGE 0 L/h
BACK UP NEXT BACK UP NEXT BACK BACK

HOME DOWN HOME DOWN HOME RESET HOME RESET
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
2. Using the up and down arrow switches, move the cursor to "CONSUMPTION" as display (c). Press the Right
arrow switch to enter the fuel efficiency setting.
3. The graph indicates the average fuel consumption by 2 hours for this 12 hours. The values of the operating
time, fuel consumption and average fuel consumption are also displayed.
4. To reset these values, press the down arrow switch.
2-30
2.3.16 DISPLAY FOR MAINTENANCE

From the Maintenance Information screen in the user menu, it is possible to display the remaining time to the end of
recommended replacement interval specified for the filter/oil. After reaching to the end of replacement interval,
inspect and maintain them following to "INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE" in Chapter 4.
This menu is available for confirmation of the following items.
Replacement Interval
Name Default
Engine oil 500 hrs.
Fuel filter 500 hrs.
Hydraulic oil filter 1,000 hrs.
Hydraulic oil 5,000 hrs.
• Engine oil
EXCHANGE
This shows the remaining time of the recommended INTERVAL REMAINDER
DAY
replacement time for the engine oil, as well as the 2
date of the last oil change. ENGINE OIL 500Hr 500Hr 08/12/12
• Fuel filter
This shows the remaining time of the recommended FUEL FILTER 500Hr -100Hr 08/12/12
replacement time for the fuel filter, as well as the date
of the last fuel filter change. HYD. FILTER 1000Hr 500Hr 08/12/12
• Hydraulic oil filter
This shows the remaining time of the recommended
HYD. OIL 5000Hr 3000Hr 08/12/12
replacement time for the hydraulic oil filter, as well as
the date of the last hydraulic oil filter change.
• Hydraulic oil
This shows the remaining time of the recommended replacement time for the hydraulic oil, as well as the date of
the last hydraulic oil change.
• For the time setting procedure for the next oil or filter change of each type, see "USER MENU SETTING" in
Chapter 2.
• When the recommended replacement time is over for any items, the "REMAINDER" indication for that item turns
red. When necessary to return to the initial value, reset it.
• The recommended replacement time of the engine oil is 500 hours. The multi-display warns of it without a
buzzer.
• The recommended replacement time of the fuel filter is 500 hours. The multi-display warns of it without a buzzer.
• The recommended replacement time of the hydraulic oil filter is 1,000 hours. The multi-display warns of it without
a buzzer.
• The recommended replacement time of the hydraulic oil is 5000 hours. The multi-display warns of it without a
buzzer.
2-31
2.3.17 WARNING DISPLAY SCREEN
WHEN WARNINGS ARE DISPLAYED

A warning displayed on the multi-display may lead to severe trouble. Stop the operation immediately, investigate
the causes and take proper measures.
• The warning display has the order of priority and when many troubles such as level 1 and 2 in priority (A)
occurred at the same time, level 1 is displayed in priority to level 2.
• The gauge cluster processes signals received from various sensors and switches via Mechatro Controller,
outputs the signals to the multi-display and lamp display, and makes the buzzer sound.
• The start-up inspection should be performed according to not only the multi-display but also the instructions in
"MAINTENANCE".
WARNING CLASSIFICATION CHART (PRIORITY A)

Disp la y Le ve l Wa rning De ta ils Re quire d Actions
Me cha tro Controlle r doe s not s e nd
1
da ta .
The swing parking brake release switch is

1 Conta ct your KOBELCO a uthorize d de a le r
switched to the "RELEASE LOCK" position.
for ins pe ction/ma inte na nce .
An e me rge ncy s top is pe rforme d
1
due to low e ngine oil pre s s ure .
2-32
WARNING CLASSIFICATION CHART (PRIORITY B)

Display Level Warning Details Required Actions
The a tta chme nt ins ta lle d to the crus he r or bre a ke r
s pe cifica tion ma chine doe s not ma tch the s e le cte d
a tta chme nt mode .
S e le ct a n a ppropria te a tta chme nt mode by
s witching the a tta chme nt mode s e le ct s witch.
Displayed when the selector va lve Bre a ke r mode : Whe n us ing a bre a ke r
1 malfunctions. Nibble r mode : Whe n us ing a nibble r (crus he r)
Eve n whe n a n a de qua te ope ra tion mode is
s e le cte d a nd the indica tion of s e le ctor fa ilure doe s
not dis a ppe a r, conta ct a nd a s k your KOBELCO
a uthorize d de a le r for ins pe ction/ma inte na nce .
Displayed when DEF/AdBlue sensor Refer to Chapter 3 “CHECKING DEF/AdBlue
detects the quality failure of LEVEL AND REFILLING” a nd Cha pte r 4
1 DEF/AdBlue, and the machine “DRAINING DEF/AdBlue” to drain the conte nts of
becomes inoperable. DEF/AdBlue ta nk, a nd re fill DEF/AdBlue .
Displayed when DEF/AdBlue level Re fe r to Cha pte r 3 “CHECKING DEF/AdBlue
LEVEL AND REFILLING”, and supply DEF/AdBlue
1 gauge becomes Level 0 (No display),
until DEF/AdBlue le ve l ga uge be come s
and the machine becomes inoperable.
Le ve l 3 (Gre e n) or more .
Displayed when each device and 2
sensor of the NOx discharge control
1 system fails or becomes abnormal,
and the machine becomes inoperable.
Displayed when DEF/AdBlue injection
device fails or becomes abnormal,
1 and the machine becomes inoperable. Conta ct your KOBELCO s e rvice s hop.
Displayed when the EGR valve fails

or becomes abnormal,
1 and the machine becomes inoperable.
The wa rming-up ope ra tion of the e ngine a nd
Displayed when the aut oma tic hydra ulic oil a re comple te d.
2 warming-up is done. Re fe r to “S TARTING ENGINE” in “3. MACHINE
OP ERATION”, a nd s ta rt the e ngine with prope r
proce dure s .
Dis pla ye d whe n re ge ne ra tion of the Re fe r to Cha pte r 4 “ABOUT MANUAL
2 e xha us t ga s cle a ning de vice is re quire d. REGENERATION”, and perform manual regeneration.
Re fe r to Cha pte r 4 “ABOUT AUTOMATIC
Displayed when regene ra ting the REGENERATION” a nd “ABOUT MANUAL
2 exhaust gas cleaning devi ce .
REGENERATION”.
d 1 If ma nua l re ge ne ra tion is in progre s s , wa it until
the dis pla y turns off.
*1: This mark is also displayed during machine operation, when occasional automatic soot combustion is
performed.
See "ABOUT MANUAL REGENERATION" in Chapter 4.
2-33

Displayed when DEF/AdBlue sensor Refer to Chapter 3 “CHECKING DEF /AdBlue LEVEL
detects the quality failure of AND REFILLING” a nd Cha pte r 4 “DRAINING
2 DEF/AdBlue, and the engine output DEF/AdBlue ” to dra in the conte nts of
is limited. DEF/AdBlue ta nk, a nd re fill DEF/AdBlue .
Displayed when DEF/AdBlue level Refer to Chapter 3 “CHECKING DEF/AdBlue LEVEL
2 gauge becomes Level 1 (Red), AND REFILLING”, a nd s upply DEF/AdBlue until
DEF/AdBlue le ve l ga uge be come s Le ve l 3 (Gre e n)
and the engine output is limited. or more .
sensor of the NOx discharge control
2 system fails or becomes abnormal,
and the engine output is limited.
2 abnormal, and the engine output is
P 204F limited. (The failure code is an example)
Displayed when the EGR valve fails or

becomes abnormal, and the engine
2 output is limited.
Conta ct your KOBELCO s e rvice s hop.
Displayed when each device or sensor
of NOx discharge control system fails
2 or becomes abnormal, and the engine
output is limited.
P 204F (The failure code is an example).
Displayed when the DEF/AdBlue dosing
module fails or becomes abnormal,
2 and the engine output is limited.
Displayed when the EGR valve fails or

becomesabnormal, and the engine
2 output is limited.
P 1459 (The failure code is an exam)
Displayed when DEF/AdBlue s e ns or Refer to Chapter 3 “CHECKING DEF/AdBlue
3 detects the quality failur e LEVEL AND REFILLING”, a nd Cha pte r 4
of DEF/AdBlue, and the e ngine output “DRAINING DEF/AdBlue ” to drain the conte nts of
is limited. DEF/AdBlue ta nk, a nd re fill DEF/AdBlue .
Refer to Chapter 3 “CHECKING DEF/AdBlue LEVEL
Displayed when DEF/AdBlue le ve l AND REFILLING”, a nd s upply DEF/AdBlue until
3 DEF/AdBlue le ve l ga uge be come s Le ve l 3 (Gre e n)
gauge becomes Level 2 (Ye llow).
or more .
2-34
- Displayed when the e ngine oil - S top the e ngine promptly, che ck the oil le ve l,
pressure is lower than a s pe cifie d a nd dis conne ction pla ce , a nd re fill or re pla ce
value, and the output re duction th e s pe cifie d e ngine oil re fe rring to
control is performed. “LUBRICANT, FUEL & COOLANT
3 SPEC IFICATIONS ”, if re quire d.
- Displayed when a disco nne ction
is detected. - If this is dis pla ye d while e ngine s top,
th e wire ma y be dis conne cte d, e tc.
C onta ct your KOBELCO a uthorize d de a le r for
re pa ir.
S top ope ra tion, a nd lowe r the e ngine s pe e d to
the low idle s pe e d to cool the e ngine .
Displayed when the cool a nt
Whe n the wa rning dis pla y doe s not dis a ppe a r
3 temperature exceeds a s pe cifie d
a fte r a fe w minute s , s top the e ngine , a nd che ck
value.
the coola nt le ve l, fa n be lt te ns ion, a nd ra dia tor
clogging.
Displayed when the eng ine output

Che ck a nd cle a n the filte r. If ne ce s s a ry,
3 reduces due to a clogged inta ke
re pla ce the filte r.
air filter.
Error code is displayed whe n fa ilure
Ask your KOBELCO a uthorize d de a le r for
2
3 occurred in the pressure s e ns or,
ins pe ction/ma inte na nce .
proportional valve, etc.
Battery failure.
(High voltage/low voltage /
insufficient charge)
4 The battery is not charge d a de qua te ly Che ck the us a ge condition of the e le ctrica l
if the warning does not dis a ppe a r compone nts a nd the cha rge circuit.
after a while from the en gine is s ta rte d
or if the warning is displ a ye d while
the engine is running.
4 The fuel is below a speci fie d qua ntity. Refill the specified fuel.
Displayed when the temp e ra ture of S top ope ra tion, a nd a s k your KOBELCO
5 hydraulic oil rises abnor ma lly. a uthorize d de a le r for ins pe ction/ma inte na nce .
Displayed during the au toma tic Automa tic wa rming-up ope ra tion is be ing
5 warming-up operation. pe rforme d.
Wa it until "WARM FINIS H WARM-UP " a ppe a rs .
The remaining time to the e ngine oil Re fill the s pe cifie d ne w e ngine oil with
5 change becomes zero. the s pe cifie d qua ntity.
Displayed when the key switch is S e t the ke y s witch ba ck to “ON” pos ition, a nd s e cure
s a fe ty by ra is ing the control lock le ve r.
5 turned to “START” position while
the control lock lever is down. Turn the s witch to “S TART” a ga in to s ta rt
the e ngine .
Displayed when the remaining time to
Re pla ce with a s pe cifie d ne w fue l filte r.
5 the fuel filter change becomes zero.
5 the hydraulic oil filter change becomes Re pla ce with a s pe cifie d ne w hydra ulic oil filte r.
zero.
5 the hydraulic oil change becomes zero.
Re pla ce with a s pe cifie d ne w hydra ulic oil.
2-35
2.3.18 CLOGGING DETECTOR OF HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER

Change the hydraulic oil filter when "CHANGE HYD.OIL FLTR" appears on the display. (See "REPLACING
RETURN FILTER" in Chapter 4 for replacement procedures.)
When the clogging detector of the hydraulic oil filter is working, the pump operation noise becomes louder for
approximately 3 seconds with the control lever in the neutral position, but it is not abnormal.
1. To release the warning, set the maintenance interval of the return filter again from the gauge cluster. (Default
value: 1000 hrs.)
(See "USER MENU SETTING" in Chapter 2 for setting procedures.)
S
12h
2. After the setting of 1. is completed, operate the machine for a while, then the warning is released automatically.
2-36
2.4 HANDLING OF SWITCHES AND METERS

2.4.1 STARTER SWITCH
This switch is used to start or stop the engine.
The key of the starter key switch is exclusive.

It cannot be used on other machine. Please store it in a safe and secure place. Also, if you lost the key, contact us
or your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
• OFF (STOP):
At this position, you can insert or remove the starter
key. Before restarting or stopping the engine, turn the
starter key to the "OFF" position.
• ACC (Accessory):
While the engine is stopped, power and the radio 2
(FM/AM) can be used in the "ACC" position.
• ON:
Electricity flows in all circuits. During operation, the
starter key should be in this position.
• START:
When starting the engine, turn the key to the
"START" position. When the engine starts, release
your hand from the starter switch. The starter key will
return to the "ON" position by itself.
2.4.2 ENGINE THROTTLE

This dial adjusts the number of engine speed (output). This is a dial type rotary switch and a continuous adjustment
type. If you release the dial at a rotated position, it stops at that position, and maintain the number of speed.
• LO (Low idle)
The number of engine speed is minimum at the end of
left rotation.
H
LO
• H (High idle) I
The number of engine speed is maximum at the end
of right rotation.
2-37
2.4.3 WORKING LIGHT (BOOM AND DECK)

Push the switch to turn on the working lights on the
boom (left) and deck (right).
Push the no symbol mark side to turn off the working
lights on the boom (left) and deck (right). ON
2.4.4 WORKING LIGHT SWITCH (CAB LIGHT)

Push the switch to turn on the working light of the cab.
Push the no symbol mark side to turn off the working
light on the cab.
ON
2.4.5 MANUAL REGENERATION SWITCH

When you press the manual regeneration switch, is
regenerated.
For details, see "DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER" in
Chapter 4.
2-38
2.4.6 PRESSURE RELEASE SWITCH

The pressure release switch is used to release the inner
pressure of hydraulic circuit.
PR ON
For pressure releasing procedures, see "RELEASING INNER PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM" in Chapter
4.
2.4.7 OVERLOAD ALARM SELECT SWITCH

The overload alarm select switch is used at lifting work.
Regarding the lifting work procedures, see "LIFTING
WORK" in Chapter 8.
ON:
When the side with the symbol mark is pressed, if the
value of a lifted load becomes close to the maximum
load at each working range during lifting work, the
warning buzzer sounds.
When starting the lifting work, turn the switch "ON".
OFF:
When the side without the symbol mark is pressed, the
warning buzzer does not sound during lifting work.
2-39
2.4.8 CAB ROTATING LIGHT SWITCH

If the switch is pressed, the cab rotating right turns on.
If the side without the symbol mark is pressed, the
rotating light turns off.
2.4.9 QUICK HITCH OPERATION SWITCH

Use this switch to install and remove the front
attachment from the quick hitch. UNLOCK
Move sliding portion (1) of the switch to the direction of 1

the arrow shown in the figure and then push the "LOCK"
or "UNLOCK" side to switch the function.
If you release the switch, the switch automatically returns
to the neutral position.
LOCK
• The alarm sound keeps going off while the "UNLOCK" or "LOCK" side of the quick hitch operation switch is
being pushed.
• For detailed operations, see "REMOVING FRONT ATTACHMENT" and "INSTALLING FRONT ATTACHMENT"
sections in Chapter 8.
2-40
2.4.10 CAP (OPTION SWITCH)

This is a place to install an optional switch.
2
2.4.11 HORN SWITCH
Be sure to sound the horn before starting this machine to warn surrounding personnel.
The horn sounds while the switch located on the top of

the left control lever grip is being pressed.
2-41
2.4.12 ENGINE THROTTLE FOR REDUNDANT MODE

This dial is used when the controller that controls this 2
machine has trouble. When the number of engine speed
cannot be adjusted with the engine throttle due to
controller trouble, operate this engine throttle for
redundant mode (1) to adjust the number of engine
speed. 1
Under normal conditions, do not operate engine throttle
for redundant mode (1).
When controller warning (2) is displayed on the multi-
display, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
OPERATION PROCEDURES
When operating the engine throttle for redundant mode, follow the procedures below.
HOW TO HANDLE ENGINE THROTTLE FOR REDUNDANT MODE

Be sure to follow the procedures for the engine throttle for redundant mode. Because the number of speed may rise
suddenly when the engine starts, and it is extremely dangerous.
1. Stop the engine, and set engine throttle for redundant mode (1) to "NORMAL".
2. Start the engine.
3. Turn engine throttle for redundant mode (1) to the HI side to adjust the number of engine speed.
4. When stopping the engine, set engine throttle for redundant mode (1) to "NORMAL".
2-42
2.4.13 SWING PARKING BRAKE RELEASE SWITCH
SWING PARKING BRAKE RELEASE SWITCH

Do not operate the swing parking brake release switch on slopes and soft grounds.
The upper structure may turn unexpectedly and it is significantly dangerous.
This switch is used only when the swing parking brake

cannot be released due to trouble. Set this switch to
"RELEASE" to release the brake.
Generally, the switch should be on "NORMAL".
When trouble is found in the swing parking brake,
contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer promptly.
2
RELEASE NORMAL
2.4.14 KPSS RELEASE SWITCH

This dial is used when the controller that controls this 2
machine has trouble. When this machine cannot be 1
operated due to the controller trouble, set KPSS release KPSS
switch (1) to "RELEASE (OFF)" to operate the machine.
However, the speed of the machine is limited.
Under normal conditions, the switch should be on "KPSS RELEASE
(WORK MODE)".
When controller warning (2) is displayed on the multi-
display, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
2-43
2.4.15 ENGINE STOP SWITCH
Do not use this switch to stop the engine under normal conditions.
When the engine does not stop due to trouble and damage of the machine even when turning the starter switch
"OFF", lift up the switch near the lower left side of the seat to stop the engine. When not using this switch, always
keep the switch down.
2.4.16 12 V POWER SUPPLY

12 V power supply (1) is installed on the back of the
switch cover.
When using accessories such as a fan for general
automobiles and other accessories that require the 12 V
DC power supply, the 12 V power supply is required.
Remove the cover from the 12 V power supply, and
insert a 12 V male socket. After using the accessory, put
the cover back on.
Maximum continuous output = 180 W
2-44
2.4.17 USB PORT/EXTERNAL INPUT TERMINAL (AUX)
• This part does not guarantee connection with all types of USB terminals and AUX terminals. Also, when each
terminal does not match the inlet of this machine, connection is not available.
• For use of external sound devices and USB memories, follow the manuals for them respectively.
Using the USB port/external input terminal (AUX), you can listen to music from a cell phone and external sound
device.
The USB port and external input terminal are located on the back of the seat in the cab. When using them, open
cap (1), and connect each cable (sold separately). When they are is not used, close cap (1).
USB PORT
Your USB memory to listen to music files from the machine's speakers. For playable music files, and connection
with USB memories, see "HANDLING OF RADIO" in Chapter 2. 2
EXTERNAL INPUT TERMINAL (AUX)
Connect a digital audio player, etc. to listen to music from the machine's speakers. For connection cables, see
"HANDLING OF RADIO" in Chapter 2.
2-45
2.5 HANDLING OF LEVERS AND PEDALS

2.5.1 LOCATION OF LEVERS AND PEDALS
(1) Pilot Control Shut-Off Lever
3
(2) Operator Control Levers
(3) Travel Levers
2-46
2.5.2 Pilot Control Shut-Off Lever

The pilot control shut-off lever is provided to prevent any unexpected operation due to unexpected contact with the
left/right control levers or travel levers.
HANDLING OF PILOT CONTROL SHUT-OFF LEVER
• Do not stand up and move during operation, or unexpected contact with the control levers may cause a sudden
movement of the machine. Raise the pilot control shut-off lever securely to the "LOCKED" position before
standing up or moving.
• Set the pilot control shut-off lever to the "LOCKED" position securely, or it may not be locked. Make sure that the
pilot control shut-off lever is at the "LOCKED" position shown in the figure.
• When unlocking, do not touch other levers unintentionally. Touching other levers may cause danger due to
unexpected machine movement.
• After completion of work or during transportation, set the pilot control shut-off lever to the "LOCKED" position.
LOCKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

2
When the pilot control shut-off lever is raised to the
"LOCKED" position (A), the hydraulic system is locked. A
UNLOCKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

When the lever is lowered to the "UNLOCKED" position
(B), the hydraulic system is unlocked. A
2-47
2.5.3 OPERATOR CONTROL LEVERS
CONTROL OF LEVERS
• Before operation, be sure to pay attention to the safety of the surroundings and operate each lever slowly to fully
make sure that the machine movement is in accordance with the control pattern indicated on the control pattern
label.
• If you operate the machine while the control pattern label does not match the actual machine movement, it may
cause severe personal injury.
• When the label does not match the actual machine movement, replace them with a proper one.
• When stopping swing operation, stop it earlier than your intended position by taking the swing distance after
returning the swing lever to the neutral position into account.
• The operations of boom, arm, bucket, swinging, and traveling by this machine conform to the ISO lever pattern.
As for operation methods of other operational control devices, refer and check other paragraphs in this manual.
• Even if the lever pattern of your machine can be changed, the following explanations for the operations of the
boom, arm, bucket, and swinging are based on the ISO standard operation method.
Swing and attachment operations are controlled with the left and right control levers.
The left control lever is used for swing and arm operations.
The right control lever is used for boom and bucket operations.
The levers return to the neutral position if you release them and each movement of the attachment/equipment
stops. It is possible to perform various operations at the same time.
Left control lever
(1)Swing right
(2)Swing left
(3)Arm out
(4)Arm in
N (Neutral): Upper structure and arm are held in the
position at that time (3) (5)
Right control lever (2) (1) (7) (8)
(5)Boom down
(4) (6)
(6)Boom up
(7)Bucket in
(6)
(8)Bucket out
N (Neutral): Boom and bucket are held in the position at (3)
that time (4)
(1)
(2)
(5)
(8) (7)
2-48
2.5.4 TRAVEL LEVER & PEDAL
HANDLING OF THE TRAVEL LEVER & PEDAL
• During travel operation, pay attention to the control levers. There is a possibility of accident because the
attachment is suddenly swung and moved by the unexpectedly touching and shifting the control lever.
• When operating the travel levers, check the crawler frame direction. When the travel motor is positioned on the
front side, the traveling lever operation is reversed.
• If you put your foot on a pedal during work, there is a possibility of severe injury because the machine will start
abruptly if the pedal is depressed unintentionally. Do not put your foot on a pedal, except for driving or turning
with pedals.
• Pay attention when driving and operating with pedals.
The manual levers and travel pedals are used for the travel operation of this machine.
(a) Travel forward: Push the travel levers to the front
(Depress the front of travel pedals) 2
(a)
(b) Travel backward: Pull the travel levers toward
yourself (Depress the back of travel pedals) (N)
(N) Neutral: The machine stops traveling.
(a)
(b)
(N)
(b)
(a)
(a)
(b)
(b)
(a)
(b)
2-49
2.6 HANDLING OF FUSE & RELAY BOX

2.6.1 ABOUT FUSE & RELAY BOX
The fuses protect the wiring and electrical components from burn out due to excess current. If the electrical system
does not work properly, check to replace any blown fuses with new ones. If there is a corroded fuse generating
white powder on it, or if some looseness exists between a fuse and its fuse holder, replace it as well.
2.6.2 REPLACING FUSES
Make sure the starter switch is in the "OFF" position when replacing fuses.
• The spare fuses are stored in the fuse & relay box.
• A fuse must be replaced with a one of the same type and capacity of that of the blown fuses. The electrical
system may be damaged if a different one is used.
If fuse replacement is frequently required, it may be due to a failure in the electrical system. Please contact
KOBELCO authorized dealer/distributor.
1. To remove the fuse box cover at the right side of the 2

operator's seat, push lock part (2) of cover (1)
inward and release the lock and then lift the cover.
1
2. When replacing the fuse, use a fuse extractor to
remove it from the fuse box.
3. After replacing the fuse, install the cover securely.
2-50
2.6.3 FUSE CAPACITY AND CIRCUIT NAME

The following shows each fuse capacity and circuit name.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
37
38
39
40
2
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Capaci- Capaci-
Item Circuit Name Item Circuit Name
ty ty
1 5A Mechatro controller (backup) 21 20A Key switch
2 5A IT controller 22 20A Cab working light
3 10A Automatic greasing 23 20A Cab working light
4 20A Working light 24 20A Wiper
5 10A Solenoid valve, LMN/BH 25 10A DC-DC converter
6 20A Wiper 26 5A Cluster gauge
7 10A DC-DC converter 27 5A Air conditioner

8 5A Cluster gauge 28 5A Air conditioner
9 5A Air conditioner 29 15A Air conditioner
10 20A Travel alarm, public address system 30 20A Option 1
11 5A DC-DC for camera 31 10A Horn

12 20A Flasher 32 10A Option 3
13 15A Skylight wiper 33 10A Option 4, controller
14 10A Tuner 34 15A Engine controller (ECU)
15 15A Engine controller (ECU) 35 5A Relay
16 5A Mechatro controller 36 10A Lever lock

17 20A Mechatro controller 37 5A Spare fuse
18 5A (Option) hand control 38 10A Spare fuse
19 5A Room lamp, tuner 39 15A Spare fuse
20 20A Fuel supply pump 40 20A Spare fuse
2-51
2.7 HANDLING OF FUSIBLE LINK (FOR STARTER)
Do not use the battery power-off switch for any other purposes than described in this manual.
Never set the switch to the OFF position while the engine is running.
The electronic devices may be damaged.
• When setting the battery power-off switch to the OFF position, all electrical circuits are shut down, and the preset
memory and clock memory of the radio are cleared.
• The fusible link is a fuse wiring of big size provided in a large capacity circuit.
As with normal fuses, it protects electrical components and wiring from burn out due to excess current.
In case the starter does not work when the starter switch is turned "ON", disconnection of the fusible link is
suspected. Check and replace it as needed.
2.7.1 FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT

1. Use the starter key to open the side door at the left
side of the machine and hold it with the stay.
2. Turn the battery power-off switch (1) OFF.
ON: Turn the key to the right to connect the
electrical circuit.
OFF: Turn the key to the left to shut down the
electrical circuit.
3. Remove fusible link (2), and perform inspection or
replace it with a new one.
4. Remove the supporting stay, and close the side
door.
2-52
2.8 CONTROLLER
The controller that controls the machine and the engine is equipped in this machine.
• Since the controller is equipped in the cab and the engine, do not splash water, dirt, or drinking water etc on it. It
may cause failure of the machine.
• When the controller warning is displayed on the gauge cluster, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
2-53
2.9 DUAL MONITOR

The dual monitor is installed at the front right side of the operator’s seat.
This is used for monitoring and checking the machine right side during operation.
2.9.1 NAME OF EACH PART
7 8
DIMMER MENU ENTER UP DOWN
1 2 3 4 5 6
NAME NORMAL SCREEN MENU SCREEN

1 POWER LAMP - -
2 DIMMER Switching of ON and OFF of the dimmer -
3 MENU Switching to the menu screen Switching to the normal screen
4 ENTER - Selection and decision of an item

5 UP - Selection of an item
6 DOWN - Selection of an item
7 REAR SIDE PICTURE REAR SIDE PICTURE -
8 RIGHT SIDE PICTURE RIGHT SIDE PICTURE -
2.9.2 MENU SCREEN

When the engine is running, press the “MENU” button to enter the menu mode.
The display of the menu mode is basically a blue-background display (pictures of the cameras are not displayed).
However, when the picture adjustment item (“PICTURE” menu) is selected, pictures of the cameras are displayed.
The color of selected item changes to green.
Do not operate the machine with the menu screen displayed.
• If the “MENU” key is pressed, or the switches are not operated for approximately 10 seconds, the menu mode is
released and the screen returns to the normal screen.
• Change of setting is reflected each time.
(However, if the ACC power is turned OFF before the menu mode is released, change of setting is not reflected.)
2-54
2.9.3 MAIN MENU

This menu is a center of divergence to enter the screen of each setting item.
If the “MENU” key is pressed with this screen displayed, the screen returns to the normal screen.
MENU ITEM CONTENTS

PICTURE Adjustment of pictures.
CAMERA Setting of camera related items.
DIMMER Setting of dimmer related items.
2.9.4 PICTURE ADJUSTMENT (PICTURE)

Picture related items can be adjusted.
MENU ITEM CONTENTS RANGE

BRIGHTNESS Adjustment of brightness of pictures. 0(=min) to 5(center) to 10(=max)
COLOR Adjustment of color strength of pictures. 0(=min) to 5(center) to 10(=max)
CONTRAST Adjustment of contrast of pictures. 0(=min) to 5(center) to 10(=max)
TINT Adjustment of hue of pictures. 0(=min) to 5(center) to 10(=max)
RETURN Returning to the main menu.
• During adjustment, pictures of the cameras are displayed.

• The default values are center values.
2-55
2.9.5 SETTING OF CAMERA RELATED ITEMS (CAMERA)

Camera related items can be adjusted.

Switching of ON and OFF for 90 degrees
ROTATE ON/OFF Default: ON
rotation of the right side picture
DETAILS OF ROTATE MENU

• Ninety degrees rotation function for the right side
picture
• ON and OFF can be switched by the “UP/DOWN”
buttons.
• The default setting is ON.
Rotation ON
Rotation OFF
2-56
2.9.6 SWITCHING OF DIMMER (LIGHT ADJUSTMENT) (DIMMER)

The level of the dimmer can be switched. The values for when the dimmer is ON (light reduction) and OFF can be
set.

ON LEVEL Adjustment of the dimmer level for when the dimmer is ON 0(=min) to 5(center) to 10(=max)
(light reduction). Default: 3
OFF LEVEL Adjustment of the dimmer level for when the dimmer is 0(=min) to 5(center) to 10(=max)
OFF. Default: 10
2-57
2.10 HANDLING OF RADIO

2.10.1 NAME OF EACH PART
4 2 3 5 10 6 9
c d e
7 8 a b
1
Item Name Function

1 [PWR] Key Turns the power ON/OFF.
2 [FM/AM] Key Switches RADIO source (FM1→FM2→AM).
3 [EXT] Key Switches EXT source (USB→BT→AUX).
4 [ENTER] Key Determines menu setting.
Returns to previous item in menu and performs auto preset (FM/

5 [RET] Key
AM).
6 [VOL+] [VOL-] Key Adjusts volume.
7 [UP] [DOWN] Key Switches frequencies and menu items.
8 [PRESET] Key (1 to 6) Recalls and registers preset frequencies.
9 [DISP] Key Switches displays (frequency/service name/title/clock,etc.).
10 LCD Display Displays frequencies and clock.
Displays character/value information such as source names,

a Segment
frequencies, and service names.
b kHz/MHz Pict Used as unit information when frequency is displayed.

c ST Pict Turns on if stereo sound is received when FM1/FM2 is selected.
d LOUD Pict Turns on when LOUDNESS is ON.
e USB Pict Turns on when USB memory is inserted.
2-58
2.10.2 RECEIVABLE FREQUENCY

FM 76.0 MHz to 90.0 MHz (100 kHz Step)
Japan
AM 522 kHz to 1629 kHz (9kHz Step)
FM 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz (200kHz Step)

North America
AM 530 kHz to 1710 kHz (10kHz Step)
South and Central FM 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz (100 kHz Step)
America AM 530 kHz to 1710 kHz (5kHz Step)
Europe, FM 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz (50kHz Step)

Asia, and
Oceania AM 522 kHz to 1629 kHz (9 kHz Step)
2.10.3 SOURCE ON
During source off, you can use the [POWER] key or [FM/AM] key to switch to the source on status.
The source recalled at the time of source on is a source that was selected during the source off status. 2
Power ON
Source OFF
í Clock display only
[POWER] key or [FM/AM] key [POWER] key
Source ON
RADIO FM1 EXT USB
FM2 BT-AUDIO
AM AUX
2-59
2.10.4 SWITCHING SOURCE

Use the [FM/AM] key and [ENTER] key to switch the input source.
When applicable source is not present, the next source becomes default.
[FM/AM]
RADIO EXTERNAL
[FM/AM]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
FM1 USB
[ENTER] [ENTER]
FM2 BT-AUDIO
[ENTER] [ENTER]
AM AUX
RADIO
This is the source to receive radio waves of the radio.
Due to different registered preset places, FM1/FM2, and AM can be selected.
EXTERNAL
This is the source to play external devices such as USB/Bluetooth Audio/AUX, etc.
2-60
2.10.5 FM/AM
The following is receiving procedures for FM/AM broadcasts.
For grouping the preset numbers, the FM broadcast are divided into FM1 and FM2 (The group of the preset
numbers is only different but the function is the same).
FM1 FM2
AM
RECALLING PRESET FREQUENCY

The frequency registered as a preset No. is recalled and received.
2
Default screen (FM/AM)
Press one of 1 to 6 keys
↑ Linked with pressed preset No.
2-61
PRESET REGISTRATION
Set the currently receiving frequency into the memory of a selected preset No.
Source Number of Presets

FM 12 6 × 2 (FM1, FM2)
AM 6
Press one of 1 to 6 keys for a short time
↑ Linked with pressed preset No.

Px (500 ms ON and 500 ms OFF) x flashes 3 times
AUTO PRESET
Frequencies are registered to the preset memories 1 to 6 in the order of strong reception.
PTY Press and hold
Updated with
500 ms cycle
Press to cancel <3>
Measurement is done on selected frequency range
2-62
UP/DOWN AUTO SEEK

Frequency of a good reception state is detected and received.
Auto seek operation continues if frequencies of a good reception state cannot be detected after going through all
frequencies.
Press and hold Press and hold
Updated with Updated with

500 ms cycle 500 ms cycle
2
← Detect frequency of go od re ce ption s ta te →
UP/DOWN MANUAL SEEK

Press [△] / [▽] for a short time to move to the next channel.
Frequency increases/decreases by one step. For the frequency range, see "RECEIVABLE FREQUENCY".
2-63
2.10.6 USB AUDIO

MP3/WMA files recorded in a USB memory are played.
File System Condition

Item Contents
File system FAT16/32, no case sensitive
Number of files 100 files/folder

Number of folders 100 folders/layer
Number of layers 5 layers
Sort order Play in UNICODE order
Supported file format MP3/WMA
Supported Format
Item MP3 WMA
Windows Media Audio compatible
Supported format MPEG 1/2, 2.5 Layer1, 2 and 3
(DRM is not supported)
Sample grade 8k ○ ○
16 k ○ ○
32 k ○ ○
11.025 k ○ ○
22.05 k ○ ○
44.1 k ○ ○
12 k ○ ○
24 k ○ ○
48 k ○ ○
Bit rate Compatible with 8 to 320 kbps VBR Compatible with 5 to 384 kbps VBR
Compatible with ID3TAG

TAG information Compatible with WMA-TAG
(V1.0/V1.1/V2.2/V2.3/V2.4)
Extension mp3 asf, wma
Play State Control/Display

Item Function
Play/Pause Starts playing or pauses.
Folder UP/DOWN Moves among folders in USB memory.
Next music/Previous music Plays forward track/back track
Play setting Sets play all/play folder/play 1 track/random play
MUSIC INFORMATION DISPLAY

• Displays a title, album name, artist name, and file name (maximum 64 bites for each)
• Supports alphanumeric characters (lower case letters are converted to upper case letters, and displayed)
2-64
TRACK CHANGE (USB, BT-Audio)

Press [△] / [▽] key for a short time to change the track.
During the 0 second display after start, if the [▽] key is pressed, the music returns to the previous track. But after 1
second, if that is done, the music returns to the beginning of the present track.
The BT-Audio does not have track name display and play time display. (Bluetooth device restriction)
Default screen (USB/BT-Audio)
After 1 second, music

returns to beginning of 2
present track
Selected screen after switching display
2-65
CHANGE FOLDER (USB)
Default screen (USB)
3
Folder
FOLDER1
4
FILE1-1
Folder
FILE1-2
No operation for 3 seconds
No. of folders: 10
FOLDER2
FILE2-1 Selected screen after switching display
FILE2-2 Default screen (USB)
FOLDER10
FILE2-1
FILE2-2
2-66
CHANGE OF PLAY METHOD

A play method such as REPEAT, RANDOM, etc. can be changed.
When REPEAT operation is performed, RANDOM becomes OFF, and when RANDOM is performed, REPEAT
becomes OFF.
<Repeat>
2
Repeat OFF File repeat Folder repeat
1 1
2-67
<Random>
2
Random Off All Random
PAUSE (USB, BT-Audio)

Pausing of the music being played can be done. Press the play key once more to start playing.
Though PLAY/PAUSE command is issued by BT-Audio, "PAUSE" is not displayed, because the play status cannot
be obtained and then PLAY/PAUSE status cannot be judged (Bluetooth device restriction).
Default screen (USB/BT-Audio)/Playing
5 Pause
Music pauses
5 Play
Default screen (USB/BT-Audio)/Playing
Plays from paused position
2-68
2.10.7 BLUETOOTH AUDIO

A dedicated external Bluetooth unit is used.
An audio file is played by connecting a cell phone or a Bluetooth audio player with the Bluetooth unit.
Operations such as play/pause/forward track/back track are possible.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Unit
Audio
2
Radio AV unit
TRACK CHANGE
Press [△] / [▽] key for a short time to change the track.
Default screen (BT-Audio)
Clock is displayed depends on

state of switching display
3 Seconds 3 Seconds
Selected screen after switching display
Default screen (BT-Audio)
2-69
PAUSE
Pausing of the music being played can be done. Press the play key once more to start playing.
Default screen (BT-Audio)/Playing
5 Pause
Song pauses
5 Play
Plays from paused position
2.10.8 AUX
Inputs sound of audio devices connected from outside, and outputs from the radio AV unit.
2.10.9 CLOCK DISPLAY

From the menu, you can switch between the 24-hour/12-hour display.
In the 12-hour display, AM/PM is also displayed.
12-hour display 24-hour display
AM 12:00 to 12:59, 1:00 to 11:59 0:00 to 23:59

PM 12:00 to 12:59, 1:00 to 11:59 0:00 to 23:59
Display Example
12-hour display (AM) 12-hour display (PM) 24-hour display
2-70
2.10.10 VOLUME CONTROL

The volume level output from the radio can be changed.
Make the volume level increase/decrease by 1 step or continuously.
The screen moves back to the screen before operation with no operation for 5 seconds.
Item 24-hour display
Range 0 (mute) to 32 (33 steps in total)
Default value 11
Default screen
VOL + VOL -
(Continuous UP/DOWN by pressing and hold key)
2
0 1 15 30 31
VOL - VOL +
Default screen
2-71
2.10.11 DISPLAY CHANGE

The display mode number specified last is memorized.
When there is no applicable item (for example, the display mode is 2 and the source is FM), the next display code
item is displayed. However, maintain the display mode number.
Name FM/AM USB Bluetooth Audio AUX

1 SOURCE NAME ← ← ←
2 — FOLDER NAME — —
3 — ARTISIT NAME — —
4 — ALBUM NAME — —
5 FREQUENCY DISPLAY TITLE NAME — —
TR NUMBER/ELAPSED
6 — — —
TIME
7 CLOCK ← ← ←
SOURCE NAME (ALL)

Based on the display specifications, the source name of each source (FM/AM/Bluetooth Audio) is displayed.
FREQUENCY DISPLAY (FM, AM)

Frequency being received is displayed.
Example of Actual Example
FOLDER NAME (USB)

The folder name being played now is displayed.
ARTISIT NAME (USB)

The artist name of the track being played now is displayed.
ALBUM NAME (USB)

The album name being played now is displayed.
2-72
TITLE (USB)
The title of the track being played now is displayed.
TR NUMBER/ELAPSED TIME (USB)

The truck number and elapsed time being played are displayed.
CLOCK DISPLAY (ALL)

The clock is displayed.
2
2-73
2.10.12 MENU
Each set values can be changed.
<Source OFF Menu>

í Adjusting clock
ENTER
q
(Confirm)
To details of each item
í Paring
RET
r ENTER
(Back)
(Confirm)
Change value at this timing
q r q
q r q
2-74
<Source ON Menu>
í Adjusting balance for right and left output
í Adjusting treble (High)
í Adjusting bass (Low)
í Adjusting loudness
t
2
í Adjusting clock
u ENTER
(Confirm)
í Paring To details of each item
v RET
(Back) ENTER
í Destination setting (Confirm)
w Change value at this timing
í FW version
x <1>
q r x q
q x q x
BALANCE ADJUSTMENT FOR RIGHT AND LEFT OUTPUT

Speaker output balance can be changed.
The adjustment levels are L10 (left only) to L1 to 0 (center) to R1 to R10 (right only) (21 levels).
2-75
Menu screen
ENTER RET
(Confirm) (Back)
<1>
L10 L9 L1 0 R1 R9 R10
ENTER Change value

at this timing
(Confirm)
TREBLE (HIGH) OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT

The treble sound quality output from the speakers can be adjusted.
The adjustment levels are +10 to 0 to -10 (21 levels).
Menu screen
ENTER RET
(Confirm) (Back)
<1> <1>
-10 -9 -1 0 +1 +9 +10
Change value
ENTER at this timing
(Confirm)
2-76
BASS (LOW) OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT

The bass sound quality output from the speakers can be adjusted.
The adjustment levels are +10 to 0 to -10 (21 levels).
Menu screen
ENTER RET
(Confirm) (Back)
<1> <1>
-10 -9 -1 0 +1 +9 +10
Change value
ENTER
at this timing
(Confirm)
LOUDNESS SETTING
This is a correction circuit that reinforce the lack of low and high sound range you feel by audibility when the volume
is low.
The setting values are ON/OFF (2 levels).
Menu screen
ENTER RET
(Confirm) (Back)
ON OFF
Change value
ENTER
at this timing
(Confirm)
2-77
CLOCK ADJUSTMENT
When changing the display from the 12-hour display to the 24-hour display, the time starts from at that time.
Example: 23:00 in 24-hour display → PM 11:00 in 12-hour display → 23:00 in 24-hour display.
Menu screen
ENTER RET
(Confirm) (Back)
24-hour display 12-hour display
ENTER RET
(Confirm) (Back)
Adjusting hour Adjusting minute
ENTER
(Confirm)
RET
(Back)
*24-hour display
Confirm the final value ENTER
at this timing
(Confirm)
Default screen
2-78
PARING (BLUETOOTH)
Authentication of a Bluetooth device used for the radio can be performed.
Menu screen
ENTER RET
(Confirm) (Back)
ENTER
(Confirm)
2
After preparation of Bluetooth unit side is finished,

display is changed.
500ms
500ms
****: S e ria l numbe r of la s t four digits of BT module
Input pass key
Paring succeeded Paring failed Timeout (180 sec)
RET
(Back)
2-79
DESTINATION SETTING
Destination can be switched.
For the difference in frequency range according to each destination, see "RECEIVABLE FREQUENCY".
Menu screen
ENTER RET
(Confirm) (Back)
3 1 5
RET
(Back)
After inputting [3],
input within 2 seconds
Japan
North America
Europe, Asia and Aus tralia
South and Central Am erica
ENTER Change value at this timing
(Confirm)
RET
(Back)
2-80
VERSION DISPLAY
Menu screen
ENTER RET
(Confirm) (Back)
2-81
2.10.13 BLUETOOTH AUDIO FUNCTION, AND USB PORT/EXTERNAL INPUT

TERMINAL
Using the Bluetooth Audio function, and USB port/external input terminal (AUX) of this machine, you can listen to
music from a cell phone and external sound device.
Bluetooth Audio
• The Bluetooth Audio function of this machine does not guarantee wireless connection with all types of devices
supporting Bluetooth. Devices like cell phones, etc. to be connected need to meet the Bluetooth standard
determined by SIG and to be certified. Even if devices to be connected meet the Bluetooth standard, some
devices may have connection problems, display/operation differences, or skipping sound.
• For the use of Bluetooth, follow the instruction manual of each device.
• Bluetooth in this machine may adversely affect some medical electric devices such as a cardiac pacemaker.
When using Bluetooth Audio near medical electric devices, be very careful and ask applicable medical electric
device manufacturers beforehand for use of Bluetooth.
USB PORT/EXTERNAL INPUT TERMIANL (AUX)
• USB port and external input terminal in this machine do not guarantee connection with all types of USB terminal
and AUX terminal. Also, when each terminal does not match the inlet of this machine, a connection is not
available.
• Charging of a device such as a mobile phone from the USB port is not available.
• For use of external sound devices and USB memories, follow the manuals for them respectively.
Specification
Bluetooth Audio
Item Description
Bluetooth Version 3.0

Field intensity Class 2
Maximum number of devices for paring registration 8
USB Port
Item MP3
Play format MP3 WMA
Bit rate Compatible with 8 to 320 kbps VBR Compatible with 5 to 384 kbps VBR
Media USB1.1
Number of files 100 files/folder
Number of folders 100 folders/layer
External Input Terminal (AUX)
Item Description
Input terminal 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini jack
2-82
2.10.14 DESCRIPTION OF BUILT-IN WIRELESS EQUIPMENT

Bluetooth radio
Apply Standar d r adio
H er eby, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, decla r es th a t t h e r a dio equ ipm en t t ype DABTK1
is in complia n ce wit h Direct ive 2014/53/E U.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
h t t p://t or ica .co.jp/
С н а с т о я щ о т о ,Tokai Rika Create Corporation,д е к л а р и р а , ч е т о з и т и п р а д и о с ъ о р ъ ж е н и е

DABTK1 е в с ъ о т в е т с т в и е с Д и р е к т и в а 2014/53/Е С .
Ц я л о с т н и я т т е к с т н а Е С д е к л а р а ц и я т а з а с ъ о т в е т с т в и е м о ж е д а с е н а м е р и н а
с л е д н и я и н т е р н е т а д р е с 2

Tím t o Tokai Rika Create Corporation, proh la šu je, že t yp r á diovéh o za ř ízen í DABTK1 je
v sou la du se sm ěrn icí 2014/53/E U.
Úplné znění EU prohlášení o shodě je k dispozici na této internetové adrese:
H er m ed er klæ r er Tokai Rika Create Corporation, a t r a diou dst yr st ypen DABTK1 er i

over en sstem m else med dir ekt iv 2014/53/E U.ÌÌ
EU-overensstemmelseserklæringens fulde tekst kan findes på følgende internetadresse:
H ier mit er klä r t Tokai Rika Create Corporation, da ss der F u n ka n la gen t yp DABTK1 der
Rich t lin ie 2014/53/E U en t sprich t .
Der vollständige Text der EU-Konformitätserklärung ist unter der folgenden Internetadresse
verfügbar:
Kä esoleva ga dekla r eer ib Tokai Rika Create Corporation, et kä esolev r a a diosea dm e t ü ü p

DABTK1 va st a b dir ekt iivi 2014/53/E L n õu et ele.
ELi vastavusdeklaratsiooni täielik tekst on kättesaadav järgmisel internetiaadressil:
2-83
Μ ε τ η ν π α ρ ο ύ σ α ο /η Tokai Rika Create Corporation, δ η λ ώ ν ε ι ό τ ι ο ρ α δ ι ο ε ξ ο π λ ι σ μ ό σ DABTK1

π λ η ρ ο ί τ η ν ο δ η γ ί α 2014/53/Ε Ε .
Τ ο π λ ή ρ εσ κ εί μ εν ο τ η σ δ ή λ ω σ η σ σ υ μ μ ό ρ φ ω σ η σ Ε Ε δ ι α τ ί θ ετ α ι σ τ η ν α κ ό λ ο υ θ η
ι σ τ ο σ ελ ί δ α σ τ ο δ ι α δ ί κ τ υ ο
P or la presen t e, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, decla r a qu e el t ipo de equ ipo ra dioeléct r ico
DABTK1 es con for m e con la Dir ect iva 2014/53/UE .
El texto completo de la declaración UE de conformidad está disponible en la dirección Internet
siguiente:
Le sou ssign é, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, décla r e qu e l'équ ipem en t r a dioélect riqu e du
t ype DABTK1 est con for m e à la dir ective 2014/53/UE .
Le texte complet de la déclaration UE de conformité est disponible à l'adresse internet suivante:
Il fa bbr ica n t e, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, dich ia ra ch e il t ipo di a ppa r ecch ia t u ra r a dio
DABTK1 è con for me a lla dir et tiva 2014/53/UE .
Il testo completo della dichiarazione di conformità UE è disponibile al seguente indirizzo Internet:
Ar šo Tokai Rika Create Corporation dekla rē, ka r a dioiekā r t a DABTK1 a tbilst Dir ekt īva i
2014/53/E S.
Pilns ES atbilstības deklarācijas teksts ir pieejams šādā interneta vietnē:
Aš, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, pa t vir t in u , ka d ra dijo įr en gin ių t ipa s DABTK1 a t it in ka
Dir ekt yvą 2014/53/E S.
Visas ES atitikties deklaracijos tekstas prieinamas šiuo interneto adresu:
Tokai Rika Create Corporation ovim e izja vlju je da je r a dijska opr em a t ipa DABTK1 u
skla du s Dir ektivom 2014/53/E U.
Cjeloviti tekst EU izjave o sukladnosti dostupan je na sljedećoj internetskoj adresi:
2-84
Tokai Rika Create Corporation iga zolja , h ogy a DABTK1 t ípu sú r á dióber en dezés m egfelel a
2014/53/E U ir á n yelvn ek.
Az EU-megfelelőségi nyilatkozat teljes szövege elérhető a következő internetes címen:
B'da n , Tokai Rika Create Corporation, n iddikja r a li da n it -t ip t a ' t a għ m ir t a r-r a dju

DABTK1 h u wa kon for m i m a d-Diret t iva 2014/53/UE .
It-test kollu tad-dikjarazzjoni ta' konformità tal-UE huwa disponibbli f'dan l-indirizz tal-Internet li
ġ ej:
H ier bij ver kla a r ik, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, da t h et t ype r a dioa ppa r a tu u r DABTK1
con for m is m et Rich t lijn 2014/53/E U.
De volledige tekst van de EU-conformiteitsverklaring kan worden geraadpleegd op het volgende
internetadres:
2
Tokai Rika Create Corporation n in iejszym oświa dcza , że t yp u r zą dzen ia r a diowego

DABTK1 jest zgodn y z dyr ekt ywą 2014/53/UE .
Pełny tekst deklaracji zgodności UE jest dostępny pod następującym adresem internetowym:
O(a ) a ba ixo a ssin a do(a ) Tokai Rika Create Corporation decla r a qu e o pr esen t e t ipo de
equ ipa m en t o de r á dio DABTK1 est á em con for mida de com a Dir et iva 2014/53/UE .
O texto integral da declaração de conformidade está disponível no seguinte endereço de Internet:
P r in prezen ta , Tokai Rika Create Corporation decla r ă că t ipu l de ech ipa m en te r a dio
DABTK1 est e în con for mit a t e cu Dir ect iva 2014/53/UE .
Textul integral al declaraț iei UE de conformitate este disponibil la următoarea adresă internet:
Tokai Rika Create Corporation t ým t o vyh la su je, že r á diové za r ia den ie t ypu DABTK1 je
v sú la de so smer n icou 2014/53/E Ú.
Úplné EÚ vyhlásenie o zhode je k dispozícii na tejto internetovej adrese:
2-85
Tokai Rika Create Corporation pot r ju je, da je t ip r a dijske opr em e DABTK1 skla den z
Dir ekt ivo 2014/53/E U.
Celotno besedilo izjave EU o skladnosti je na voljo na naslednjem spletnem naslovu:
Tokai Rika Create Corporation va ku u t t a a , et t ä r a diola it et yyppi DABTK1 on dir ekt iivin
2014/53/E U m u ka in en .
EU-vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutuksen täysimittainen teksti on saatavilla seuraavassa
internetosoitteessa:
H ä r m ed försä kra r Tokai Rika Create Corporation a t t den n a t yp a v r a diou t ru stn in g

DABTK1 över en sst ä m mer m ed direkt iv 2014/53/E U.
Den fullständiga texten till EU-försäkran om överensstämmelse finns på följande webbadress:
Tokai Rika Create Corporation erklærer herved at radioutstyrstypen DABTK1 er i samsvar med
direktiv 2014/53/EU.
Den fullstendige teksten til EUs samsvarserklæring er tilgjengelig på følgende internettadresse:
http://torica.co.jp/
Böylelikle, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, DABTK1 radyo ekipmanı tipinin 2014/53/AB Direktifi
ile uyumlu olduğunu beyan eder.
AB uygunluk beyanının tam metni aşağıdaki internet adresinde mevcuttur:
TORICA
Tokai Rika Create Corporation
2-3-10, Aoi,Higashi-ku,Nagoya 461-0004,JAPAN
Note
Importer's name and address will be officially listed on separate construction machine maker
instruction manual.
2-86
Bluetooth unit
H er eby, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, decla r es t h a t t h e r a dio equ ipm en t t ype BTU2 is in
com plia n ce wit h Direct ive 2014/53/E U.
С н а с т о я щ о т о ,Tokai Rika Create Corporation,д е к л а р и р а , ч е т о з и т и п р а д и о с ъ о р ъ ж е н и е

BTU2 е в с ъ о т в е т с т в и е с Д и р е к т и в а 2014/53/Е С .
с л е д н и я и н т е р н е т а д р е с
h t t p://t or ica .co.jp/ 2

Tím t o Tokai Rika Create Corporation, proh la šu je, že t yp r á diovéh o za řízen í BTU2 je
v sou la du se sm ěrn icí 2014/53/E U.
H er m ed er klæ r er Tokai Rika Create Corporation, a t r a diou dst yrst ypen BTU2 er i
H ier mit er klä r t Tokai Rika Create Corporation, da ss der F u n ka n la gen typ BTU2 der
verfügbar:
Kä esoleva ga dekla r eer ib Tokai Rika Create Corporation, et kä esolev r a a diosea dm e t ü ü p

BTU2 va st a b dir ekt iivi 2014/53/E L n õu etele.
2-87
Μ ε τ η ν π α ρ ο ύ σ α ο /η Tokai Rika Create Corporation, δ η λ ώ ν ε ι ό τ ι ο ρ α δ ι ο ε ξ ο π λ ι σ μ ό σ BTU2

π λ η ρ ο ί τ η ν ο δ η γ ί α 2014/53/Ε Ε .
P or la presen t e, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, decla r a qu e el t ipo de equ ipo ra dioeléct r ico
BTU2 es con for m e con la Dir ect iva 2014/53/UE .
siguiente:
Le sou ssign é, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, décla r e qu e l'équ ipem en t r a dioélect riqu e du
t ype BTU2 est con for m e à la dir ective 2014/53/UE .
Il fa bbr ica n t e, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, dich ia ra ch e il t ipo di a ppa r ecch ia t u ra r a dio
BTU2 è con for me a lla diret t iva 2014/53/UE .
Ar šo Tokai Rika Create Corporation dekla rē, ka r a dioiekā r ta BTU2 a t bilst Dir ekt īva i
2014/53/E S.
Aš, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, pa t vir tin u , ka d r a dijo įren gin ių t ipa s BTU2 a t it in ka
Tokai Rika Create Corporation ovim e izja vlju je da je r a dijska opr em a t ipa BTU2
u skla du s Dir ekt ivom 2014/53/E U.
2-88
Tokai Rika Create Corporation iga zolja , h ogy a BTU2 t ípu sú r á dióber en dezés m egfelel a
B'da n , Tokai Rika Create Corporation, n iddikja r a li da n it -t ip t a ' t a għ m ir t a r-r a dju BTU2
h u wa kon for mi m a d-Dir et t iva 2014/53/UE .
ġ ej:
H ier bij ver kla a r ik, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, da t h et t ype r a dioa ppa ra t u u r BTU2
internetadres:
2
Tokai Rika Create Corporation n in iejszym oświa dcza , że t yp u r zą dzen ia r a diowego BTU2
jest zgodn y z dyr ekt ywą 2014/53/UE .
O(a ) a ba ixo a ssin a do(a ) Tokai Rika Create Corporation decla r a qu e o pr esen t e t ipo de
equ ipa m en t o de r á dio BTU2 está em con for m ida de com a Dir et iva 2014/53/UE .
P r in pr ezen t a , Tokai Rika Create Corporation decla ră că t ipu l de ech ipa m en te r a dio BTU2
est e în con for m it a te cu Dir ect iva 2014/53/UE .
Tokai Rika Create Corporation t ým t o vyh la su je, že r á diové za ria den ie t ypu BTU2 je
v sú la de so smer n icou 2014/53/E Ú.
2-89
Tokai Rika Create Corporation pot r ju je, da je t ip r a dijske opr em e BTU2 skla den z Dir ekt ivo
2014/53/E U.
Tokai Rika Create Corporation va ku u t t a a , et t ä r a diola it et yyppi BTU2 on direkt iivin

2014/53/E U m u ka in en .
H ä r m ed för sä kr a r Tokai Rika Create Corporation a tt den n a t yp a v r a diou t r u st n in g BTU2

över en sstä m m er m ed direkt iv 2014/53/E U.
Tokai Rika Create Corporation erklærer herved at radioutstyrstypen BTU2 er i samsvar med direktiv
2014/53/EU.
Den fullstendige teksten til EUs samsvarserklæring er tilgjengelig på følgende internettadresse:
http://torica.co.jp/
Böylelikle, Tokai Rika Create Corporation, BTU2 radyo ekipmanı tipinin 2014/53/AB Direktifi ile
uyumlu olduğunu beyan eder.
AB uygunluk beyanının tam metni aşağıdaki internet adresinde mevcuttur:
Tokai Rika Create Corporation

2-3-10, Aoi,Higashi-ku,Nagoya 461-0004,JAPAN
2-90
2.11 AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioner provides the comfortable indoor atmosphere, freely controls the room temperature, and also
removes the moisture resulting in prevention of blur on the glasses.
The air conditioner is located under the cover at the back of the operator's seat and sends out warm and cool air in
the cab.
2.11.1 GRILLE (AIR OUTLET)

Select air stream in preferable direction by hand.
(A), (B), (C), and (D): Air Outlet
(A)
(A)
2
(B)
(C)
(B) (D)
When performing running-in operation of the air conditioner, always start it with the low engine speed.
Never start the air conditioner with the high engine speed. It may damage the air conditioner.
2-91
2.11.2 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL PANEL

5 (UP) 9 2 (UP)
6 3
7 4
8 1
5 (DOWN) 2 (DOWN)
Item Name Item Name Item Name

1 Main power switch 4 AUTO control switch 7 Air outlet mode selector switch
2 Fan speed selector switch 5 Temperature setting switch 8 Defroster switch

Internal and external air
3 Air conditioner switch 6 9 LCD display
selector switch
• The LCD display on the center shows temperature, air outlet mode, compressor ON-OFF, AUTO, internal and
external air, and blower air amount.
• Each switch, fan mark of the blower, and TEMP mark have the night light (green).
• Electronic sound is output as each switch is pressed (However, when its operation is active only. For example,
when the fan speed is "LO" in manual operation, no electronic sound is output even if pressing the switch to
"DOWN" the fan speed further).
2-92
2.11.3 AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION PANEL

MAIN POWER SWITCH AND DISPLAY
• LCD display (9) is on when the air conditioner is
9
operating.
The LCD is off when the air conditioner is not
operating.
• Press main power switch (1), and all functions of air 1
conditioner are ON or OFF. Every time you press this
switch, the functions cycle between ON-OFF. When
the power is ON, the air conditioner starts operating
with the setting (If the setting was AUTO, it starts with AUTO, and is manual operation was selected, it starts with
that selection) just before turning OFF.
• The air conditioner operation becomes OFF when the starter switch is turned OFF. But if the air conditioner is
turned OFF with this switch, the air conditioner may not start with the previous operation status of control panel
just before turning OFF, when the starter switch is turned ON.
FAN SPEED SELECTOR SWITCH AND DISPLAY 2

In the manual selection, the LCD fan speed display is like the following.
Fa n Lo Hi
M1 M2 M3 M4
s pe e d (Min. Flow) (Ma x. Flow)
Dis pla y
By pressing UP(2) or DOWN (2) of fan speed selector switch (2) manually, the AUTO control of fan speed is
released, and "AUTO" display in LCD display (9) becomes OFF.
AIR CONDITIONER SWITCH AND DISPLAY

With the condition that the symbol of the right figure turns
OFF on the LCD display, press air conditioner switch (3).
Then the compressor turns ON and the symbol of the
right figure turns ON on LCD display (9). When the air
conditioner switch is pressed again, the compressor turns OFF and the symbol of the right figure turns OFF on LCD
display (9).
AUTO CONTROL SWITCH AND DISPLAY

• "AUTO" on LCD display (9) turns ON only when both 9
fan speed and air outlet control are "AUTO".
• When AUTO control switch (4) is pressed, the fan
4
speed and the air outlet become under the AUTO
control, and "AUTO" turns ON on LCD display (9). 1
• When main power switch (1) is OFF, turn the switch

ON, and the air conditioner functions are also turned
ON same as the main power switch. However, both
fan speed and air outlet control become under the "AUTO" control.
2-93
TEMPERATURE SETTING SWITCH AND DISPLAY

• The digital set temperature appears on LCD display 9
5 (UP)
(9).
The set temperature range is 18 degrees C to 32
degrees C.
• When changing the set temperature, press "UP" and
"DOWN" of temperature setting switch (9). The
increment and decrement of UP (5) and DOWN (5) is 5 (DOWN)
0.5 degrees C. When the switch is pressed and held
down, the set temperature can decrease or increase continuously.
• The set temperature of 18 degrees C is the maximum cooling and that of 32 degrees C is the maximal heating
control. And the both control do not operate by targeting the set temperature.
• The set temperature display can be switched between "Fahrenheit ←→ Celsius". While the fan is operating,
press and hold "UP" and "DOWN" of temperature setting switch (9) together for 5 seconds to switch the display
between "Fahrenheit ←→ Celsius". (No unit is displayed)
LCD DISPLAY
Celsius (degrees C): LO, 18.5 to 31.5, HI
Fahrenheit (degrees F): LO, 64F to 89F, HI
INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL AIR SELECTOR SWITCH AND DISPLAY

• The current inlet mode is displayed in LCD display (9). 9
• Each time internal and external air selector switch (6) 6
is pressed, the mode is switched to air recirculation or
fresh air intake.
A: Air recirculation
B: Fresh air intake
A: B:
2-94
AIR OUTLET MODE SELECTOR SWITCH AND DISPLAY

• The current air outlet mode position is displayed with AUTO Air outlet mode
9
arrow(s) on the LCD display.
• When air outlet mode selector switch (7) is pressed
while "AUTO" is ON, the air outlet mode is fixed with 7
the mode at that time and "AUTO" on the LCD display 8
turns OFF, and the AUTO control of the air outlet
mode is released.
<Air outlet mode display>

Mode 1 2 3 4 5
FACE VENT HIGH-LEVEL F/D
DEF
Outlet mode
UP (Front side only) UP UP&DOWN DOWN&WINDSHIELD DEFROST
LCD display
2
• When air outlet mode selector switch (7) is pressed in the manual control, it switches through Mode 1 → Mode 2
→ Mode 3 → Mode 4 → Mode 1....
For the defroster switching, press defroster switch (8).
• Air outlet mode under the AUTO control switches as
<Air outlet mode under auto control>
shown in the figure.
Air outlet mode
MODE2
MODE3
MODE4
15 25 40 50 Ta rge t outle t
te mpe ra ture
DEFROSTER SWITCH AND DISPLAY

• Press defroster switch (8), and the display A on LCD B 9 A
display (9) turns OFF, and the B mark is displayed.
• To go back to a mode other than the defroster, push
7
air outlet mode selector switch (7), and the mode
returns to the air outlet mode before the defroster 8
switch was pressed.
• When defroster switch (8) is pressed while "AUTO" is
ON, "AUTO" on LCD (9) turns OFF, and the AUTO
control of the air outlet is released.
2-95
2.11.4 HOW TO USE AIR CONDITIONER

Close the cab door and windows to get the best performance as an automatic air conditioner.
COOLING METHOD
To avoid freezing of the evaporator, do not operate the air conditioner for a long time in the COOL-MAX set
temperature with the LO airflow.
If it is frozen and cool air does not flow any longer, turn air conditioner switch (3) off, set the temperature high,
operate the air conditioner with the maximum airflow "HI", and then turn air conditioner switch (3) "ON".
1. Press main power switch (1). 5 (UP) 9 2 (UP)
6 3
2. Press fan speed selector switch (2), and select "HI".

7 4
3. Press temperature adjustment switch (5), and set 8 1
your desired temperature.

4. Press air conditioner switch (3). 5 (DOWN) 2 (DOWN)
5. Press internal and external air selector switch (6), and select the air recirculation.
6. Press air outlet mode selector switch (7), and select the vent air outlet (Mode 2).
7. When the temperature inside the cab becomes low, adjust to the temperature and the fan speed to desired
levels.
Press auto switch (4) to automatically control a temperature and mode.
HEATING METHOD
The engine coolant is used for heating, and it is possible to heat the air when the temperature of the coolant is high.
6 3
2. Press fan speed selector switch (2), and select "HI".

7 4
3. Press temperature adjustment switch (5), and set 8 1
your desired temperature.

4. Press internal and external air selector switch (6), 5 (DOWN) 2 (DOWN)
and select the fresh air intake.

5. Press air outlet mode selector switch (7), and select the down air outlet (Mode 4).
6. When the temperature inside the cab becomes high, adjust to the temperature and the fan speed to desired
levels.
Press auto switch (4) to automatically control a temperature and mode.
2-96
METHOD OF HEATING WITH DEHUMIDIFICATION AND DEMISTING
When the outdoor temperature is 0 degrees C or lower, the air conditioner (compressor) may not work.
6 3
2. Press fan speed selector switch (2), and select your

7 4
desired fan speed.
8 1
3. Press temperature adjustment switch (5), and set

your desired temperature. 5 (DOWN) 2 (DOWN)
4. Press internal and external air selector switch (6), and select the fresh air intake.
5. Press air conditioner switch (3), and operate the air conditioner (compressor).
2-97
2.11.5 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION IN DISPLAY MONITOR

If there are problems on the input circuit of the driving line in the motor actuator, they can be checked on the panel
display.
<Disconnection detection of the motor actuator and the motor lock detection display>
Error Location Erro r Display
Air mix Displays "HLE" on temperature display segment
Air outlet mode Flashes human indication
Switching internal
and external air Flashes internal and external air symbols
If there are problems on the input circuit of the evaporator and recirculation air sensors, they can be checked on the
panel display.
<Disconnection detection display of evaporator and recirculation air sensors
Error Location Erro r Display
18 degrees C : LO.E
Evaporator sensor Displays "E" on the temperature display, first decimal point 25 degrees C : 25.E
32 degrees C : HO.E
Recirculation air sensor Displays "H L" on the temperature display

HL. 0 to HL. 9
and "0 to 9" on the first decimal point
Error detection of each sensor from monitor mode (showing failure control of the control panel)
• To start the monitor display, press and hold the internal and external air selector switch and the main power
switch simultaneously for one second or more while the air conditioner is running. Then the display switches to
the monitor mode. Follow the same procedure to exit the mode.
• The normal status, disconnection, and short circuit of the recirculation air sensor and evaporator sensor are
shown as segment display.
<7seg display for monitor> <Exa mple :

7s e g dis pla y for monitor loca tion> <List ta ble of 3rd digit s e gme nt>
S e ns or 7seg Display
Na me for Monitor
2nd di git s e gme nt dis pla y
Re circula tion
a ir s e ns or
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Evaporator Re circula tion a ir s e ns or dis conne ction "0CH0 " dis pla y
1
sensor 0 Eva pora tor s e ns or dis conne ction "0CH1" dis pla y
S ola r ra dia tion
2
s e ns or
<Exa mple : 1
<Error dis pla y conte nts > Digits dis pla y loca tion> 2
3rd digit s e gme nt dis pla y
S e ns or Short Dis conne ction 2nd digit: F 3

Na me Display Dis pla y
4
Re circula tion 0
F6H 0CH0 5
a ir s e ns or Ea ch s e ns or is norma l
Eva pora tor 6
sensor F6H1 0CH1 7
8
3rd digit: 3 9
A
<Exa mple : Norma l> B
C
D
E
Recirculation air sensor short "F6H0" Display
F
Eva pora tor s e ns or s hort "F6H1 " Dis pla y
2-98
2.11.6 HANDLING AT IN-SEASON/OFF-SEASON

IN-SEASON
To use the air conditioner for a long time comfortably, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer for inspection and
maintenance of the air conditioner at the beginning of in-season of cooling.
OFF-SEASON
During off-season, operate the air conditioner at least once a week for several minutes.
The oil shortage at each part of the compressor will be prevented by operating the air conditioner and it will always
be kept in the best condition.
2-99
2.12 HANDLING OF SEAT BELT
INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT
• Be sure to fasten your seat belt during operation. If not followed, it can result in serious accidents or death
caused by being heavily hit inside the cab or thrown out of the cab when the machine tips/rolls over.
• Check the mounting bolts installed to the seat for looseness and retighten the bolts if required.
• Change the seat belt every three years, even if there is no abnormality in the appearance. The manufacturing
date is woven into the back side of the belt.
Since this seat belt is equipped with take-up motion, the adjustment of length is unnecessary.
2.12.1 HOW TO FASTEN SEAT BELT

1. Check that the seat belt is not twisted, and pull it out
to a sufficient length.
2. Insert the seat belt into buckle (2) until it clicks
Release the seat belt, and the length is
automatically adjusted and the buckle is locked.
3
1 2
2.12.2 HOW TO UNFASTEN SEAT BELT

• Press the red button (3) of the buckle (2), and the belt (1) is unfastened.
2-100
2.13 HANDLING OF OPERATOR'S SEAT

APPLICABLE No.
MODEL APPLICABLE No. MODEL APPLICABLE No.

SK140SRLC-5 YH08-11001-12779 SK260LC-10
LL16-10001-10671
SK140SRL-5 LH03-02001-02124 SK260NLC-10
SK180LC-10 SK350LC-10
YM09-01001-01439 YC14-14001-14528
SK180N-10 SK350NLC-10
SK210LC-10
YN15-80001-80925
SK210NLC-10
YQ15-20001-21227 SK500LC-10 YS14-05001-05156
SK210SNLC-10
LN05-00101-00154
SK240SN-10
SK230SRLC-5 LA08-04001-04337
SK850LC-10 LY04-00601
SK270SRLC-5 YU08-05001-05385
SK300LC-10
LB08-00101-00556
SK300NLC-10
The position of operator's seat can be adjusted. Adjust the seat to the position at which you can operate the control 2
levers and pedals easily.
When adjusting the operator's seat, pay attention to hands in order not to be caught between the handle and seat
stand.
(E)
(E)
(B)
4
(D)
8
9
7 6
(A) (C) (A)
2 1
(F)
2.13.1 HEIGHT AND TILT ADJUSTMENT

(A) The height and angle of operator's seat can be adjusted.
• Pull lever (1) up to tilt the front of the seat up/down. (5 levels tilting)
• Pull lever (1) down to tilt the rear of the seat up/down. (5 levels tilting)
• The height of the seat is adjusted by tilting the front and rear of the seat alternatively.
2-101
2.13.2 RECLINING ADJUSTMENT

(B) The reclining angle can be adjusted.
• Pull lever (2) up, and recline the backrest to your desired angle. After adjustment, release the lever to fix the
angle.
2.13.3 FRONT/REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT

(C) The position of operator's seat can be adjusted back and forth.
• To slide the seat back and forth, pull handle (3) up.
After adjusting the seat to your desired position, release the handle and check that the seat is locked securely.
(Adjustable length: 160 mm)
2.13.4 ARM REST ADJUSTMENT

(D) The arm rest can be lifted up, and its angle can be adjusted.
• Arm rest (4) can be lifted up backward.
• Turn control dial (6) at the bottom of arm rest (4) by hand to fine adjust the angle of the arm rest in regular
position up/down.
2.13.5 HEAD REST ADJUSTMENT

(E) The head rest can be moved up, down, back, and forth.
• To adjust the head rest up and down, hold the head rest with both hands, and move it up or down slowly.
• To adjust the head rest back and forth, hold the head rest with both hands, and move it back and forth to your
desired position.
2.13.6 ADJUSTING AIR SUSPENSION

Adjustment knob (7) of the suspension is located at the front of the seat. You can adjust the suspension by pulling
/pushing this knob to your desired status of the suspension in accordance with your weight. This is possible when
the starter switch is "ON".
2.13.7 SEAT HEATER (OPTION)

Seat heater switch (8) is located at the left side of the backrest. If this switch is turned "O (ON)", the seat becomes
warm. This is possible when the starter switch is "ON".
2.13.8 LUMBAR SUPPORT

Lumber support adjustment dial (9) is located at the left side of the backrest. You can adjust the degrees of the
backrest contact to your loins.
2-102
2.14 HANDLING OF OPERATOR'S SEAT

Adjust the operator’s seat to the position at which you can operate the control levers and pedals easily.
When adjusting the operator's seat, pay attention to hands in order not to be caught between the handle and seat
stand.
9
(E) (E)
(B)
10 7
(D)
2
3
8
11
(C) 6 5
(A)
4
1
2
2.14.1 DAMPER ADJUSTMENT

The damper can be adjusted.
• Move handle (1) to a desired position. (3 steps)
a. Soft b
b. Middle
c. Hard
c a
2-103
2.14.2 WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

(A) The height of the operator's seat can be adjusted according to the operator’s weight.
1. Pull up lever (2) shortly and then the seat height is automatically adjusted according to the operator's weight.
2. Release the lever to fix the height of the seat.
• Adjust the damper to the soft position before adjusting the seat.
• Turn the starter switch to the "ON" position before adjusting the seat.
2.14.3 HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

(A) The height of the operator's seat can be adjusted.
1. Fully pull up lever (2).
2. Adjust the seat height to a desired height.
3. Release the lever to fix the height of the seat.
• Adjust the damper to the soft position before adjusting the seat.
• Turn the starter switch to the "ON" position before adjusting the seat.
2-104
2.14.4 RECLINING ADJUSTMENT

(B) The reclining angle can be adjusted.
1. Pull up lever (3).
2. Tilt the seat backrest to a desired angle.
3. Release the lever to fix the angle of the seat.
2.14.5 FRONT/REAR ADJUSTMENT OF SEAT

(C) The position of the operator's seat can be adjusted back and forth.
1. Pull up handle (4).
2. Move the seat back and forth to adjust it to a desired position.
3. Release the handle to fix the position of the seat.
2.14.6 TILT ADJUSTMENT OF SEAT SEATING SURFACE

(A) The angle of the seating surface of the operator's seat can be adjusted.
2
2. Tilt the seat seating surface to a desired angle to adjust it.
3. Release the handle to fix the position of the seat seating surface.
2.14.7 FRONT/REAR ADJUSTMENT OF SEAT SEATING SURFACE

(C) The position of the seating surface of the operator's seat can be adjusted back and forth.
2. Move the seat seating surface back and forth to adjust it to a desired position.
3. Release the handle to fix the position of the seat seating surface.
2.14.8 ARM REST ADJUSTMENT

(D) The arm rest can be lifted up, and its angle can be adjusted.
• Arm rest (7) can be lifted up backward.
• Turn control dial (8) at the bottom of arm rest (7) by hand to adjust the angle of the arm rest in the regular
position.
2.14.9 HEAD REST ADJUSTMENT

(E) The head rest can be adjusted by moving it up, down, back, or forth.
• To adjust head rest (9) up or down, hold it with both hands, and move it up or down slightly.
• To adjust head rest (9) back and forth, hold it with both hands, and move it back and forth to a desired position.
2-105
2.14.10 SEAT HEATER

Turn seat heater switch (10) "ON" to warm the seat.
ON
This function can be used with the starter switch "ON".
2.14.11 LUMBAR SUPPORT

Adjust the lumber supporting level of the backrest by using adjusting dial (11) of the lumbar support.
2-106
2.15 HANDLING PARTS INSIDE CAB
LEAVING OPERATOR'S SEAT

When necessary to leave from the operator's seat, be sure to lock the pilot control shut-off lever.
If the control lever is unexpectedly touched without the pilot control shut-off lever locked, it may cause severe
accident resulting in severe injury.
2.15.1 CAB DOOR LOCK
In operation, lock the door securely either open side or close side. If not locked, the door may open or close
unexpectedly and this may cause danger and failure of the machine.
2
This is used to fix the door in the condition where the door is open.
• Push the door against catch (1) and door is fixed.
• To close the door, push down lever (2) on the left 2
side of the operator's seat to release the catch.
1
• When necessary to fix the door, fix the door to the
catch securely.
2.15.2 OPENING DOOR FROM INSIDE OF CAB

• To open the door from the inside of the cab, push
lever (1) with your finger to open it.
2-107
2.15.3 OPENING/CLOSING FRONT WINDOW (UPPER)
OPENING/CLOSING FRONT WINDOW (UPPER)
• Open/close the front window with the machine in a level position and lock the front window securely. If the lock is
released in the forward tilting position of machine there is a possibility of falling of the front window.
• When closing the front window, the closing speed increases due to the weight of front window. Hold and close it
by both hands securely.
• When retracting the front window in, pull up the pilot control shut-off lever to the "LOCKED" position and stop the
engine.
To prevent your hand from being caught between the windows, open and close the front window slowly. It is
dangerous to work with the front window not or incompletely locked. Confirm that the front window is surely locked.
1. Move the machine to a level and firm place.

2. Put the bucket on the ground.
3. Stop the engine and move the pilot control shut-off
lever to the "LOCKED" position.
A
4. Push lock lever (1) on the center of the front window

(upper) right to release the lock.
5. Hold and lift up the handles on the upper and lower
part of the front window (upper), and move the front
window (upper) fully toward the back of the ceiling to
automatically set it to the locked condition; however, 1
check it is locked securely.
6. To close the front window (upper), perform the
reverse procedures of the above Step 2 and 3.
7. To close the front window (upper), push the upper
right and left of the front window forward, and pull
lock lever (1) toward yourself to lock the window
securely.
2-108
2.15.4 RETRACTING FRONT WINDOW (LOWER)

1. After retracting the front window (upper) in the
ceiling, hold the front window (lower) by hands and
remove it from the window frame.
The removed front window (lower) should be stored 2
in holder (1) on the left back side of the cab for
secure storage.
2. Insert the glass into right and left holders (1), and fix
the glass with lock (2) on the upper window frame.
1
2.15.5 CAB ROOM LAMP

Operate the switch in accordance with the purpose. 2
• Turn the switch "ON" to turn on the lamp.
• The lamp does not turn on when the switch is on the
"OFF" side.
ON
OFF
2-109
2.16 EMERGENCY ESCAPE FROM OPERATOR'S

STATION
If it is impossible to open the cab door in an emergency, escape from the cab by the following way.
1. Open the front window and escape through the front window.
For how to open the front window, see "OPENING/CLOSING FRONT WINDOW" in Chapter 2.
2. If the front window cannot be opened, break the

front window glass by using hammer for emergency 1
exit (1) placed on the left rear of the cab.
Pay attention to the broken pieces so as not to be injured when breaking the window glass.
Label (2) indicating the emergency exit are affixed on the rear window.
2-110
2.17 OTHER ACCESSORIES

2.17.1 TOOL BOX
Use the tool box for storing tools and fixtures. The
storage place is on the right front of the machine.
Use the starter key to release the lock on the door, and
hold it with the stay.
After using tools, remove the stay, close the cover, and
lock it with the starter key.
2.17.2 GREASE GUN HOLDER

This is on the right front of the machine.
When the gun is not used, put it on this holder.
2.17.3 CUP HOLDER

This is located on the right inside the cab.
Store plastic bottles, etc.
2-111
2.17.4 GUARD/SIDE DOOR (WITH LOCK)
Be sure to stop the engine before opening the engine hood, battery cover, and side cover, etc.
The engine hood, fuel inlet, right and left side doors, and cab door covers are provided with the lock mechanism.
To open/close them, use the starter key. When using the starter key, fully insert it and then turn it. If it is not fully
inserted, it may be broken.
HOW TO UNLOCK AND OPEN GUARD AND SIDE DOOR

1. Insert the starter key into the keyway.
2
1 3
2. Turn the starter key counterclockwise and pull the

door handle to open the door.
3. If the door is provided with a stay, support the door
securely using the stay.
2-112
HOW TO LOCK GUARD AND SIDE DOOR

1. If a stay is provided, return the stay to the original position.
2. Close the door.
3. Turn the starter key clockwise and remove it.
2-113
2.18 BATTERY POWER-OFF SWITCH
When turning the battery power-off switch to the "O (OFF)" position, turn the starter switch to the OFF position and
wait 5 minute or more. And then operate the battery power-off switch.
If the battery power is turned off immediately after stopping the engine, it may cause damage to the exhaust gas
cleaning device.
When setting the switch to the OFF position, all electrical circuits are shut down, and the preset memory and clock
memory of the radio are cleared.
The battery power-off switch shuts down the battery

circuit.
The switch is located on the right of the opened left side
door. It is usually set to the "I (ON)" position.
ON(I): Turn key (1) right to connect the electrical circuit.
OFF(O): Turn key (1) left to shut down the electrical
circuit.
Set the battery power-off switch to "OFF" for the following purposes:
To stop operation of the machine for a long period (one month or longer)
Shut down the power circuit to prevent battery discharge, short circuit, or electric leakage.
To perform maintenance of the electrical system or electric welding

Shut down the power circuit to prevent damage of electrical components, fire and so on.
2-114
2.19 FUEL SUPPLY PUMP
HANDLING OF FUEL SUPPLY PUMP
• Wipe off spilled fuel to prevent a fire.

• After the work, check that fuel does not leak.
Fuel can be supplied by using the fuel supply pump according to the following procedures.
Supply light oil as fuel.
• Before starting fuel supply, check the hoses, the supply pump, and the harnesses for damage and each
connecting part for looseness.
• If strainer (3) is dirty, clean it with light oil. 2
• Do not leave the machine during fuel supply.
• When the pump runs at idle and automatically stops, yellow lamp (8) blinks. In case of supplying fuel
consecutively, put the hose into the tank again, and then press ON/OFF switch (6) again.
• Green lamp (7) will turn off if the machine is not operated for a certain period of time.
(1) Fuel supply pump 8

6 9
(2) Suction hose
(3) Strainer
7
(4) Nut
(5) Hose storing box
(6) ON/OFF switch
(7) Green lamp
(8) Yellow lamp
(9) Red lamp
1
1. When perform fuel supply, stop the engine.
2-115
2. Open the side door at the left side of the machine with the starter key and hold the door with the stay.
3. Take out suction hose (2) from hose storing box (5).
4. Loosen nut (4) of strainer (3) at the end of the
suction hose to the position where the turn stops. 3 4
5. Put the suction hose into the fuel tank (fuel supply
side).
6. Press ON/OFF switch (6) of the fuel supply pump to
start fuel supply. During fuel supply, red lamp (9)
turns on.
7. When the fuel tank becomes close to full, the fuel
supply stops automatically.
When you need to stop the fuel supply, press ON/OFF switch (6).
8. After finishing the fuel supply, take out suction hose (2) from the tank, tighten nut (4) of strainer (3) to the
position where the turn stops, and then put the hose back into the storing box.
9. Close the side door and lock it with the starter key.
2-116
［3. MACHINE OPERATION］
3. MACHINE OPERATION
3-1
3-2
3.1 EVERYDAY CHECK-UP

Before starting the engine, walk around the machine to check for any loose nuts and bolts, any oil, fuel or coolant
leakage, and the condition of the attachment/equipment, body structure, and hydraulic system.
Check for any looseness in the electrical wiring and for any accumulated material (leaves, dirt, etc.).
MACHINE FIRE PREVENTION

The deposit of flammable, fuel leakage and oil leakage in heated area around the engine, muffler and battery may
cause fire of machine. Check the area sufficiently, and if the abnormality is found, repair it or contact your
• Check the engine for any oil, fuel or coolant leakage. Repair as required.
• Check the area around the engine and radiator for any accumulated material and remove as required.
• Check the hydraulic devices, hydraulic oil tank, hoses and joints for oil leakage, and repair as required.
• Check the travel system, such as the crawler, front idlers and sprockets, for any damage or wear, and the bolts
for looseness, and the rollers for oil leakage, and repair as required.
• Check the attachment/equipment, body structure, and cylinders for any cracking, damage or looseness, and
repair as required.
• Check the doors, covers, steps and handrails for damage, and the bolts for looseness. Repair any damages and
tighten loose bolts.
• Check the gauge cluster for damage and replace it as required.
• Check the rearview mirrors for abnormality and replace it with a new one when it is broken. Clean the surface of
the mirror and adjust the angle so that the operator can see the rear from the operator's seat.
3
• Check the seat belts and the mounting hardware for the abnormality and if any damage is found, replace it with a
new one.
3-3
3.2 CHECK BEFORE STARTING ENGINE

The following checkup should be performed once before the first engine startup in a day.
3.2.1 CHECKING COOLANT LEVEL AND REFILLING
HANDLING OF RADIATOR
• Do not open the radiator cap if not required. Check the coolant of reserve tank (1) when the engine is cooled
down.
• After the engine stops, the coolant is hot and the high pressure is accumulated in the radiator. Removing the
radiator cap under this condition may cause burns. After the coolant cools down, turn the cap slowly to release
the pressure.
• If the water level in the reserve tank drops frequently, immediately contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
1. Use the starter key to open the side door on the left
side of the machine and hold it with the stay.
2. Check that the coolant level falls within the range of S
12h
FULL (upper limit)-LOW (lower limit) of reserve tank
(1). If the water level is low, remove the cap of filler
port (2) of the reserve tank and pour coolant water
to the FULL level.
If the reserve tank is empty, check it for water leaks
and check the water level in the radiator. If the water
level is low, fill the radiator with coolant and then fill
the reserve tank with coolant. Then immediately 2
1
3. After supply, tighten the cap securely.
4. Release the support stay and close the side door.
FULL
LOW
3-4
3.2.2 CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL OF ENGINE OIL PAN AND

REFILLING
TEMPERATURE AFTER STOPPING ENGINE

Immediately after the engine is stopped, there is a possibility of getting burn with heated parts and oil. Start working
after the temperature goes down.
• Make sure the machine is in a level and firm condition when checking the engine oil level.
• Be sure to check the engine oil level before starting the engine.
• When checking the engine oil level after operation, wait approximately 30 minutes from engine stop before
checking it.
1. Open the engine hood with the starter key and hold it with the stay.
2. Pull out oil level gauge (1) and wipe off the oil with a
2
waste cloth.
3. Insert oil level gauge (1) completely once again and 1
pull it out.
3
4. When oil level gauge (1) indicates the oil level

between "FULL" (upper limit) and "ADD" (lower
limit), it is proper. When the oil level does not reach
"ADD" level, refill the engine oil from oil filler cap (2).
If the oil is significantly contaminated or
deteriorated, change it ahead of the periodic
replacement interval. For engine oils to use, see
"LUBRICANT, FUEL & COOLANT
SPECIFICATIONS" in Chapter 4.
5. When the oil level is above the "FULL" level, loosen

drain cock (3) to drain the excess engine oil and
check the oil level once again.
3-5
6. Check that the oil level is proper and insert level

4
gauge (1) securely.
A
• When inserting the oil level gauge (1), be careful not to bend it. Otherwise, the oil level gauge (1) may be
deformed.
• Insert the oil level gauge (1) until the grip part (A) touches the guide tube (4). A gap between them may let water
enter the engine causing a malfunction.
7. Remove the support stay and close the engine hood.
3-6
3.2.3 CHECKING FUEL LEVEL AND REFUELING
REFUELING
• Never use the oil other than light oil as fuel. Check the fuel type again before refueling.
• Be sure to stop the engine before refueling.
• Do not overflow fuel while refueling. Wipe off spilled fuel completely.
When getting on and off the machine, use the steps and handrails to prevent yourself from falling down or off from
the machine.
• Be careful not to refuel the tank to a level more than necessary (to the top end of tank). There is a possibility of
overflowing because the fuel expands as the outside air temperature rises.
• Be sure to use light oil as fuel, which meets the standard of each country. To achieve a good fuel efficiency and
exhaust gas property, the engine of this machine uses the electronically controlled fuel injector.
Because this device requires high parts precision and high lubricating ability, when low viscosity fuel with low
lubricating ability is used, the durability may decrease significantly. 3
1. Use the gauge cluster to check the fuel level.

After turning the starter switch ON, the fuel level 2
meter is displayed. When the fuel level is low, the
pointer points E. 1
2. Refuel only after stopping the engine. 3
3. When refueling, climb up from the right front side of

the machine and stand on the step above the
control valve.
4. Remove rubber cover (2), if equipped, from the filler
port and turn filler cap (1) to open it.
5. Refuel the machine with strainer (3) attached to the
filler port.
When dirt is adhered on strainer (3), take out
strainer (3), wash it with light oil or clean it by air
blowing, and then attach it to the filler port again.
Fuel tank capacity: 190L(50.2Gal)
6. After refueling, tighten filler cap (1) securely. Attach rubber cover (2) according to the orientation of the cap.
3-7
3.2.4 DRAINING FUEL PRE-FILTER
To avoid the damage of O-ring, remove foreign matter around the mounting area of drain plug. Damage of O-ring
causes leak of fuel, and it causes fire.
The fuel pre-filter is a device which separates water mixed in fuel.

When water is accumulated in the fuel pre-filter, drain the water.
1. Use the starter key to open the side door on the
right side of the machine and hold it with the stay. 4
2. Place a drain oil container under drain hose (2). 1
3. Raise cock (5) to "Close" position (A).
4. Loosen drain valve (3) and air bleeder plug (4) to 3
drain water accumulated in fuel filter (1) into the
container. 2
5. After draining the water, tighten drain valve (3) and

air bleeder plug (4) securely.
Check the water drained to the container. If that is
contaminated significantly, clean the element and
the inside of the case.
6. Lower cock (5) to "Open" position (B). 5
7. Remove the support stay and close the side door.
3-8
3.2.5 CHECKING OIL LEVEL OF HYDRAULIC OIL TANK
PRESSURE WITHIN HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

The inside of the hydraulic tank is dangerous because it is high temperature and pressurized.
Before removing the filler port plug, stop the engine, remove breather head cap (1), and then press the valve to
release the pressure in the hydraulic oil tank.
For refilling procedures of the hydraulic oil, see "5000 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES" in
Chapter 4.
The hydraulic oil tank is on the right side.

2. Retract the arm cylinder and bucket cylinder, and
place the bucket and dozer (when installed) on the
ground.
3
4. Check the oil level through sight level gauge (G)

provided on the side of the hydraulic oil tank.
If the reading falls within the range of "H" to "L", the H
oil level is normal. G
The oil level varies depending on the oil L
temperature. Use the following rough standard at
inspection.
• Before operation: Near the "L" level (oil temp. 10
to 30 degrees C)
• During normal operation: Near the "H" level (oil
temp. 50 to 80 degrees C)
Do not supply oil to the "H" level or more. It causes damages on the hydraulic circuit or oil spouting.
3-9
3.2.6 CHECKING FAN BELT AND AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR

BELT
INSPECTING AND MAINTAINING THE BELT

Be sure to stop the engine before inspection and maintenance of the engine.
Inspecting and maintaining the running engine may cause severe injury by being caught in the rotating parts, such
as the fan and the belt.
Replace the belt with a new one if flaking or breakage is found on the belt by the inspection, slip occurs excessively,
or the belt cannot be adjusted to within the adjustment range. Keep the belt away from oils. The service life may be
shortened if it slips by oil.
• When the belt is replaced by a new one, the belt does not have the initial adaptability. Run the engine at idle for 3
to 5 minutes and then adjust the belt tension again.
• After running the engine for about 2 hours, a new belt obtains a complete initial elongation.
• When replacing a set of two belts, be sure to replace both two with new ones.
The engine of this machine is equipped with the alternator, the fan, and air conditioning compressor belts.
Check the belts for wear and damage, and also for tension, and adjust them properly in order to maintain the
maximum engine performance and the service life.
For adjustment procedures for each belt, see "ADJUSTING FAN BELT AND AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
BELT" in Chapter 4.
• To check the belt tension, press on the center of the

belt with your thumb. If the deflection falls within the
range shown in the following table, it is normal.
New Belt
At Inspection Pushing Force
Belt Tension
mm (inch) N (lbf)
mm (inch)
Fan alternator 4.2 to 5(0.17 to 0.20) 6.6 to 7.4(0.26 to 0.29) 98(22)
Air conditioning compressor

3 to 4(0.12 to 0.16) 5 to 6(0.20 to 0.24) 24(5.4)
belt
3-10
3.2.7 CHECKING RADIATOR, OIL COOLER AND FILTER

1. Using starter key, unlock side door on left side of
counterweight, and open it.
1
2. By visual check, check mud, dust and leaves which
contaminate filters (1).
3. When filter is contaminated heavily, refer to "250
HOUR (3-MONTH) INSPECTION MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURE" for Inspection and maintenance.
3.2.8 CHECKING DEF/ADBLUE LEVEL AND REFILLING
• Use DEF/AdBlue which meets ISO 22241-1 or JIS K2247-1.

• Do not fill the DEF/AdBlue tank with diesel fuel or water.
• Comply with the precautions specified by the manufacturer when handling DEF/AdBlue.
3
When the level gauge of gauge cluster indicates Level 2 (Yellow), Level 1 (Red), or Level 0 (No display), refill DEF/
AdBlue immediately to Level 3 (Green) or over.
DEF/AdBlue shortage restricts the engine output.
1. Use the gauge cluster to check the level of DEF/

AdBlue.
After turning the starter switch ON, level gauge (1) is H
12h
displayed on the multi-display.
The levels are displayed in ten levels. As the
amount of remaining DEF/AdBlue decreases, the
number of levels decreases.
3-11
2. Set the machine to the parking position.

3. Get on the shoe and place a container containing
DEF/AdBlue on step (A).
4. Hold the handrail and get on the machine using the
step. A
5. Turn inlet port cap (2) to open it.
When dirt is adhered on strainer (3) of the inlet port
take out strainer (3), wash it with water, dry it
completely, and then attach it to the inlet port again.
6. Refill DEF/AdBlue from the inlet port. Refill it until
the level reaches the line F, while checking level
gauge (4) on the right side of the tank.
Full capacity of tank: 33.9L(9Gal)
7. After refilling DEF/AdBlue, tighten cap (2) securely. 3
4
2
3.2.9 ADJUSTMENT OF OPERATOR'S SEAT
ABOUT ADJUSTMENT OF OPERATOR'S SEAT
• Adjust the operator's seat before the operation or when the operator changes.
• When adjusting the operator's seat, pay attention to hands in order not to be caught between the handle and the
seat stand.
For adjusting procedures of operator's seat, see "HANDLING OF OPERATOR'S SEAT" in Chapter 2.
Adjust the operator's seat in a way so that the operator

can operate the control levers, pedals and switches
freely, with his/her back contacting with the backrest of
the operator's seat.
3-12
3.2.10 ADJUSTMENT OF MIRRORS
ABOUT ADJUSTMENT OF MIRRORS

Be sure to adjust the mirrors before operation.
When the mirrors are poorly adjusted, visibility cannot be ensured and it could cause severe injury.
Use genuine mirrors only.

When the mirrors are attached to a non-specified place, such as the handrail of the cab entrance, the strength of
handrail may be decreased and it may cause damage or falling off of the mirror.
Adjust cab left mirror in a way so that the blind spot can
be minimized when seeing it from the operator's seat. 2
(1) Mirror 3
(2) Seat
(3) Dual monitor
1
VISIBILITY MAP
• The following visibility map is a rough standard of areas where the operator cannot see both directly and
indirectly (through the mirrors and the camera). The operator can use this map as a reference to improve field
rules or enhance visibility by adding an auxiliary device.
• This machine complies with the visibility requirements stipulated in EN474-1.
• This map is not the same as the visibility requirements stipulated in EN474-1.
• This map was made according to the standard specification. Be cautious that the map may change according to
the machine specification.
This map is a rough standard at the ground surface within the radius of 12 m, centering the operator reference point
(680 mm above and 20 mm forward from Seat Index Point) from near areas of the machine.
3-13
12m
(3 9
'4 ")
9.5m(31'2")
MIRROR A (CAB LEFT SIDE)

Adjust the mirror in the way that a person (or the object of 1.2 m high and 30 cm in diameter) who stands on the left
rear end of the machine can be identified by the operator in the operator's seat.
• Install the mirror to the position shown in the figure.
• Install the mirror in the way not to come in contact
1
with stay (1) of the mirror.
• If the movement of the mirror is not smooth, loosen
nut (2) of the mirror to adjust it.
Tightening torque of nut (2)
M10: 18.6 to 25.5N·m (13.7 to 18.8 lbf·ft)
• Adjust the mirror to reflect the machine side.
2
3-14
SIDE CAMERA (RIGHT SIDE)

(1)Dual monitor
VIEWING ANGLE OF CAMERA
(127°)
(2)Converter (HORIZONTAL DIRECTION)
(3)Right view camera
Blind spot range

L1: 321mm(12.6")
L2: 941mm(37.0")
9°)
(9
°) VIEWING ANGLE
2
(3 . OF CAMERA
(VERTICAL
DIRECTION)
L2
L1
DEAD AREA
3
CAMERA (MACHINE REAR SIDE)
(1)Gauge cluster (Monitor)
(2)Converter
(3)Rearview camera VIEWING ANGLE
OF CAMERA
(HORIZONTAL
Blind spot range DIRECTION)
(116 )
L1: 463mm(18.2")
L2: 874mm(34.4")
2
1 3
)
5
(8
VIEWING ANGLE
OF CAMERA
(VERTICAL
DIRECTION)
L2
L1 DEAD AREA
3-15
3.2.11 CHECKING MULTI-DISPLAY

Before starting the engine, check the display status of the multi-display on the gauge cluster.
When the warning is displayed on the multi-display, ask your KOBELCO authorized dealer for inspection.
1. Make sure the pilot control shut-off lever is in the

"LOCKED" position.
2. Make sure all control levers are in the "NEUTRAL" S
12h
position.
3. Turn the key of the starter switch to the "ON"
position.
4. Check that no warning is displayed on the multi-
display.
3.2.12 CHECKING WORKING LIGHT

While the starter switch is in the "ON" position, press the
working light switch to turn on the working lights on the
boom and on the right side of the front. If they do not
light, presumably light bulbs are burned out or the
electrical wire is broken. Ask your KOBELCO authorized
dealer for repair.
3.2.13 CHECKING OF AIR CLEANER INLET

• Check that no mud, leaves, and snow, etc. are accumulated around the air cleaner inlet.
• When it is covered with snow, remove it.
• When washing the machine with high-pressure water for cleaning, be careful not to let the water enter the inlet.
3-16
3.3 STARTING ENGINE
WHEN STARTING ENGINE

After making sure that no one is stayed and no obstruction is left around the machine, sound horn and start the
engine.
This machine is equipped with auto idling stop function to save the fuel consumption and exhaust gas at the time
when the engine is stopping.
• When auto idling switch is on, if the engine is running the engine stops after an elapse of the specified time from
when the safety lock lever is pulled up.
• After the auto idling stops, when necessary to restart the engine, start the engine after returning the starter key
switch to ACC or OFF once and the throttle potentiometer to the low idling position. But it is impossible to start
the engine again until the buzzer stops sounding after the engine stops.
• When necessary to leave from the operator seat for a long time, turn starter key switch off.
• When the engine coolant temperature error is displayed on the gauge cluster, the auto idling does not function
even if the auto idling switch is on.
3
• Do not hold the starter key switch in the START position for more than 15 seconds. If the engine does not start,
return the starter key switch to the OFF position, wait 30 seconds, and then try it again.
• When starting engine, if warning is displayed on the multi-display, stop engine immediately and identify the
cause, and then repair it if necessary.
3.3.1 START-UP UNDER NORMAL TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS

1. Make sure pilot control shut-off lever (1) is in the
"LOCKED" position. 1
A
A: "LOCKED" position
B: "UNLOCKED" position
2. Make sure all control levers are set to the
"NEUTRAL" positions.
3-17
3. Turn engine throttle (2) to the low idle position.

4. Turn the key of starter switch (3) to the "ON" position
and check the operation status of the multi-display.
5. Turn the key of starter switch (3) to the "START"
position to start the engine. 3
6. Release your hand from key (3) immediately after

the engine starts. The starter key will return to the
"ON" position by itself.
3-18
3.3.2 START UP IN COLD CONDITIONS

In cold weather, due to increase in oil viscosity (hardens) and decrease in battery performance, starting the engine
may be difficult.
For the engine start up procedures with the automatic warming-up system, see "USER MENU SETTING" in
Chapter 2.
1. Make sure pilot control shut-off lever (1) is in the

"LOCKED" position. 1
A
A: "LOCKED" position
B: "UNLOCKED" position
2. Make sure all control levers are set to the
"NEUTRAL" positions.
3. Turn engine throttle (2) to the low idle position.

4. Turn the key of starter switch (3) to the "ON" position 3
and hold the position.
When the coolant temperature decreases below 10
degrees C, the glow plug is preheated automatically
3
by the engine coolant temperature sensing.
5. Check the operation status of the multi-display.

6. After having completed the preheating (within five
seconds), turn the key of starter switch (3) to the
S
"START" position to start the engine. 12h
7. Release your hand from key (3) immediately after

the engine starts. The starter key will return to the
"ON" position by itself.
3-19
3.3.3 USING JUMPER CABLES
STARTING ENGINE BY JUMPER CABLES
• Combustible gas (hydrogen gas) is generated in the battery. Do not allow sparks or flames to come in contact
with the battery to avoid catching a fire and triggering an explosion.
• Do not allow the normal machine to come in contact with the disabled one.
• Wear protective glasses and rubber gloves when using jumper cables to start the engine.
• Never allow the positive and negative side clips of the jumper cables to come in contact with each other when
connecting the jumper cables.
• Do not mistake positive (+) for negative (-) or vice versa in the jumper cable connection. When the negative
jumper cable is finally connected to the upper structure of the disabled machine, it may generate sparks.
Connect the jumper cable to a ground surface as far as possible from the battery.
• If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not attempt to start the engine with another power supply.
• Wrong connection of the jumper cables may cause explosion of the battery.
• The starting system of this machine is 24 volts. Therefore the boost battery voltage in use should be 24 volts.
The application of high voltage employed for a welding machine, etc. in engine start may cause damage to the
electrical system.
• Use the battery of which the capacity is equivalent to that of the disabled machine for the normal machine.
• Select the jumper cables and clips with a proper size for the battery.
• Check the jumper cables and clips for damage and corrosion.
• Connect the clip securely.
• Check that the control lock lever is in the "LOCKED" position.
• Check that each control lever is returned to the neutral position.
• The starter switches on both the normal and disabled machines must be held in the "OFF" position. Because
when the power is connected, it may cause unexpected move of the machines and it is dangerous.
1. Put the attachment on the ground, return all control

levers to the neutral position and then set the control Order of connecting the cable
lock lever to the "LOCKED" position. Order of removing the cable
2. Set the starter switch to the "OFF" position for both (Red)
the normal machine and the disabled machine.
3. Remove the terminal cover of the battery, and
connect the jumper cable (red) clip to the positive
(+) terminal on the battery of the disabled machine.
4. Connect the jumper cable (red) clip to the positive
(+) terminal on the battery of the normal machine. Normal machine Disabled machine
5. Connect the jumper cable (black) clip to the (Black)
negative (-) terminal on the battery of the normal To the upper structure frame of
machine. the disabled machine
6. Finally, connect the clip of the other end of the
negative (-) jumper cable (black) to the upper structure frame of the disabled machine.
7. Start the engine of the normal machine, and run it for about 10 minutes at high idle.
The battery of the disabled machine is partially charged.
8. Start the engine of the disabled machine.
3-20
9. Soon after the starting of the engine of the disabled machine, immediately remove the jumper cables in the
reverse order of the connection.
10. Finally, check and repair the cause of the problem of the start/charging system on the disabled machine.
3-21
3.4 STOPPING MACHINE ENGINE
Before stopping the engine, perform standby operation by setting engine throttle (1) to the low idle position and
running the engine for about 5 minutes, and then stop the engine.
1. Except for special cases, place the attachment on

the ground before stopping the engine.
2. Pull up the pilot control shut-off lever to the
"LOCKED" position.
3. Turn engine throttle (1) to the low idle position and 2
perform standby operation by running the engine for
about 5 minutes.
4. Turn starter key (2) to the "OFF" position to stop the
engine.
5. Remove starter key (2) and store it. 1
3-22
3.5 CHECK AFTER STARTING ENGINE

Before operation, be sure to inspect and check the machine after starting the engine. If any failures are found,
3.5.1 CHECK OF PILOT CONTROL SHUT-OFF LEVER

Check that the locking function of the pilot control shut-off lever is proper.
See "PILOT CONTROL SHUT-OFF LEVER" in Chapter 2.
1. Move the pilot control shut-off lever to the
"LOCKED" position. A
2. Make sure that the attachment is not operated and

swing and travel operations are not performed even
though each of control levers and pedals is
operated. B
3-23
3.5.2 CHECK OF ENGINE AND MULTI-DISPLAY

1. Check that no warnings are displayed and the
indicators of engine coolant temperature meter (1)
and fuel level meter (2) are in the proper range on S
the multi-display. 12h 2
1
When the warning is displayed on the multi-display, ask your KOBELCO authorized dealer for inspection.
2. Check the areas around the engine for oil leakage and water leakage.
When standing up from the operator’s seat, be careful about handling of the pilot control shut-off lever.
CONTROL OF LEVERS
• Before operation, be sure to pay attention to the safety of the surroundings and operate each lever slowly to fully
make sure that the machine movement is in accordance with the control pattern indicated on the control pattern
label.
• If you operate the machine while the control pattern label does not match the actual machine movement, it may
cause severe personal injury.
• When the label does not match the actual machine movement, replace them with a proper one.
• When stopping swing operation, stop it earlier than your intended position by taking the swing distance after
returning the swing lever to the neutral position into account.
INSPECTION OF ENGINE
When inspecting the engine, do not stretch out your hand to rotating parts and hot parts. It can catch your hand or
cause burns, resulting in serious injury.
3. Check that the exhaust sound, the color of exhaust gas and vibrations of the engine are normal.
Color classification for identifying the exhaust gas state (After warming-up at no load)
Colorless or light blue: Normal (Perfect combustion)
Black: Abnormal (failure of exhaust gas cleaning device)
White: Abnormal (failure of exhaust gas cleaning device)
The smoke may look white in winter due to cold weather.
3-24
3.6 WARMING-UP
ABOUT WARNING-UP
• The proper hydraulic oil temperature for this machine is about 50 degrees C. When the hydraulic oil temperature
is 25 degrees C or below, rapid operations may cause severe damage to the hydraulic components. Before
starting the operation, warm the hydraulic oil to 25 degrees C or above.
• If the attachment/equipment is operated without enough warming-up operation, the response of the attachment
to the control lever is delayed and sometimes it moves in an unexpected manner for the operator. Therefore, be
sure to perform the warm-up operation. Especially in cold weather, a sufficient warming-up operation is
necessary.
In warning-up the engine, turn auto idling stop function switch OFF.
For the engine start up procedures with the automatic warming-up system, see "USER MENU SETTING" in
Chapter 2.
3
3.6.1 ENGINE WARMING-UP
Avoid idling because it may cause poor engine performance and trouble.
1. Run the engine for about 5 minutes with no load at

middle speed by setting engine throttle (1) to the
middle between the low idle and the full speed
H
LO
I
positions.
3-25
2. When the pointer of engine coolant temperature

meter (2) moves and points somewhere in the white
range, the warming-up operation of the engine is 2 S
K
completed.
3.6.2 WARMING-UP HYDRAULIC OIL

1. Push pilot control shut-off lever (1) down and
forward and set it at the "UNLOCKED" position.
A
2. Raise the boom to the height where the bucket can
be operated.
3. Move the right control lever slowly toward bucket

digging side (C) to the stroke end position and
perform relief operation for about 2 minutes.
4. After that, slowly extend and retract each cylinder
several times and circulate the warm hydraulic oil in
all operation circuits.
5. When the warming-up is not enough, perform the
relief operation at bucket digging side (C) for
another 2 minutes, and after that, extend and retract C
each cylinder several times, and circulate the warm
hydraulic oil in all operation circuits.
6. Also perform swing and traveling operations slowly
to circulate the warm hydraulic oil.
3-26
3.7 AUTO IDLING STOP FUNCTION
• If you would like to perform warming-up of the engine, operate the air conditioner, or use the working light
continuously with the pilot control shut-off lever in the "LOCKED" position, turn the auto idle stop function "OFF".
With the auto idle stop function turned “ON”, the engine stops, so that the function stops.
• When the failure warning of "engine coolant temperature" or "coolant level” appears, or auto warming-up is
working, the auto idle stop function does not work regardless whether the auto idle stop function turns "ON" or
"OFF".
• Do not use auto idling stop mode when lifting.
This switch is usually set to "OFF". When the auto idling

stop function is selected, the engine stops automatically 1
after an elapse of the specified time with the safety lock A
lever (1) set to "LOCKED" position (A) during engine
operation. This function is effective in saving of fuel and
in restraint of exhaust gas by setting auto idling stop
function.
B
3
• After setting safety lock lever to "LOCKED" position (A), the engine changes to "DECEL" speed about 4 seconds
later.
• Buzzer sounds for 5 seconds before engine stops.
3.7.1 RESTART AFTER AUTO IDLE STOP
When leaving the operator’s seat for a long time, be sure to set the starter switch to the "OFF" position.
1. Check that the buzzer stops.

2. Turn the engine throttle to the low idle position.
3. Return the key of the starter switch to "ACC" or "OFF" once and then restart the machine.
3-27
3.8 SELECTION OF WORK MODE

Press work mode select switch (1) to switch between
three modes in the order of "S", "E" and "H".
Select a proper work mode according to the work
H
condition and purpose. 12h
The selected work mode is displayed on the left upper

corner of the multi-display.
The work mode after the engine start always starts from the "S" mode.
S mode:
S
"S mode" is suitable for a standard digging work and K
loading operations. It provides good fuel consumption

and is well-balanced with a workload.
E mode:
E
"ECO mode" focuses on alow fuel consumption K
operation.
H mode:
H
"H mode" is suitable for a heavy digging work, which K
provides high speed and gives priority to a workload.
3-28
3.9 SWITCHING ATTACHMENT MODE

Use the attachment mode select switch to switch between the "Bucket", "Nibbler", and "Breaker" modes.
Select an appropriate mode according to the three types of the attachment: "Bucket", "Nibbler", or "Breaker"
modes. Before operation, always check that the attachment mode is appropriately set.
Attachment
Switch Condition Multi-Display Indication Selection of Attachment
Mode
S 12:15 The breaker symbol
appears. Select this mode when
Breaker mode The work mode of the attachment like a
"S", "E", or "H" is shown breaker requires the single
upper left. flow circuit.
S 12:15
The nibbler symbol
Nibbler mode The work mode of using the attachment with
"S", "E", or "H" is shown a flow and return circuit like
upper left. a nibbler (crusher).
S 12:15
The bucket symbol
Bucket mode The work mode of
digging.
"S", "E", or "H" is shown
upper left.
For the description of attachment and hydraulic circuit, see Chapter 8 "OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT".
3
• When working with a hydraulic breaker or nibbler (crusher) installed, be sure to check that an appropriate
attachment mode is selected, by seeing the attachment mode select switch and the multi-display.
mode.
• When performing breaker work, be sure to select the breaker mode. Working in a mode other than the breaker
mode causes damage in the hydraulic components and/or breaker.
particular, switching to the breaker mode during nibbler (crusher) work may cause a holding load to fall off.
not proper.
3-29
3.10 MACHINE OPERATION

The machine operation procedures described below provide operators with basics which should be learned
thoroughly. You can further improve your operational skill by throughly learning the performance and structure of
this machine.
3.10.1 PRECAUTIONS OF MACHINE OPERATION
WHEN OPERATING MACHINE
• When starting the machine, check the safety around the machine and sound the horn before starting the
machine.
• Keep the area around the machine clear of people.
• When the control lever is operated during the auto acceleration operation, the engine speed increases abruptly.
Operate the control lever carefully.
• The indications on the multi-display do not assure the condition of the devices. Daily maintenance should be
performed not only by seeing the multi-display but also by following the procedures described in this manual.
• When abnormality was detected during operation, stop the machine immediately and take proper measures.
• The machine should not be operated until the failure is repaired. Operating the machine with the failure that has
not been repaired may result in a serious accidents.
FRONT/REAR AND LEFT/RIGHT OF MACHINE

In this manual, front/rear and left/right are determined by
Front
looking the forward direction from the operator's seat
with the travel motors at the rear side.
Right
Left Rear
Tra ve l motor
3-30
3.10.2 TRAVEL PROCEDURES
ABOUT TRAVELING
• Confirm the travel motor position before traveling. When the travel motor is positioned at the front side, the travel
lever operation reverses.
The normal travel control can be performed when the travel motor is at the rear side of the machine and the front
idler is at the front side of the machine.
• Sound the horn to warn the workers in the working site.
ABOUT TRAVEL SPEED

During traveling, do not change the travel speed. Also, the travel speed should be set to the LOW (1st) speed when
the machine is traveling on a downhill, or being loaded to/unloaded from a trailer. A sudden change of the machine
stability could cause personal injury.
Before starting traveling operation move the control lock

lever to "UNLOCKED position" and set the bucket at the F N
height of 30 to 40 cm above the ground.
F: Forward traveling R
N: Neutral (Stop)
R: Backward traveling 3
Forward/Reverse traveling
• Push (forward) or pull (backward) both the left and
right travel levers simultaneously.
Both the forward and reverse travel speed can be
changed by lever displacement.
3-31
Pivot turn
This operation drives only one crawler to turn the machine.
• Operate one of the two travel levers to make a pivot
turn.
Spin turn
This drives the right and left crawlers in opposite direction each other to turn the machine on the spot.
• Push one of the two travel levers forward and pull
the other lever backward simultaneously.
STOP TRAVELING
ABOUT STOP TRAVELING

Do not stop the machine suddenly, but stop it after slow down the speed as much as possible.
• Put both travel levers (1) in the "NEUTRAL (N)"

position.
The machine stops traveling. N
3-32
3.10.3 CHANGING TRAVEL SPEED (1ST AND 2ND)
ABOUT TRAVEL SPEED

During traveling, do not change the travel speed. Also, the travel speed should be set to the LOW (1st) speed when
the machine is traveling on a downhill, or being loaded to/unloaded from a trailer. A sudden change of the machine
stability could cause personal injury.
Using the travel speed select switch (1), switch between the HIGH (2nd) and LOW (1st) travel speed.
Every time the switch is pressed, the mode changes as follows: Turtle (1st) -> Rabbit (2nd) -> Turtle (1st) -> Rabbit
(2nd).
At the time of engine start, it is automatically set to the LOW (1st) speed.
When traveling at the LOW (1st) speed, the turtle (1st) is
displayed, and when traveling at the HIGH (2nd) speed,
the rabbit (2nd) is displayed on the multi-display.
H
12h
3
1
3-33
3.10.4 MACHINE OPERATION IN WATER OR ON SOFT GROUND
Take enough care not to immerse the swing bearing, swing pinion and swivel joint into water or soil. When the
machine is sunk to the level of or above the swing bearing in the water or soil, the swing bearing and others may be
worn abnormally if it is used without any treatment. Apply grease to the greasing points.
• If the bottom of a river is flat and it flows slowly, the

machine can travel in the water up to the depth of the
center of upper roller (A).
• When crossing a river, carefully cross the river while
checking the condition of the river bottom by the
bucket, etc. Never enter the water over the depth of
(A).
• On a soft ground, the machine may sink gradually.
(A)
Pay attention to the travel system and the water depth
all the time.
• After traveling in seawater, wash the machine
carefully to remove salt.
• On parts soaked in the water for a long time, use a grease gun to apply grease securely, until the old grease
comes out from the inside.
A:620mm
3-34
3.10.5 GETTING OUT OF SOFT GROUND

Avoid traveling on a soft ground if possible.
Be careful not to get stuck in mud. In case of being stuck in the mud, get out of it using the procedure below.
WHEN ONE SIDE OF MACHINE GETS STUCK IN SOFT GROUND

• When one side of the machine gets stuck in the soft
ground, push the bottom of the bucket against a
plank or others laid on the ground to lift up the stuck
shoe, and put logs or lumbers beneath the crawler
belt to escape from the soft ground.
When using the boom and arm to lift up the machine, push the bottom of the bucket, not the teeth, against the
ground.
3
WHEN BOTH SIDES OF MACHINE GET STUCK IN SOFT GROUND
Operate the machine at the operator's seat. Keep the area around the machine clear of people.
1. When both sides of the crawlers get stuck in the

mud and the machine does not move due to slip, put
logs or lumbers as described above, wedge the front
part of the bucket into the ground, pull the arm just
like digging, push the travel levers forward, traveling
and pull out the machine.
2. If the machine cannot travel due to highly tensed

crawlers caused by clogged mud and gravel in the
crawlers after traveling on the soft ground, lift each
crawler off the ground by pushing the boom and arm
against the ground and shake the mud or gravel off
the crawler, and then get out of the soft ground.
Gravel, or mud clogged in the crawler can be
shaken off by lifting the crawler up and moving it
forward and backward.
3-35
3.10.6 SWING AND ATTACHMENT/EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS

The following is the explanation of operation of the standard attachment/equipment. As to the machine equipped
with a special attachment, read the operation manual of the special attachment, too.
ABOUT THE USE OF THIS MACHINE

To operate this machine, fully read the safety precautions of this manual and understand them thoroughly.
BOOM OPERATION
To operate the boom, move the right control lever forward and backward. Speed of the boom is controlled by the
displacement of the control lever.
• A: Pull the right control lever backward to move the
boom up.
• B: Push the right control lever forward to move the
boom down.
• Return the right control lever to the neutral (center)
position to stop the boom. A B
ARM OPERATION
To operate the arm, move the left control lever forward and backward. Speed of the arm is controlled by the
• A: Pull the left control lever backward to move the arm
closer to the cab (Arm in).
• B: Push the left control lever forward to move the arm
forward and away from the cab (Arm out).
• Return the left control lever to the neutral (center)
position to stop the arm. A
B
3-36
BUCKET OPERATION
BUCKET INTERFERENCE
Check clearance between the attachment and the operator's station before starting operation because a certain
kinds of attachment and combination of the options installed on the base machine may cause the attachment to
interfere with the operator's station or other parts of the machine. Check for interference before operation.
To operate the bucket, move the right control lever left and right. Speed of the bucket is controlled by the
• A: Move the right control lever left to move the bucket
to the digging side.
• B: Move the right control lever right to move the
bucket to the dumping side.
• Return the right control lever to the neutral (center)
A
position to stop the bucket.
B
3-37
SWING OPERATION
PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT DANGER IN SWINGING

Make sure that the swing area and the surroundings are clear of obstacles and people before beginning operation.
Sound the horn or send signals to warn people before starting to operate the machine.
To perform the swing operation, move the left control lever left and right. Speed of the swinging is controlled by the
• A: Move the left control lever left to swing the machine
left.
• B: Move the left control lever right to swing the
machine right.
• Return the left control lever to the neutral (center) A
position to stop the swinging.
3-38
3.11 WORK PROCEDURES OF MACHINE

3.11.1 DIGGING WORK
For digging work, mainly the arm crowding force is used, and the bucket scooping force may be used if necessary.
• When a strong digging force is required, dig slowly
while keeping the crossing angle of the boom and
the arm at 90 to 110 degrees.
When lowering the boom, avoid rapid operations.
Especially, urgent stop during boom "DOWN" has a
great impact on the machine, resulting in adverse
effects on parts.
B
• Point the bucket tooth tips to the digging direction
A
(A) as much as possible, and dig with the bucket
positioned at shallow depth (B) and with full stroke.
This will reduce the digging resistance and damage
to the tooth tips.
• If soil does not fall out easily, set the bucket in the bucket out position and move the bucket a few times by the
control lever.
Never extend and retract the boom cylinder repeatedly while the arm cylinder is fully extended to fall out the
soil.
• When digging a wide trench, dig both sides of it first
and dig the center last.
To improve the efficiency, attach a bucket suitable
3
for trenching and place the crawlers parallel (C) to
the trench to dig.
3.11.2 LOADING WORK

• Place a dump truck on where the operator can
easily see it and the swing angle is smaller. By this,
loading work can be performed efficiently.
Loading from the rear side of the dump truck is
easier and more soil can be loaded compared with
loading from the side of the dump truck.
3-39
3.12 ALWAYS PARK MACHINE PROPERLY

1. Travel machine to a safe location on firm, level
ground.
2. Lower the attachment to the ground.
ground.
position.
position.
3.12.1 PARKING MACHINE ON SLOPE

If the machine must be parked on a slope.
1. The undercarriage and the upper structure and the
attachment/equipment must face downhill.
2. Lower the attachment into the ground. If equipped
with a bucket, dig the bucket into the ground.
ground.
position.
position.
7. Block the tracks in the front and the rear.
3-40
3.13 INSPECTION AND CHECK AFTER OPERATION

Check the engine coolant temperature, engine oil pressure and fuel level on the multi-display.
• If there is the engine coolant temperature or the
engine oil pressure warning display, move the
machine to a safe place and stop the engine
S
immediately. Then repair the machine according to 12h
"INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE CHART" in

Chapter 4.
• Check oil and water leakage, the attachment/
equipment, the exterior parts, and the travel system
components. If leakage or damage is found, repair it
immediately according to "INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE CHART" in Chapter 4.
• Refuel the tank to the maximum. Refuel the tank to the maximum after finishing work for a day. Be careful not to
refuel the tank to a level more than necessary (to the top end the tank). There is a possibility of overflowing
because the fuel expands as the outside air temperature rises.
• Remove mud, etc., stuck to the travel system components.
3-41
3.14 MACHINE OPERATION IN ADVERSE CONDITIONS

3.14.1 OPERATION IN COLD CONDITION
When the ambient temperature is low, starting the engine may be difficult due to decrease of oil liquidity, and the
radiator may be damaged due to coolant freezing.
FUEL/OIL
Use good low-viscosity fuel/oil for each device. For the optimum viscosity, see "LUBRICANT, FUEL & COOLANT
SPECIFICATIONS" in Chapter 4.
COOLANT
When operating or storing the machine in cold climates, the additive rate of the cooling system should match the
expected minimum outdoor temperature.
If the coolant is frozen, it may cause damage to the radiator, cylinder block and cylinder head. When being shipped
from the factory, "Long Life Coolant" is used to prevent rust and freezing of the cooling system.
When operating or storing the machine in extreme cold, check the coolant frequently to keep an appropriate
concentration. For the concentration of coolant, see "LUBRICANT, FUEL & COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS" in
Chapter 4.
This machine uses a non-amine type long life coolant.
BATTERY
When the ambient temperature is low, the battery capacity may decrease and the battery electrolyte may freeze.
Charge the battery full earlier than the specified interval and pay full attention to thermal insulation by covering the
battery.
When leaving the machine outdoors overnight, it is recommended to remove the battery and store it in a warm
room.
Measure the specific gravity of battery electrolyte after its temperature becomes almost the same as the outdoor
temperature, instead of immediately after operation. The charging rate can be calculated roughly by measuring the
specific gravity and using the table below.
Specific Gravity of Battery Electrolyte
Battery electrolyte temperature

Charging rate
-20 degrees C 0 degrees C 20 degrees C
100% 1.31 1.29 1.28

90% 1.29 1.28 1.26
80% 1.28 1.26 1.25
75% 1.27 1.25 1.24
AFTER OPERATION
To prevent malfunctions of the travel system components due to freezing of mud and water stuck to them, follow the
precautions below.
• Remove mud and water stuck to the machine sufficiently. Especially, be sure to drain off the water from the travel
system, and then park the machine on a dry and firm ground to prevent the travel system from freezing.
3-42
• Wipe the cylinder rod completely. If frozen mud or water is stuck to the cylinder rod surfaces, the seal may be
damaged when retracting the cylinder. Retract each cylinder to the minimum size to minimize the exposed area
of the rod.
For the storing position, see "PRECAUTIONS FOR LONG-TERM STORAGE" in Chapter 3.
3.14.2 OPERATION AT SEASHORE

After operation, wash the machine carefully to remove salt, and apply anti-rust treatments with oil and grease, if
necessary.
3.14.3 OPERATION IN SANDY AND DUSTY AREAS

• Clean and change the air cleaner element earlier than the specified interval.
• Clean the radiator earlier than the specified interval to prevent the radiator core from being clogged with dust.
• Be careful to prevent dust entering when refueling, and refilling oils. Inspect the filter element earlier than the
specified interval.
• Especially, clean the starter and alternator earlier than the specified interval to prevent deposit of dust on them.
3-43
3.15 PRECAUTIONS FOR LONG-TERM STORAGE

When storing the machine for a long period (one month or longer), maintain the machine with attention to the
following points, to prevent decrease in function at the next operation.
3.15.1 WASHING MACHINE

Wash the machine thoroughly, inspect and maintain the travel system components and apply touch-up to the
peeling paint and scratches. Apply grease to the greasing points.
When washing the machine, cover the CPU and the electric components to prevent water or steam from splashing
on or contacting with them.
3.15.2 REFILLING OIL/GREASING

Check the level and contamination of the fuel and hydraulic oil. Refill the oil if the level is low, and replace the oil if
the oil is contaminated.
• To prevent condensation in the fuel tank, supply new clean fuel fully to the upper limit.
• Apply a sufficient quantity of anti-rust oil to any parts which rust easily, especially to the exposed area of each
cylinder piston rod.
3.15.3 BATTERY
• To compensate the self-discharge during storage, perform auxiliary charge at least once a month.
• Confirm that the battery power-off switch is set to the "OFF" position to cut off the current.
• Remove the negative (-) terminal from the battery, and remove the battery from the machine for storage.
Be careful not to connect the negative (-) terminal of the battery to the body (ground terminal) with a tool when
removing the battery. It will cause short circuit even when the battery power-off switch is set to "OFF".
Before turning the battery power-off switch to the "O (OFF)" position or removing the terminal of the battery, turn the
starter switch to the "OFF" position and wait 5 minutes or more.
When turning off the battery power-off switch immediately after the engine is stopped, the exhaust gas cleaning
device may be damaged.
3.15.4 COOLANT
If there is a possibility of freezing, mix the antifreeze (non-amine type) into the radiator.
However, normally it is not necessary because long life coolant is already mixed at the time of shipment. See
"LUBRICANT, FUEL & COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS" in Chapter 4.
3-44
3.15.5 PREVENTION OF DUST AND MOISTURE
Store the machine in a dry indoor location. If you place the machine outside unavoidably, lay lumbers on a flat
ground and cover the machine with a sheet. Especially, cover the muffler, hydraulic oil tank breather, fuel tank cap,
and swing motor level gauge.
To protect the exposed part of the rod, fully retract the arm and bucket cylinders, be sure to place the bucket on the
ground and chock the crawlers.
3.15.6 PERIODICAL LUBRICATING OPERATION (DURING STORAGE)

Once a month, start the engine to operate the machine and also move the working devices to supply the hydraulic
oil to each part. If the oil film shortage occurs on parts and rust is formed on parts, it may cause abnormal wear at
the next operation.
To supply the hydraulic oil to every part of the machine, perform the lubricating operation for about 1 hour.
3
• Check the engine oil level and coolant level before starting the engine. Refill engine oil or coolant if its level is
low.
• Wipe off the anti-rust oil from the cylinder rods. After the lubricating operation, apply the anti-rust oil again.
• After starting the engine, fully warm-up the machine and repeat the traveling, swing and digging operations
several times to prevent lubricant oil film shortage.
• If the machine is stored indoors, adequate ventilation is required during warming-up.
3.15.7 TREATMENT AFTER LONG-TERM STORAGE

When starting to use the machine after a long-term suspension, perform the following treatments.
• Loosen the plugs of the travel reduction unit and swing reduction unit and remove the dust and water which
deposited during the long-term storage.
• Lubricant gets deteriorated while the machine is not in use. Use extreme caution when starting to use the
machine at the next time.
• Check the deterioration of the hydraulic hoses carefully after the long-term storage. Replace the deteriorated
hoses.
• Wipe off the anti-rust oil from the cylinder rods.
• Refill oil and grease to all necessary parts.
• Check the engine oil level and coolant level before starting the engine. Refill engine oil or coolant if its level is
low.
• After starting the engine, fully warm-up the machine and repeat the traveling, swing and digging operations
several times to prevent hydraulic oil film shortage.
• If the machine is stored indoors, adequate ventilation is required during warming-up.
3-45
3-46
［4. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE］
4. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
4-1
4-2
4.1 GENERAL
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ON THE MACHINE

Thoroughly read and understand the safety precautions contained in this manual before performing any inspection
or service procedures on systems or components of this machine.
• Regular inspection and maintenance enable this

machine to achieve the full function and extend the
service life of each part.
• The information contained in this chapter gives the
proper procedures for performing inspection and
maintenance functions for this machine. Use these
procedures when performing inspection and
maintenance as they will guide the technician step by
step for each procedure. Also, see "INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE CHART" for general service
interval recommendations.
• As a general rule, the period of the lubrication and
maintenance is determined by the hour meter. If the
hour meter reading matches roughly with the calendar
day, and if you would like to schedule them based on
the calendar day, take whichever comes first. For
items which do not have a certain service time, see
"WHEN REQUIRED".
"INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE CHART" provided in this chapter gives general time intervals. Operation in
sites under hostile work conditions or with a lot of dust and moisture may need more frequent lubrication and
maintenance than the service times specified there.
• Use only specified oils, fluids, lubricants, filters and replacement parts to keep machine in optimum operating
condition. Use the oils and greases with the specified viscosity depending on the ambient temperature. Store
containers of oils, fluids and grease indoors in an appropriate location. This will prevent contamination from dust,
and water, etc.
4-3
4.2 INSPECTING AND MAINTAING MACHINE

4.2.1 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Regular inspection and maintenance enable this machine to achieve the full function and extend the service life of
each part. As a general rule, the period of the lubrication and maintenance is determined by the hour meter. If the
hour meter reading matches roughly with the calendar day, and if you would like to schedule them based on the
calendar day, take whichever comes first. For items which do not have a certain service time, see "WHEN
REQUIRED". Also, operation in sites under hostile work conditions or with a lot of dust and moisture may need
more frequent lubrication and maintenance than the service times specified there.
4-4
4.2.2 PRECAUTIONS OF INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Use inspection and maintenance procedures described in this manual. Park the machine on a level and firm ground
before inspection and maintenance.
For the adjustment, disassembling and repair of the engine, reduction unit, hydraulic component and electronic
devices (controller, etc.), contact your KOBECO authorized dealer.
STOP THE ENGINE BEFORE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Be sure to stop the engine before inspection and maintenance of the engine. Inspecting and maintaining the
running engine may cause injury by being caught in the cooling fan or fan belts. When running the engine is
unavoidable during the inspection or maintenance, it should be done by at least two persons with the condition that
one person can stop the engine at any time and they are communicating with each other.
PUT THE WARNING TAGS

Put the tags "DO NOT START ENGINE!", "DO NOT OPERATE" and "UNDER INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE" on
noticeable places such as around the operator's seat as well as the starter switch or control levers before
inspection and maintenance.
USE OUR GENUINE PARTS

• For replacement of parts, grease and oil, be sure to use KOBELCO genuine parts. Use grease and oil with the
specified viscosity depending on the ambient temperature.
• Store containers of greases and oils in a clean room to keep them away from dust and water.
KEEP OUT DUST

Attach a plug or cap to the lubrication hole of a removed hydraulic hose or hydraulic component to keep out foreign
materials.
INSPECT DRAIN OIL AND FILTERS

4
When replacing oil or filter, check the drain oil or old filter for metallic powder or other foreign materials mixed.
Contact the person in charge and take appropriate measures if any foreign materials are found.
HANDLING OF WASTE OIL AND ANTIFREEZE

Be sure to drain waste oil and antifreeze in containers and ask a public service company for disposal of them as the
industrial waste.
CLEAN THE SEALING SURFACE

After removing the O-ring or gasket seal, clean the sealing surface to replace it with a new one.
Apply thin oil to the O-ring or seal and attach it into the groove correctly.
DO NOT MIX OILS

Never mix different kinds of oil. When using another kind of oil, replace the total amount of old oil.
CLEAN AND REPLACE RADIATOR CAP

• The radiator cap is an important part which pressurizes coolant to avoid overheat.
• Remove any dirt or water scale adhered on the gasket surface.
• It is not capable of pressurizing due to steam leakage if an aged groove on the gasket surface is created.
Replace it with a new one.
• Replacing it every year is a rough guideline.
4-5
4.3 EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE

4.3.1 ABOUT EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE
The exhaust gas cleaning device purifies exhaust gas emitted from the engine, using the catalyst.
After a certain amount of time has passed, the exhaust gas cleaning device enters the mode to regenerate the
catalyst.
This mode brings a poor catalyst performance back to a proper performance. It is called "regeneration".
Be sure to comply with the following to prevent failure.
After a certain amount of time has passed, the exhaust gas cleaning device starts regeneration of the catalyst
automatically according to the operating conditions. This keeps the purification ability of the catalyst in good
condition at all times. For details, see "ABOUT AUTOMATIC REGENERATION".
4.3.2 ABOUT AUTOMATIC REGENERATION

If an exhaust temperature is high after a certain amount
of time has passed, the exhaust gas cleaning device
automatically enters the mode to regenerate the catalyst. S
12h
At this time, the indication of regenerating is displayed
on the multi-display. 1
After the regeneration is completed, this indication
disappears and the machine returns to a normal
condition automatically.
Immediately after the machine operation and during the regeneration, the temperature around the exhaust pipe and
muffler and of the exhaust gas are very high. Putting any combustible materials close to these hot parts causes a
fire. Touching hot exhaust gas may cause burns.
In some operating conditions, the automatic regeneration is not completed and the warning requesting the user to
perform manual regeneration is displayed on the multi-display. In this case, perform the manual regeneration,
referring the next Paragraph "ABOUT MANUAL REGENERATION".
In the following operations, the automatic regeneration may be difficult to complete.

• When there are a lot of standby operations and operations at a low speed of engine
• When the engine is started and stopped frequently
• When the operation is performed in an extremely cold place
• When there are many low-load operations
• When the engine is operated and stopped while it is still not warm
Even though a certain amount of time has not passed, sometimes the display shown above can appear.
4-6
4.3.3 ABOUT MANUAL REGENERATION
When this warning is displayed on the multi-display, perform manual regeneration immediately.
• The exhaust gas cleaning device starts the automatic regeneration after a certain amount of time has passed,
but it may not be completed in some operating conditions.
When the automatic regeneration is not completed and a certain amount of time has passed, the above warning
is displayed and the warning sounds. In that case, perform the manual regeneration in the following procedures.
• When the manual regeneration is not performed, the exhaust gas cleaning device fails and the engine speed is
restricted. To restore the exhaust gas cleaning device, the machine needs to be repaired at our service factory.
OPERATION METHOD
• Immediately after the machine operation and during the regeneration, the temperature around the exhaust pipe
and muffler and of the exhaust gas are very high. Putting any combustible materials close to these hot parts
causes a fire. Touching hot exhaust gas may cause burns.
1. Move the machine to a safe place.

2. Place the machine in the parking position and move the pilot control shut-off lever to the "LOCKED" position.
3. Press manual regeneration switch (1).
Indication of regenerating (2) is displayed on the
multi-display. The engine speed is fixed and the
machine enters the mode for regeneration. 4
4. When indication (2) goes off, the manual
regeneration is completed.
When the engine is stopped during the manual
regeneration or when the pilot control shut-off lever
is set to the "UNLOCKED" position, the regeneration
is paused. 1
In that case, perform the manual regeneration
again.
S
12h
2
4-7
• It takes about 10 to 20 minutes to complete the manual regeneration.

• Regeneration is performed by increasing the temperature inside the muffler to a certain level. Therefore, the
process completes faster if it is performed immediately after operation, when the temperature inside the muffler
is high.
• It may take more than 20 minutes for combustion when the engine is cool because warming-up is needed before
combustion.
4.3.4 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

• Inspection interval: Every 1,000 hours (or every 1 year)
You need to check the body of the exhaust gas cleaning device for damage, including the sensor cables
attached to the body. If failures are found during inspection, replace the failure parts immediately.
For inspection and replacement, contact KOBELCO or your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
• Check that no clogging occurs in the pipe. (Apply compressed air from the end of the pipe and check that air
goes through.)
When the differential pressure pipe becomes clogged, the differential pressure sensor does not work, resulting in
cause of failure.
• The inspection and maintenance are needed every 2 years for the body of the exhaust gas cleaning device and
the sensor cables and hoses attached to the body, and the mount. For inspection and maintenance, contact
KOBELCO or your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
4.3.5 PRECAUTIONS OF USING EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE

USE SPECIFIED FUEL ONLY
Use the specified fuel described in "LUBRICANT, FUEL & COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS" in Chapter 4.
If you use fuel other than the specified fuel, it has an adverse effect on the engine and DPF, causing white smoke
and malfunction.
USE RECOMMENDED BRAND ENGINE OIL ONLY
Use the recommended brand engine oil to keep the function of the exhaust gas cleaning device normal for a long
time.
PROHIBITION OF ENGINE PIPE DISASSEMBLY
Do not remove the exhaust pipe or disassemble the muffler and parts around it. This may affect the performance of
exhaust gas cleaning device adversely or break it.
4-8
4.4 SCR SYSTEM AND DEF/ADBLUE

This machine is equipped with SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) system for NOx (nitrogen oxidate) discharge
reduction.
4.4.1 SCR
SCR equipped with this machine reduces NOx in exhaust gas by injecting DEF/AdBlue into the muffler to resolve
NOx in the exhaust gas into water and nitrogen.
4.4.2 DEF/AdBlue
DEF/AdBlue is used for the SCR system on this machine. Use only specified DEF/AdBlue.
• DEF/AdBlue should meet ISO 22241-1 or JIS K2247-1.

• Do not put diesel fuel or water in the DEF/AdBlue tank.
• Follow the precautions for handling DEF/AdBlue specified by the manufacturer.
4.4.3 DEF/AdBlue CIRCUIT AND BATTERY
Before turning the battery power-off switch to the "O (OFF)" position or removing the battery terminals, turn the
starter switch to the OFF position and wait 5 minute or more.
cleaning device.
Even after turning the engine OFF, you may hear running sound of the DEF/AdBlue supply module.
To prevent DEF/AdBlue remaining in the DEF/AdBlue pipe from freezing and drying, DEF/AdBlue is returned to the
tank with the DEF/AdBlue supply module.
4.4.4 STORING DEF/ADBLUE
DEF/AdBlue freezes at - 11 degrees C. The container may be damaged from volume expansion due to freezing.
• DEF/AdBlue should be stored in a place without direct sunlight and with well ventilation, with its container
sealed.
• Do not mix DEF/AdBlue with other chemicals, heat it, or dilute it with water.
4.4.5 PURCHASING DEF/ADBLUE

DEF/AdBlue can be purchased in the following places or confirm where to purchase.
• Gas stations and stores that sell automobile goods.
• DEF/AdBlue manufacturers
• KOBELCO authorized dealer/distributor
4-9
4.4.6 LOW DEF/ADBLUE LEVEL
When the level gauge of the gauge cluster showed Level 2 (yellow), Level 1 (red), or Level 0 (no display), add DEF/
AdBlue promptly until it reaches Level 3 (green) or more.
DEF/AdBlue shortage restricts the engine output.
When the following warnings are displayed in the multi-display, see "CHECKING DEF/ADBLUE LEVEL AND
REFILLING" in Chapter 3 to supply DEF/AdBlue.
Level Warning Display Contents

Displayed with the warning sound when the DEF/AdBlue level gauge
1st Level
is Level 2 (yellow).
Displayed with the warning sound when the DEF/AdBlue level gauge
2nd Level is Level 1 (red). Gradually, a restriction is applied to the engine
output.
Displayed with the continuous warning sound when the DEF/AdBlue

3rd Level level gauge is Level 0 (no display). The engine output is further
restricted than Level 2.
4.4.7 QUALITY PROBLEMS OF DEF/ADBLUE
• Use DEF/AdBlue which meets ISO 22241-1 or JIS K2247-1.

• Do not add diesel fuel or water in the DEF/AdBlue tank.
• Follow the precautions for handling DEF/AdBlue specified by the manufacturer.
When the following warnings are displayed on the multi-display, something other than DEF/AdBlue is in the DEF/
AdBlue tank. See "DRAINING DEF/ADBLUE" in Chapter 4 and "CHECKING DEF/ADBLUE LEVEL AND
REFILING" in Chapter 3 to drain and refill DEF/AdBlue.
When keeping the operation with DEF/AdBlue having a quality problem, the engine output is restricted.
Also, when something else than DEF/AdBlue is put in the tank and the engine is started, the DEF/AdBlue pipes and
the DEF/AdBlue supply module may need to be replaced. In that case, contact our service factory.
LEVEL Warning Display Description
Displayed with the warning sound when the DEF/AdBlue sensor

Level 1
determines the quality problem of DEF/AdBlue.
Displayed with the warning sound when a certain period of time has
Level 2
passed from Level 1. The engine output is gradually restricted.
Displayed with the continuous warning sound when a certain period

Level 3 of time has passed from Level 2. The engine output is further
restricted than Level 2.
When failure of the DEF/AdBlue quality or the exhaust gas cleaning device occurs repeatedly, the warning level
goes up. If another failure or error occurs in a short period of time after the failure of the DEF/AdBlue quality or the
exhaust gas cleaning device is corrected, the warning level starts from Level 3.
4-10
4.4.8 DRAINING DEF/ADBLUE

In case of draining the content of the DEF/AdBlue tank is required like when the warning for abnormal DEF/AdBlue
quality appears, follow the next procedures.
When supplying DEF/AdBlue after draining, the quality of DEF/AdBlue is promptly judged if the starter key switch is
"ON"; however, if it is done while the switch is "OFF", it takes a while to judge its quality after turning the switch
"ON" at the next time.
When the work is done in "OFF", wait for approximately 10 minutes after turning the switch "ON", and check the
warning is not displayed on the gauge cluster.
1. Prepare a container to receive drain DEF/AdBue and cloths to wipe it off.

2. Use the starter key to open the side door on the right side of the machine and hold it with the stay.
Drain cock (1) for drain is provided at the side of the DEF/AdBlue tank.
3. Install drain hose (2) for drain to drain cock (1) and take out the end of the hose to the outside of the
counterweight side door.
Size of hose: Inner diameter 7.5mm
Length 1,100mm (3'7") or more
4. Place a container for drained DEF/AdBlue under drain hose (2).
5. Loosen drain cock (1) and drain the DEF/AdBlue inside the tank.
6. After drain the DEF/AdBlue, tighten drain cock (1) securely.
7. Remove the support stay and close the side door.
8. See "CHECKING DEF/ADBLUE LEVEL AND REFILLING" in Chapter 3 to supply DEF/AdBlue.
9. After the supply, check no warning is displayed on the multi-display.
4-11
4.4.9 FAILURE OF EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE

When the following warnings are displayed on the multi-display, the exhaust gas cleaning device has a failure or an
error.
When keep operating with the exhaust gas cleaning device having a failure or an error, the engine output is
restricted and, in the end, the machine becomes inoperable.
When these warnings are displayed, contact our service factory.
LEVEL Warning Display Description
Failure of NOx exhaust

control system
P204 F (Error code is example)
Failure of DEF/AdBlue Displayed with the warning sound when

Level 1 dosing module a device or sensor has a failure or an
P204 F (Error code is example) error.
Failure of EGR valve

(Error code is example)
P 1459

control system
Failure of DEF/AdBlue Displayed with the warning sound when

Level 2 dosing module a certain period of time has passed from
P204 F (Error code is example) Level 1. The engine output is restricted.

P 1459

control system
Displayed with the continuous warning

Failure of DEF/AdBlue
sound when a certain period of time has
Level 3 dosing module
passed from Level 2. The engine output
is further restricted than Level 2.

P 1459
When failure of the DEF/AdBlue quality or the exhaust gas cleaning device occurs repeatedly, the warning level
goes up. If another failure or error occurs in a short period of time after the failure of the DEF/AdBlue quality or the
exhaust gas cleaning device is corrected, the warning level starts from Level 3.
4-12
4.4.10 EMERGENCY EVACUATION MODE

If the machine should be moved to somewhere emergently even though the machine is in a state of the third level
of warning and under engine restriction due to DEF/AdBlue shortage, abnormal quality, or a failure of the exhaust
gas cleaning device, keep pressing switch (1) for 5 seconds to enter the emergency evacuation mode.
After entering the emergency evacuation mode, only a travel operation becomes possible as usual. But operations
other than the travel operation remain under restriction.
• The emergency evacuation mode can be used for only total 30 minutes. Use this mode only in a case of
emergency and if the warnings are displayed, take proper measures immediately.
• Keep pressing switch (1) for 5 seconds securely to enter the emergency evacuation mode. If not keeping
pressing switch (1) for 5 seconds securely, the machine will not enter the emergency evacuation mode.
4.4.11 SCR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

There are parts in SCR that require a periodical inspection and maintenance. (See "INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE CHART" in Chapter 4)
4
Contact KOBELCO or your KOBELCO authorized dealer for inspection and maintenance of SCR.
4-13
4.5 LUBRICANT, FUEL & COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS

Regardless of the outdoor temperature, the following reduction units use the following oil:
• Swing reduction unit: Gear oil #90, API classification GL-4 class
• Travel reduction unit: Gear oil #90, API classification GL-4 class
Clime te Zone
Type of Ca pa citie s
Compone nts -22 -4 14 32 50 104 F S pe cifie d Lubrica nt
68 86
Lubrica nt (Whe n cha nged) -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 40 C30
(KOBELCO BRAND)
IS O VG32 Long life hydra ulic oil
79.3 Lite rs KW5032S (20 L)
(21 Ga l) P/No. KAPYN01T01066D1
Hydra ulic 168 Lite rs (KOBELCO BRAND)
Hydra ulic oil ta nk IS O VG46 Long life hydra ulic oil
oil (44.4 Ga l) KW5046 (20 L)
Hydra ulic P/No. KAPYN01T01066D3
s ys te m (KOBELCO BRAND)
ISO VG68 KW5068 (20 L)
P/No. KAPYN01T01066D5
[Tota l volume ]
17.0 Lite rs (KOBELCO BRAND)
(4.5 Ga l) A.P.I CJ -4
[H leve l] ACEA E9, E6
Engine oil pa n Engine oil 15.0 Lite rs S AE 10W-30
(4.0 Ga l)
JASO DH-2
[L leve l] P/No. KAPYN01T01077D1
11.0 Lite rs (20 L)
(2.9 Ga l)
S wing motor Ge a r oil 1.65 Lite r
re duction unit (0.4 Ga l) (KOBELCO BRAND)
SK140SR 2.1 Lite r X 2 A.P.I cla s s ifica tion for
EXTREME GEAR OIL S AE #90
Trave l motor Ge a r LC-5 (0.6 Ga l X 2) "s e rvice GL-4"
re duction unit oil SK140SR 3.5 Lite r X 2 P /No. KAP S P 90020
L-5 (0.9 Ga l X 2)
S wing motor re duction 0.4 kg
(0.9 lbs ) EP GREAS E
unit (Housi ng)
Atta chme nt pins 16 pla ce s EP GREAS E

(KOBELCO BRAND)
Extre me pre s s ure
S lewing ring ge a r 1 pla ce EP GREAS E multipurpos e gre a s e
EP gre a s e
Tra ck te ns ion 2 pla ce s Ca rtridge
EP GREAS E
Adjus tme nt P /No.KAP G0420D1
Ope ra ting leve r (400g × 20 units )
As re quire d EP GREAS E
(P ilot va lve )
P a il ca n
8.2 kg P /No.KAP G1601D1
S wing ge a r EP GREAS E
(18.0 lbs )
No.2 AS TM D-975
190 Lite rs
Fue l ta nk Die s e l fue l No.2
(50.2 Ga l)
EN 590
No.1
Die s e l e xha us t DEF / 33.9 L

(9.0 Ga l) IS O 22241-1 IS O 22241-1
flue d ta nk AdBlue
(KOBELCO BRAND)
16 L If comme rcia l coola nt
Engine is us e d, the mixing
Ra dia tor Tota l
coola nt 50% Mixture ra te s hould conform
(Re s e rve ta nk) volume with the s pe cifie d.
(Antifre e ze ) 9L
P/No. KAPYN01T01110D 1
(20 L)
4-14
• When oil leakage or damage of the lower roller, upper roller and front idler is recognized, contact your
KOBELCO authorized dealer for repair.
• Be sure to use light oil as fuel, which meets the standard of each country. To achieve a good fuel efficiency and
exhaust gas property, the engine of this machine uses the electronically controlled fuel injector.
Because this device requires high parts precision and high lubricating ability, when low viscosity fuel with low
lubricating ability is used, the durability may decrease significantly.
When replacing and refilling the long life hydraulic oil, use the oil specified by KOBELCO.
When non-specified hydraulic oil is used or mixed, the performance decreases and the replacement interval of
hydraulic oil needs to be shortened.
4-15
4.6 ABOUT USE OF BIO-OIL (BIODEGRADABLE

HYDRAULIC OIL)
4.6.1 GREASE AND OIL FOR USE
Regarding greases and oils for use, ask your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
4.6.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR BIO-OIL

• When charging bio-oil to a machine using conventional mineral oil, perform flushing three times. Without
flushing, the mineral oil in the circuit is not completely cleaned and the effect of biodegradability cannot be
expected.
• Because the friction coefficient of bio-oil is smaller than that of mineral oil, the performance of parking brakes for
swing and travel decrease.
4.6.3 REPLACEMENT INTERVAL OF BIO-OIL

Bio-oil should be replaced every 2,000 hours.
For replacing procedures, see ”CHANGING HYDRAULIC OIL" in Chapter 4.
4.6.4 FLUSHING PROCEDURES OF BIO-OIL

1. Drain all mineral oil from the hydraulic oil tank.
2. Drain all mineral oil from the cylinders.
3. Charge new bio-oil in the hydraulic oil tank fully.
4. After starting the engine, operate each cylinder for 10 strokes respectively.
Rapid operation may burn the seal because of the air remained in the cylinder. During the first 4 strokes, operate
the cylinder slowly with the engine speed at low idle to charge the hydraulic oil in the cylinder.
5. Idle the right and left travel motors for about 3 minutes respectively.
6. Perform the swing operation for 10 turns.
7. Drain all bio-oil from the hydraulic oil tank.
8. Drain all bio-oil from each cylinder.
9. Charge new bio-oil in the hydraulic oil tank and repeat the procedures 4 to 9 twice.
10. In the final state, analyze the hydraulic oil and check the remaining amount of mineral oil.
4-16
4.7 MAINTENANCE PARTS

Replace parts, such as filters and elements, during the periodical maintenance or before the end of the service life.
The machine can be used economically if the maintenance parts are changed properly and timely.
When you place an order of parts, confirm the parts number on the parts manual.
MAINTENANCE PARTS LIST
Item Part Number Part Name Q'ty Replacement Interval
Return filter element kit Replace at 50 hours for the first

YN52V01025R200 1
(STD, Breaker) time, then every 1000 hours
Hydraulic oil tank
(every 250 hours with breaker
(ZD11G19000) (O-ring) 1 specification)
YN50V00025F2 Suction strainer 1

Hydraulic oil tank Clean every 2000 hours
(ZD11G19000) (O-ring) 1
Replace every 1000 hours.
Replacement every 1000 hours
is just a rough guideline. If the
Air breather YN57V00012S002 Element 1
machine is operated in very
dusty conditions, replace the
element earlier.
Replace every 6 times cleaning
YY11P00008S003 Element (Outer) 1
or every 1 year
Air cleaner
Replace at the same time with
YY11P00008S002 Element (Inner) 1
the outer element (do not clean)
Replace at 50 hours for the first

Engine oil filter 898302–0750 Cartridge 1
time, then every 500 hours
Main 898143–0411 Cartridge 1

Fuel filter Replace every 500 hours
Pre LG21P01003S012 Cartridge 1
Electromagnetic fuel pump

898071–4010 Filter kit 1
Replace every 500 hours
4
898071–4040 Gasket kit 1
YN50V01015P3 Fresh air filter 1 Replace after 10 times cleaning.
Air conditioner When clogging is severe, clean
YN50V01014P1 Recirculation air filter 1 or replace the filter.
Pilot line filter YN50V00020F1 Pilot line filter 1 Clean every 2000 hours
Radiator YN05P00088S032 Radiator cap 1 Replace every 1000 hours
YN69B00010P1 Side cutter 1

YN69B00011P1 Side cutter 1
Bucket (STD) ZS13C24065 Bolt 8 When required
ZN13C24019 Nut 8
B12N0006F1 Tooth assembly 5
Built-in battery for
YN22E00643S001 Battery 1 Replace every year
communication controller
• Parts enclosed in parenthesis ( ) should be changed at the same time.

• The built-in battery for communication controller needs to be replaced every year. For replacement, contact your
4-17
4.8 TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR BOLTS & NUTS

(SPECIFIC POSITIONS)
Follow the next table when tightening or retightening bolts or nuts in every part.
Check for any loose or missing bolts or nuts before daily operation and at periodical inspection. Retighten a loose
bolts and nuts and supply new parts for missing ones as required.
Inspection and retightening are needed at first 50 hours for a new machine and after that every 250 hours. Except
for the retightening positions indicated in the following table, retighten the bolts and nuts according to the tightening
torque table in "TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR BOLTS & NUTS" in Chapter 4.
Tightening
Width
torque
Size across Recommended thread
Position of bolts/nuts N·m
(M) Flats locking agent
(Without
mm
Lubrication)
M5 - Installing fuel tank level sensor 1.96±0.2
13 Installing condenser 11±1.0
13 Installing water sub-tank 10.7±1.1

M8
13 Condenser mounting bracket 23±2.3
13 Installing swivel joint dust cover 115±12 Applying Loctite #262
17 Installing swivel joint 14.7±1.5 Applying Loctite #572
17 Installing swing bearing access panel cover 29.4±2.9 Applying Loctite #572
17 Installing floor plate rubber mount 46.5±4.6
17 Installing air cleaner 17.5±1.8 Applying Loctite #262
17 Installing engine oil filter 39±3.9 Applying Loctite #262

M10
17 Installing bracket for power take 64.7±6.4 Applying Loctite #262
17 Installing hydraulic oil tank cover 46.5±4.6
17 Installing fuel tank bottom cover 46.5±4.6
17 Installing lower frame grease bath cover 10.8±0.98
17 Installing hand rail 46.5±4.6
19 Installing hand rail 80±8
19 Installing hand hold 115±12 Applying Loctite #242
19 Installing engine 80±8 Applying Loctite #262

M12
19 Installing engine 115±12 Applying Loctite #262
19 Installing cab 80±8
19 Installing travel motor cover 83.4±8.4 Applying Loctite #262
24 Installing travel motor 279±29 Applying Loctite #262
24 Floor plate rubber mount mounting nut 191±19
19 Front idler idler adjuster connection 115±12 Applying Loctite #262
24 Installing sprocket 279±29 Applying Loctite #262
M16 24 Installing lower roller 279±28 Applying Loctite #262
24 Installing hydraulic oil tank 191±19 Applying Loctite #262
14 Installing main pump 235±24 Applying Loctite #262
24 Installing shoe bolts 392±29
24 Installing swing bearing (outer race) 256±25.6 Applying Loctite #262
4-18
Tightening
Width
torque
Size across Recommended thread
Position of bolts/nuts N·m
(M) Flats locking agent
(Without
mm
Lubrication)
24 Installing swing bearing (inner race) 279±29 Applying Loctite #262
27 Installing engine 225.6±22.6 Applying Loctite #262

M18
14 Installing power take coupling 220±10
30 Installing fuel tank 370±37 Applying Loctite #262
M20 30 Installing upper roller 539±54 Applying Loctite #262
30 Installing swing reduction unit 539±54 Applying Loctite #262
M27 41 Installing counterweight 1.27±0.13 kNm Applying Loctite #262
46 Installing cab nut 191±19 Applying Loctite #262

M30
22 Installing cab pin 191±19 Applying Loctite #262
5/8-
19 Installing idler adjuster grease nipple 58.8±9.8
18UNF
The counterweight mounting bolts may become loose when the counterweight is hit against some soild obstacles
during swing operation etc.
Check the counterweight mounting bolts in the following procedure.
Use a hand hammer to hit the bolt heads or nuts lightly. When a dull sound is heard, the mounting bolt may be
loose. Retighten the bolt.
4-19
4.9 TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR BOLTS & NUTS

For tightening and retightening of bolts which are not specified in the table "TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR BOLTS
& NUTS (SPECIFIC POSITIONS)", see the following table.
METRIC COARSE THREAD (NOT PLATED)

Torque va lue Unit : N•m {lbf•ft}
Cla s sifica tion 4.8T 7T 10.9T
Nomina l s ize No lubrica tion Oil lubrica tion No lubrica tion Oil lubrica tion No lubrica tion Oil lubrica tion
4.4±0.5 3.7±0.4 9.6±1.0 8.1±0.8 17.4±1.8 14.7±1.5
M6 P =1
{3.2±0.4} {2.7±0.3} {7.1±0.7} {6.0±0.6} {12.8±1.3} {10.8±1.1}
10.7±1.1 9.0±0.9 23.5±2.0 19.6±2.0 42.2±3.9 35.3±3.9
M8 P =1.25
{7.9±0.8} {6.6±0.7} {17.3±1.5} {14.5±1.5} {31.1±2.9} {26.0±2.9}
21.6±2.0 17.9±1.8 46.1±4.9 39.2±3.9 83.4±8.8 70.6±6.9
M10 P =1.5
{15.9±1.4} {13.2±1.3} {34.0±3.6} {28.9±2.9} {61.5±6.5} {52.1±5.1}
36.3±3.9 31.4±2.9 79.4±7.8 66.7±6.9 143±15 121±12
M12 P =1.75
{26.8±2.9} {23.2±2.1} {58.6±5.8} {49.2±5.1} {105±11} {89.2±8.9}
57.9±5.9 49.0±4.9 126±13 106±10 226±20 191±19
M14 P =2
{42.7±4.4} {36.1±3.6} {92.9±9.6} {78.2±7.4} {167±15} {141±14}
88.3±8.8 74.5±6.9 191±20 161±16 343±39 284±29
M16 P =2
{65.1±6.5} {55.0±5.1} {141±15} {119±12} {253±29} {209±21}
122±12 103±10 265±29 226±20 481±49 402±39
M18 P =2.5
{90.0±8.9} {75.8±7.2} {195±21} {167±15} {355±36} {297±29}
172±17 144±14 373±39 314±29 667±69 559±59
M20 P =2.5
{127±13} {106±10} {275±29} {232±21} {492±51} {412±44}
226±20 192±20 500±49 422±39 902±88 755±78
M22 P =2.5
{167±15} {142±15} {369±36} {311±29} {665±65} {557±58}
294±29 235±29 637±69 520±49 1160±118 941±98
M24 P =3
{217±21} {173±21} {470±51} {383±36} {856±87} {694±72}
431±39 353±39 941±98 765±78 1700±167 1370±137
M27 P =3
{318±29} {260±29} {694±72} {564±58} {1250±123} {1010±101}
588±59 490±49 1285±127 1079±108 2300±235 1940±196
M30 P =3.5
{434±44} {361±36} {948±94} {796±80} {1700±173} {1430±145}
794±78 667±69 1726±177 1451±147 3110±314 2610±265
M33 P =3.5
{586±58} {492±51} {1270±131} {1070±108} {2290±232} {1930±195}
1030±98 863±88 2226±226 1863±186 4010±402 3360±333
M36 P =4
{760±72} {637±65} {1640±167} {1370±137} {2960±297} {2480±246}
4-20
METRIC FINE THREAD (NOT PLATED)

Torque va lue Unit : N•m {lbf•ft}
Cla s s ifica tion 4.8T 7T 10.9T
Nomina l s ize No lubrica tion Oil lubrica tion No lubrica tion Oil lubrica tion No lubrica tion Oil lubrica tion
11.3±1.1 9.5±1.0 24.5±2.0 20.6±2.0 44.1±3.9 37.3±3.9
M8 P =1.0
{8.3±0.8} {7.0±0.7} {18.1±1.5} {15.2±1.5} {32.5±2.9} {27.5±2.9}
22.6±2.0 18.7±1.9 48.1±4.9 41.2±3.9 87.3±8.8 73.5±6.9
M10 P =1.25
{16.7±1.5} {13.8±1.4} {35.5±3.6} {30.3±2.9} {64.4±6.5} {54.2±5.1}
39.2±3.9 33.3±2.9 85.3±8.8 71.6±6.9 154±16 129±13
M12 P =1.25
{28.9±2.9} {24.6±2.1} {62.9±6.5} {52.8±5.1} {114±12} {95.2±9.6}
92.2±8.8 77.5±7.8 196±20 169±17 363±39 304±29
M16 P =1.5
{68.0±6.5} {57.2±5.8} {145±15} {125±13} {268±29} {224±21}
186±19 155±16 402±39 333±29 726±69 608±59
M20 P =1.5
{137±14} {114±12} {297±29} {246±21} {535±51} {448±44}
314±29 265±29 686±69 569±59 1240±118 1030±98
M24 P =2
{232±21} {195±21} {506±51} {420±44} {915±87} {760±72}
637±59 530±49 1390±137 1157±118 2500±255 2080±206
M30 P =2
{470±44} {391±36} {1030±101} {853±87} {1840±188} {1530±152}
853±88 706±70 1860±186 1550±155 3350±334 2790±275
M33 P =2
{629±65} {521±52} {1370±137} {1140±114} {2470±246} {2060±203}
1070±108 892±88 2330±226 1940±196 4200±422 3500±353
M36 P =3
{789±80} {658±65} {1720±167} {1430±145} {3100±311} {2580±260}
4-21
4.10 TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR JOINTS & HYDRAULIC

HOSES
These tightening torques are available in the case of tightening without lubricant.
ORS FITTING (O-RING SEAL TYPE)
Hose Mouth and Fitting Wrench Tightening torque

Size (mm) N･ m {lbt･ ft}
30
1 to 14 UNS 137 ± 14 {101 ± 10}
32
36 177 ± 18 {130 ± 13}
1 to 3/16 to 12 UN
41 206 ± 21 {152 ± 15}
41
1 to 7/16 to 12 UN 206 ± 21 {152 ± 15}
46
BYTE TYPE TUBE FITTING
Tube size Wrench Tightening torque

O.D. x Thickness (mm) (mm) N･ m {lbt･ ft}
10 * 1.5 19 49 ± 9.8 {36 ± 7}
15 * 2.0 27 118 ± 12 {87 ± 9}
18 * 2.5 32 147 ± 15 {108 ± 18}
22 * 3.0 36 216 ± 22 {159 ± 16}
28 * 4.0 41 275 ± 27 {202 ± 20}
35 * 5.0 55 441 ± 44 {325 ± 33}
O-RING FITTING
Screw diameter Wrench Tightening torque

(PF) (mm) N･ m {lbt･ ft}
1/8 14 17 ± 2 {12.5 ± 1.5}
1/4 19 36 ± 2 {27 ± 1.5}
3/8 22 74 ± 5 {54 ± 4}
1/2 27 108 ± 9.8 {80 ± 7}
3/4 36 162 ± 9.8 {119 ± 7}
1 41 255 ± 9.8 {188 ± 7}
1 to 1/4 50 392 ± 40 {289 ± 30}
1 to 1/2 55 485 ± 49 {358 ± 36}
4-22
HYDRAULIC HOSE
Screw diameter Wrench Tightening torque

(PF) (mm) N･ m {lbt･ ft}
1/8 17 15 ± 2.0 {11 ± 1.5}
1/4 19 29 ± 4.9 {22 ± 4}
3/8 22 49 ± 4.9 {36 ± 4}
1/2 27 78 ± 4.9 {58 ± 4}
3/4 36 118 ± 9.8 {87 ± 7}
1 41 137 ± 15 {101 ± 11}
1 to 1/4 50 167 ± 15 {123 ± 11}
SPLIT FLANGE
Tightening torque N･ m {lbt･ ft}

Nominal Working pressure Working pressure
Size 20.6 Mpa Bolt size (M) 41.2 Mpa Bolt size (M)
{210 kg/cm2} {420 kg/cm2}
33.9 ± 5.6 39.5 ± 5.6

3/4 10 10
{25 ± 4.1} {29 ± 4.1}
42.4 ± 5.6 62.2 ± 5.6

1 10 12
{31 ± 4.1} {46 ± 4.1}
55.1 ± 7.1 93.3 ± 8.4

1 to 1/4 10 14
{41 ± 5.2} {69 ± 6.2}
70.6 ± 8.4 169 ± 11

1 to 1/2 12 16
{52 ± 6.2} {125 ± 8.1}
4
81.9 ± 8.4 282 ± 11
2 12 20
{60 ± 6.2} {208 ± 8.1}
The tightening torques of the split flange are available in the case of tightening without lubricant.
4-23
4.11 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE CHART

The following charts show the recommended interval or the hour meter reading for each device for greasing,
element replacement, and inspection and maintenance items.
Perform inspection and maintenance according to the calendar time or operation time shown by the hour meter,
whichever comes first.
Symbols in the Table
Indicates a required periodic inspection or maintenance with the hour meter interval.
◎ Indicates a first one time maintenance interval.
○ Indicates a inspection or maintenance interval.
ENGINE
Start-
Every Every Every Every
Up 1 3 6 12 Grease Procedure
Item/Interval Irregular Inspection Month Months Months Months (Replacement Description
or or or or Part) Section
8H 50H 100H 250H 500H 1,000H 2,000H 5,000H
Checking
oil level Engine oil
Engine oil
Re pla ce me nt
(Firs t time )
Replacing oil filter

(Firs t time )
Ca rtridge
Fuel pre-filter Draining

Ca rtridge
Re pla ce me nt
Fuel filter Re pla ce me nt Ca rtridge
Exhaust gas cleaning Ins pe ction
device
Checking air cleaner inlet
Oute r e le me nt
Inspection,
cleaning (Inne r e le me nt
When the warning lamp is on (until 6 time s ) is not cle a ne d)
Air cleaner element
Oute r a nd
Re pla ce me nt
After 6 time s of cle a ning of oute r e le me nt or a fte r 1 ye a r inne r e le me nts
Checking
Cleaning radiator water level
coolant and cooling Replacement,
system cleaning (Or e ve ry
2 ye a rs )
Checking radiator hoses for

cracking and damage
Cleaning radiator, oil cooler core,

intercooler and filters
Ins pe ction
Fan belt and
air conditioner belt Adjus tme nt
(Firs t time )
Cleaning or replacing ï
radiator cap Re pla ce me nt
Checking engine mounting
bracket for tightening condition
Checking intake system rubber hose

Cleaning and checking filter of
electromagnetic fuel pump
4-24
Start-
Up 1 3 6 12 ·
Grease Procedure
8H 50H 100H 250H 500H 1,000H 2,000H 5,000H
*Checking and adjusting valve

—
clearance (Firs t time )
*Checking and adjusting

—
compression pressure
*Checking intake and exhaust

—
manifolds for tightening condition (Firs t time )
*Checking oil pan and other

auxiliary devices for tightening —
condition (Firs t time )
*Checking each tightening part of

—
turbo charger (Firs t time )
*Checking turbo charger rotor and

—
impeller for rotation condition
*Checking play of turbo charger

—
rotor
*Checking lubricating system of

—
turbo charger for leakage
*Checking and cleaning starter

—
brush and commutator
*Checking oil pan for mixing of

—
water and fuel
*Checking fan mounting bolt for

—
tightening condition
*Checking thermostat function —
*Checking starter function —
*Checking startability, exhaust
color, and abnormal sound —
4
*Checking heater plug and intake
—
air hea ter (starting auxiliary de vice)
*Checking alternator function —
*Checking pipe joints for tightening
—
condition (Firs t time )
*Checking exhaust pipe and

muffler for looseness of mounting —
part and damages (Firs t time )
*Checking and cleaning alternator

—
brush (when brush is equipped)
Checking each part for oil and fuel

3.1
leakage
Checking each part for water

leakage 3.1
Checking electrical system —
Contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer for inspection and adjustment of the items marked with *.
4-25
FUEL SYSTEM
Start-
8H 50H 100H 250H 500H 1,000H 2,000H 5,000H
Checking oil level 3.2.3

Draining water and
4.14.2
Fue l ta nk sediment
Cle a ning ca p a nd 4.17.6

s tra ine r
Ble e ding a ir from fue l piping 4.12.6
SCR SYSTEM
Start-
8H 50H 100H 250H 500H 1,000H 2,000H 5,000H
Checking 3.2.8
DEF/AdBlue tank fluid level
Inspection 4.16.7
DEF/AdBlue piping Inspection 4.16.7
DEF/AdBlue supply Inspection 4.16.7
module
*DEF/AdBlue supply (3 years
Replacement or 4.20.2
module filter 4500 H)
*DEF/AdBlue dosing Inspection 4.16.7

module
*SCR Replacement Gasket 4.20.2
(insulation material) (4,500)
*SCR system cooling Inspection

water piping 4.16.7
*Harness around SCR Inspection 4.16.7
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Start-
8H 50H 100H 250H 500H 1,000H 2,000H 5,000H
Checking 3.2.5
oil level
Hydraulic oil Hydra ulic oil
Re pla ce me nt 4.20.1
(Bre a ke r)
Hydra ulic oil ta nk
Suction strainer
Cle a ning S tra ine r 4.19.4

Replacing return filter Ele me nt 4.18.1
(Firs t time ) (Bre a ke r)
Replacing air breather element Ele me nt 4.18.2

Checking hydraulic components,
pipes and hoses for oil leakage 3.1
and damage
Cle a ning pilot line filte r 4.19.7
4-26
UPPER FRAME
Start-
Irregular Inspection Month Months Months Months
Item/Interval (Replacement Description
8H 50H 100H 250H 500H 1,000H 2,000H 5,000H
Checking
oil level Ge a r oil 4.15.1
Swing reduction Ý Þ Ü ô
S AE #90
unit oil
Re pla ce me nt GL-4 4.19.2
(Firs t time )
EPG lithium added
Greasing to swing bearing extreme-pressure 4.17.4
grease
Checking grease of swing grease EPG lithium added
extreme-pressure 4.19.6
bath grease
Swing brake function —
Greasing to control lever push rod EPG lithium added
extreme-pressure 4.17.7
and universal joint part grease
Installing swing bearing
4.17.5
Checking bolt for looseness
Ins ta lling counte rwe ight
4.8
Che cking bolt for loos e ne s s (Firs t time )
Greasing swing reduction unit 4.19.5

Checking body structure 3.1
LOWER FRAME
Start-
8H 50H 100H 250H 500H 1,000H 2,000H 5,000H

Checking
oil level Ý Þ Ü ô
Ge a r oil 4.15.2 4
Travel reduction S AE #90
unit oil GL-4
Re pla ce me nt 4.19.3
(First time)
Adjusting tension of crawler 4.14.3

Che cking uppe r rolle r a nd lowe r 3.1

rolle r for oil le a ka ge
Che cking idle r a nd tra ve l re duction 3.1

unit for oil le a ka ge
Che cking s procke t, idle r, a nd rolle r 3.1

for we a r
4-27
ATTACHMENT
Start-
8H 50H 100H 250H 500H 1,000H 2,000H 5,000H
EPG lithium added

Greasing attachment extreme-pressure
4.13.1
(around bucket) (Until 50 H) grease

(250 H is
Greasing attachment only for
(Until 50 H) ne w
ma chine )
Replacing bucket 4.12.3

Re pla cing tooth a nd s ide cutte r 4.12.4
Che cking a tta chme nt s tructure 3.1
ELECTRICITY
Start-
8H 50H 100H 250H 500H 1,000H 2,000H 5,000H
Checking liquid level 4.14.1

Measuring specific
gravity 4.14.1
Battery
Cleaning and grease
application 4.14.1
Measuring voltage 4.18.4
Electrical wiring 3.1
Check instruments, switches, 3.2.11
and light warning devices for
performance condition 3.2.12
OTHER DEVICES
Start-
Up
1 3 6 12 Grease Procedure
Irregular
Item/Interval Inspection Month Months Months Months (Replacement Description
8H 50H 100H 250H 500H 1,000H 2,000H 5,000H
Checking refrigerant 4.17.8
volume
Checking and 4.16.8
Air cleaning condenser
conditioner
Cleaning
Filter 4.16.4
Replacement After about 10 times of cleaning
Checking wiper blades 4.12.1

Checking washer fluid 4.12.2
Checking external appearance of
machine for deformation and 3.1
damages
Checking bolts and nuts for 3.1

looseness and coming off
Inspection
Seatbelt 2.11
Replacement
(3 ye a rs )
4-28
4.12 MAINTENANCE WHEN REQUIRED

Thoroughly read and understand "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS" of this manual before operating, inspecting or
maintaining the machine.
4.12.1 CHECKING AND REPLACING WIPER BLADES

• Check the wiper blades and replace them if there is
wear or damage.
4.12.2 WASHER FLUID INSPECTION
If the washer is used when the washer tank is empty, the motor attached to the washer tank may be damaged.
1. Remove the floor mat.

2. Inspect the fluid level of washer tank (1).
3. If the washer fluid level is low, remove the cap, and
add washer fluid for automobiles. 4
4. Put the floor mat back to its original position.
4-29
4.12.3 REPLACING BUCKET
• Park the machine on a level and firm place before operation. When working with other workers, surely send and
receive signals to each other and use extreme caution to ensure the safety.
• Never operate the front attachment abruptly because it is dangerous.
• When aligning the pin with a pin hole, never insert your fingers into the hole.
• Place the removed bucket in the stable condition.
REMOVING BUCKET
1. Put the bucket bottom on a level ground and stabilize it at the position where the load is not applied on the pins
of bucket and arm.
2. Move O-ring (1) from the specified position to bucket
boss (9). 1
Bucket boss
3. Remove retaining ring (2) and pin (3) by using a flat-
head screwdriver. 8 7
4. Remove pins (4) and (5) and bucket (6).

2, 3
Use caution to prevent sand or mud from sticking to 1
the removed pin. The both ends of pin holes of arm
(7) and bucket link (8) have the dust seals. Be 4
1
careful not to damage them.
5
6
4-30
INSTALLING BUCKET
If O-ring (1) is cracked or has lost elasticity, replace it with a new one.
1. Clean each pin and pin hole and grease it

7
sufficiently to make it slippery.
8
2. Move the bucket cylinder to align the pin holes of
bucket (6) and bucket link (8) with each other, and 1 2,3
then insert pin (4).
4
3. Raise the boom to slightly raise the bucket from the
ground. 1 5
4. Move arm (7) to align the pin holes of bucket (6) and 6 6
arm (7) with each other, and then insert pin (5).
5. Insert pin (3) and install retaining ring (2).
6. Fit O-ring (1) in place.
7. Apply grease to the grease nipples for each pin until the grease comes out through the gap between the pin
and the hole.
4-31
4.12.4 REPLACING TOOTH POINT AND SIDE CUTTER
When replacing the tooth point or side cutter, apply a safety block to the bottom face of the bucket.
Check the bucket tooth points and side cutters for wear.
The tooth point with holes or crackings should be
replaced before adapter (1) begins to be worn. The side
cutter with severe wear should be replaced soon after it
is found. If the replacement is delayed, the body of the
bucket will be damaged. Safety block
(1) Adapter
(2) Tooth point
6
(3) Rubber lock pin
(4) Locking pin
(5) Side cutter
(6) Bolt 1
(7) Nut 5
4
7 3
2
REPLACING TOOTH POINTS
When hammering, metal chips can fly. If it flies into your eye, it may result in severe injury. Wear protective gears
such as protective glasses, hard hat and gloves.
4-32
1. Using a punching tool and hammer, hammer out Short

locking pin (4) in a way that will not break rubber Rubber is broken
rock pin (3). Not good
Not good
2. Inspect removed locking pin (4) and rubber lock pin 4
(3). Rubber
If the locking pin is too short or the rubber lock pin is lock
Steel ball sinks
in poor condition as shown in the figure, replace it 3 in when pushed Align the bottom faces
with a new one. with a hand
Good Not good
3. Use a putty knife to clean the surface of adapter
nose (1) and remove hardened soil.
4. Fit tooth point (2) onto adapter nose (1).
3
5. Push rubber lock pin (3) into the hole of adapter
nose (1). 2
6. Hammer locking pin (4) until its surface is aligned Good Not good
with the point surface.
4 1
Good Not good
4-33
REPLACING SIDE CUTTERS
If the replacement is delayed, the body of the bucket will be damaged.

Early replacement is recommended.
1. After removing sand and soil sticking to around the

mounting bolts, cut off the mounting bolts by gas
cutting, and then remove the side cutters.
2. Clean the mounting surfaces and install new side
cutters.
When replacing the side cutters, be sure to replace
the bolts and nuts with new ones.
Tightening Torque: 980 ± 50N·m (723 ± 37 lbf·ft)
3. After tightening the nuts, spot-weld them.
Safety block
Safety block
4-34
4.12.5 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT OF BUCKET GAP ADJUSTMENT

MECHANISM
• When adjusting bucket gaps, pull up the pilot control shut-off lever to the "LOCKED" position and stop the
engine.
• If the bucket gaps are not properly adjusted, galling is generated in the contact surface between the bucket and
the arm causing abnormal noise and damage on the shaft the O-ring.
1. Place the bucket as shown in the figure in stable

condition.
Bucket gap
adjustment mechanism
2. Move O-ring (1) from the specified position to the

bucket boss.
3. Swing the upper structure right very slightly to press

the tip of the arm to the right of the bucket lightly (the
side without the gap adjustment system).
4. Move the pilot control shut-off lever to the
"LOCKED" position, and then stop the engine. 4
Bucket boss
5. Measure gap (A) between the bucket and the arm
boss. 2 3 i Aj 1
When the measurement value is 1.2 mm or more,
adjust it.
6. Loosen each bolt, and remove appropriate number
of shims to adjust the gap.
There are 5 pieces of shims (3) (1 mm) in average in
3 bolts (2) on the gap adjustment part.
7. Tighten bolts (2) with the specified tightening torque
evenly.
Tightening Torque: 181±20N·m(133±15lbf·ft)
8. Fit O-ring (1) in place.
4-35
4.12.6 BLEEDING AIR FROM FUEL PIPING

After replacing the element of fuel filter or running out of fuel, air enters the fuel piping and the engine cannot be
started.
Use the following procedures to bleed air.
ABOUT BLEEDING AIR FROM FUEL PIPING
• Wipe off spilled fuel completely to prevent a fire.

• After the operation, make sure that fuel does not leak.
1. Place a container for fuel under fuel filter (1).

2. Clean the area around air bleeder plug (2) and
loosen the air bleeder plug.
3. Push priming pump (3) repeatedly.
Wipe off the fuel coming out of the air bleeder plug
with a waste cloth.
4. When fuel without bubbles comes out of the air 1
bleeder plug, tighten the air bleeder plug.
5. After tightening the plug, push the priming pump for
20 times or more again. 2
6. After the air bleeding is completed, wipe off the
spilled fuel. 3
7. Start the engine and make sure that there is no fuel
leakage.
4-36
4.12.7 RELEASING INTERNAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Before replacing the front attachment and the hydraulic pipes, release the internal pressure of the hydraulic system.
Release the internal pressure of the hydraulic system following the procedures below.
RELEASING INTERNAL PRESSURE IN HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Immediately after operation, each part is hot and it may cause burns. Start operation after the temperature goes
down.

2. Retract the arm cylinder and bucket cylinder, and
place the bucket on the ground.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold pressure release switch (1) for 5 to
10 seconds. Then release pressure release switch
(1) for 1 to 5 seconds, and press and hold pressure
release switch, again for 5 to 10 seconds.
"DRAINING HYD. PRESS" appears on the multi-
display and the engine speed becomes a low speed.
5. The buzzer sounds intermittently.
(To stop the buzzer, press the buzzer stop switch). ON
PR
6. Move the attachment control lever in this state to
release the pressure.
Be careful that the attachment may move to some
extent due to its own weight.
7. Set the starter key to the "OFF" position to stop the
engine and to finish the internal pressure release
operation. 4
S
12h
8. When the internal pressure release is failed, "FAIL

DRAIN HYD. PRESS" is displayed on the multi-
display, and the buzzer sounds continuously.
S
Perform Step 4 to 7, again. 12h
4-37
4.13 8 HOUR (DAILY) INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES
Thoroughly read and understand "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS" of this manual before performing the inspection and
maintenance.
See "EVERYDAY CHECK-UP", "CHECK BEFORE STARTING ENGINE" and "CHECK AFTER STARTING
ENGINEP" to perform a daily pre-operation inspection and maintenance (before operation and immediately after
starting operation).
4.13.1 GREASING ATTACHMENT

Before applying grease, set the machine in the grease
application position as shown in the figure, remove all
grease nipples, and then apply grease until the grease
comes out through the gap between the pin and the hole.
The grease gun is located inside the cover on the right
front of the machine.
• Grease greasing points (1) to (14) every 8 hours during the first 50 hours of operation by a new machine. Also,
them when 250 hours and 500 hours of operation by the new machine has been reached respectively. After that,
grease them every 500 hours or every 6 months, whichever comes first. Also, regarding the pins around the
bucket, grease them every 250 hours.
• For digging work in the water, grease the submerged parts before and after the work every day.
• After heavy duty work with a special attachment, grease the machine every day.
• Grease the machine before the work if it has not been used for one month or longer.
• Grease grease nipples (1) on the right and left boom

cylinder heads.
4-38
• Among the grease nipples in 5 locations near the

boom foot, grease the boom foot pin from (2) and
(3), the boom cylinder rod from (4) and (5), and the 4
arm cylinder head from (6). Also, grease grease 6
nipple (7) in the center of boom foot. 5
7 3
2
• Grease grease nipple (8) on the arm cylinder rod,

9
grease nipple (9) in the connecting part between the
boom and the arm, and grease nipple (10) on the 8
bucket cylinder head.
10
• Grease grease nipple (11) on the link pin, grease
11
nipple (12) on the bucket cylinder rod, three grease
14
nipples (13) on the bucket link, and grease nipple
(14) on the left side of the arm end.
12
11 13
4-39
4.14 50 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES
maintenance.
Perform this section together with "8 HOUR (DAILY) INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES" in Chapter
4.
4.14.1 INSPECTING AND MAINTAINING BATTERY
INSPECTING AND MAINTAINING BATTERY
• Wear protective glasses, long-sleeve shirt and gloves when handling the batteries.
• Do not bring a fire near the battery because the combustible hydrogen gas generated by the battery can cause
explosion.
• If the dilute sulfuric acid in the battery splashes onto your skin or into your eyes, it will cause burns or blindness.
At such case, immediately wash the skin or eyes with sufficient clean water, and ask a special doctor to treat it as
soon as possible.
• Before performing inspection and maintenance on the batteries, be sure to stop the engine.
• Confirm that the battery power-off switch is set to the OFF position to cut off the current.
• When removing the battery terminal, be sure to remove the ground side (negative terminal) first and conversely,
when attaching the battery terminal, attach the ground side last.
• Do not put tools and hardware on the protective cover on the battery upper section. It may cause a short circuit
resulting in a fire or explosion.
Before turning the battery power-off switch to the "O (OFF)" position or removing the battery terminals, turn the
starter switch to the OFF position, wait 5 minute or more.
cleaning device.
CHECKING BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
• Clean the battery terminals, and apply grease or commercial anti-rust lubricant spray.
• Do not dispose of the batteries by yourself but always ask a professional service company to dispose of it.
• If the batteries became old, do not attempt to use the old battery and a new battery together. The service life of
the new battery may be shortened. When replacing the batteries, replace both at the same time.
1. Use the starter key to open the side door at the left side of the machine, and hold it with the stay.
4-40
2. Turn the battery power-off switch OFF using key (1).
1
3. Lift up battery protection cover (2).
4. Remove cap (3), and if the level is below the

specified level (10 to 15 mm above the electrode 3 Battery
plate), supply distilled water to the specified level.
5. Clean the vent hole of the battery cap, and tighten
10 to 15 mm
cap (3) firmly.
UPPER
6. Return battery protection cover (2) to the specified LOWER
4
place over the batteries.
7. Remove the support stay, and close the side door.
Electrode
plate
4-41
SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF BATTERY ELECTROLYTE
PRECAUTIONS IN COLD CLIMATES

• Be careful of retaining the temperature of the batteries. If the temperature is too low, they may freeze, and their
quantities decrease significantly.
• Charge the batteries as soon as possible.
Measure the specific gravity of battery electrolyte after its temperature becomes almost the same as the outdoor
temperature, instead of immediately after finishing operation.
• The specific gravity of the battery electrolyte varies according to the fluid temperature; therefore, retain the
temperature within the range of use as shown in the following table. If the specific gravity is at the lower limit or
below (small value), charging is necessary.
Specific Gravity of Battery Electrolyte
Battery electrolyte temperature

Charging rate -20 degrees C 0 degrees C 20 degrees C
(-4 degrees F) (32 degrees F) (68 degrees F)
100 % 1.31 1.29 1.28

90 % 1.29 1.28 1.26
80 % 1.28 1.26 1.25
75 % 1.27 1.25 1.24
4-42
4.14.2 DRAINING WATER AND SEDIMENT IN FUEL TANK
HANDLING OF LIGHT OIL

• Make sure that there is no fuel leakage after performing work.

2. Swing the upper structure to a range in which drain
cock (1) under the fuel tank can be released, and
A
put the bucket on the ground.
3. Stop the engine, and set the pilot control shut-off
B
4. Place a container for drain water and sediment
under drain cock (1).
1
5. Insert your hand through the hole in the under cover
and set drain cock (1) to "OPEN" position (A) to
drain water and sediment deposited on the bottom.
At this time, be careful not to be splashed by the
drain fuel.
6. Set drain cock (1) to "CLOSED" position (B) when clean fuel comes out.
4-43
4.14.3 ADJUSTING CRAWLER TENSION
• Before inspecting and greasing the crawler, remove soil adhered to the crawler tracks completely by washing
them.
• Crawler adjustment is necessary depending on the work condition at the working site. At a working site covered
with many gravel and cobbles, loosen the crawler tension slightly, and on a firm ground, increase the tension
slightly.
CHECKING CRAWLER TENSION

• Measure the upper part of the shoe and the lower
part of the track frame, while raising one of the
crawlers up, for which tension is to be measured.
In this case, hold the raised machine with a stand
securely.
A proper tension: 270 to 300 mm (10.6 to 11.8 inch)
A
1
CRAWLER TENSION ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES
ABOUT CRAWLER FAILURE

When a crawler cannot be adjusted, the crawler has a failure.
A strong force is applied to the spring of track spring. Grease in the cylinder is under high pressure. If the travel
system is adjusted or disassembled in a wrong way, it is very dangerous and could cause severe personal injury.
Contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer for repair immediately.
1. Crawler tension is adjusted by applying grease to

grease nipple (1) of the idler adjuster of lower frame
1
with a grease gun.
2. In order to make the both tension of the left and right
crawlers equal each other, travel the machine
forward and backward to even out the pressure.
3. Check the amount of slack of the crawlers once
again and readjust them as necessary.
4-44
CRAWLER LOOSENING PROCEDURES
ABOUT HANDLING OF GEASE CYLINDER

Grease cylinder is under high pressure. It is dangerous to loosen the grease nipple rapidly because high pressure
grease will spout and may cause severe personal injury. Loosen the grease nipple gradually with your face kept
away from the area around the grease nipple.
Do not loosen the grease nipple more than one turn because it can pop out due to the internal high pressure
grease.
1. Loosen grease nipple (1) of the grease cylinder

maximum one turn slowly to drain the grease.
1
When the grease is not drained well, raise the
crawler to be loosened and rotate the crawler
slightly.
2. When the tension of crawler is adjusted properly,
tighten grease nipple (1).
Tightening Torque: 59 ± 10 N･m (43.5 ± 7 lbf･ft)
4-45

PROCEDURES
maintenance.
Perform this section together with "EVERYDAY CHECK-UP and 50 HOUR INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES".
4.15.1 CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL OF SWING REDUCTION UNIT
ABOUT OIL TEMPERATURE IMMEDIATELY AFTER OPERATION

Immediately after operation, the oil is hot and it may cause burns. Start working after the temperature goes down.

3. Stop the engine and move the pilot control shut-off lever to the "LOCKED" position.
4. Use level gauge (1) to check the level of gear oil.
1
When the level is within the specified range of the
scale of level gauge (1), it is proper.
5. If the gear oil level is low, remove level gauge (1)
and refill the specified gear oil from the filler port.
For the specified gear oil, see "LUBRICANT, FUEL
& COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS" in Chapter 4.
6. Attach level gauge (1).
4-46
4.15.2 CHECKING OIL LEVEL OF TRAVEL REDUCTION UNIT
ABOUT CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
• Pressure may be generated inside the traveling devices. Slowly loosen the plug to release the internal pressure
and then remove the plug. When the plug is loosened abruptly, the plug and oil may pop out and it is dangerous.
Never position your body or face in front of the plug.
• Immediately after operation, the oil is hot and it may cause burns. Start working after the temperature goes
down.

2. Stop the machine at a position in which drain plug
3
(1) is positioned at the lower side and lower the
bucket to the ground. 2
3. Stop the engine and move the pilot control shut-off FILL

LEVEL
4. Remove level plug (2) and check the level and
contamination of the gear oil.
If the oil level is up to the neck of the level plug, it is DRAIN
proper.
5. If the gear oil level is low, remove level plug (2) and
fill plug (3) and refill the specified gear oil. 1
For specified gear oil, see "LUBRICANT, FUEL &
COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS" in Chapter 4.
6. Clean level plug (2) and fill plug (3) with light oil and install them.
7. Check the other travel reduction unit in the same procedure.
4
4-47
4.16 250 HOUR (3-MONTH) INSPECTION &

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
maintenance.
Perform this section together with "EVERYDAY CHECK-UP, and 50, and 120 HOUR INSPECTION &
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES".
4.16.1 ADJUSTING FAN BELT AND AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR

BELT
CHECKING FAN BELT AND AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR BELT
INSPECTING AND MAINTAINING BELT

Replace the belt with a new one if flaking or breakage is found on the belt by the inspection, slip occurs excessively,
or the belt cannot be adjusted to within the adjustment range. Keep the belt away from oils. The service life may be
shortened if it slips by oil.
• When the belt is replaced by a new one, the belt does not have the initial adaptability. Run the engine at idle for 3
to 5 minutes and then adjust the belt tension again.
• After running the engine for about 2 hours, a new belt obtains a complete initial elongation.
• When replacing a set of two belts, be sure to replace both two with new ones.
The engine of this machine is equipped with the alternator, fan, and an air conditioning compressor belts.
Check the belts for wear and damage, and also for tension, and adjust them properly in order to maintain the
maximum engine performance and the service life.
4-48
• To check the belt tension, press on the center of the

belt with your thumb. If the deflection falls within the
range shown in the following table, it is normal.
New Belt Tension At Inspection Pushing Force

Belt
mm (inch) mm (inch) N (lbf)
Fan alternator 4.2 to 5(0.17 to 0.20) 6.6 to 7.4(0.26 to 0.29) 98(22)
Air conditioning compressor

3 to 4(0.12 to 0.16) 5 to 6(0.20 to 0.24) 24(5.4)
belt
ADJUSTING ALTERNATOR AND FAN BELT

An improperly installed belt may not only decrease the performance of compressor but also damage the belt and 4
the compressor.
1. Open the engine hood with the starter key and hold
it with the stay.
2. Remove the fan guard.
3. Loosen mounting bolt (1) and adjusting nut (2) 2
slightly to adjust the tension of belt.
4. Loosen adjusting bolt (3), adjust the alternator and
fan belt to the specified tension, and tighten
mounting bolt (1) and adjusting nut (2).
Tightening torque
Mounting bolt (1): 44 to 58N·m(32 to 43lbf·ft)
Adjusting nut (2): 20 to 30N·m(15 to 22lbf·ft) 3
1
5. After adjustment, run the engine at low idle for about
5 minutes.
6. Step the engine and check the fan belt tension.
7. Attach the fan guard.
8. Remove the support stay and close the engine hood.
4-49
ADJUSTING TENSION OF AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR BELT

An improperly installed belt may not only decrease the performance of compressor but also damage the belt and
the compressor.
1. Open the engine hood with the starter key and hold
2
it with the stay.
2. Loosen nut (1) of the idle pulley slightly, turn
adjusting bolt (2) to adjust the belt and tighten nut
(1).
Tightening torque
Nut (1): 46.5±4.6N·m(34.3±3.4lbf·ft)
3. After adjustment, run the engine at low idle for about
5 minutes and then check the belt tension again.
4. Remove the support stay and close the engine
hood.
1
4-50
4.16.2 CHECKING INTAKE SYSTEM RUBBER HOSE
ABOUT HANDLING OF RUBBER HOSE
• Do not touch the hot parts. Contact with hot parts during operation or immediately after stopping operation may
cause burns.
• When replacing the rubber hoses, cover the inlet with a clean cloth to prevent dust from entering it.
CHECKING RUBBER SUCTION HOSE FOR AIR CLEANER

1. Check that rubber hose (1) is not damaged or 2 2
deteriorated and band (2) is not loose.
2. Rubber hose (1) which is damaged or deteriorated
1
should be replaced with a new one together with
band (2).
CHECKING RUBBER HOSE OF INTERCOOLER

1. Check that rubber hose (1) is not damaged or 2 1 2 1
deteriorated and band (2) is not loose.
2. Rubber hose (1) which is damaged or deteriorated 2
should be replaced with a new one together with 4
band (2).
2 1
4-51
4.16.3 CHECKING RADIATOR HOSES

If you find cracks, permanent set, and water leakage on the hoses, replace the hoses immediately. Serious
damages such as engine overheat can be prevented.
INSPECTING RADIATOR HOSES

1. Use the starter key to open the engine hood, and 1
hold it with the stay.
2
2. Check each hose for water leakage due to
looseness of clamp (1) or cracking or permanent set
of hose (2), (3). 1
3. Tighten loosened clamp (1).
Replace hose (2) having cracks or permanent set.
1 3
4-52
REPLACING RADIATOR HOSES
REPLACING RADIATOR HOSES

Inside the radiator, the high pressure steam occurs and it may cause personal injury. Do not loosen or remove the
radiator cap when the coolant is under high pressure and high temperature.
• Stop the engine before removing the radiator cap.
• Allow enough time for the coolant to cool down before removing the radiator cap.
1. Loosen six bolts under the radiator, and remove the 1

cover.
2
2. Loosen radiator cap (1) slowly. After checking that
the pressure is completely released, push the cap
down, loosen it further, and then remove it. 1
3. Loosen drain cock (3) and drain the coolant into a
container until the water level of the radiator
becomes lower than hose (2) to replace.
4. Loosen clamp (1), remove damaged hose (2), and
replace it with a new hose.
5. Tighten drain cock (3).
6. Refill the radiator with coolant and then fill the
reserve tank with coolant.
7. After refilling, tighten the radiator cap securely.
8. Remove the support stay, and close the engine 2
hood.
9. Install the cover on the specified position under the
radiator. 4
1 3
4-53
4.16.4 CLEANING OR REPLACING AIR CONDITIONER FILTERS
The maintenance interval is a reference value. Clean the filters earlier than the specified interval in case the
machine is being used in dusty area.
Cleaning Replacement
Recirculation air filter Every 500 hours After cleaning approximately 10 times
Fresh air filter Every 250 hours After cleaning approximately 10 times
CLEANING OR REPLACING AIR CONDITIONER FRESH AIR FILTER

1. Hold the handle grip of fresh air filter (1) at the left
rear side of the operator's seat and pull it up straight.
2. Hold the handle of fresh air filter (2) from the
opening from which cover (1) is removed, and pull it
up straight.
3. Clean the recirculation/fresh air filters by blowing
compressed air (0.2 MPa or less) to them. 1
4. Install the cleaned or replacement filters in the

reverse order of removal.
4-54
CLEANING OR REPLACING OF AIR CONDITIONER RECIRCULATION AIR FILTER

1. The recirculation air filter (3) is placed on the left
side under the operator seat.
2. Turn over floor mat, catch handle grip of
recirculation air filter (3) and pull it out forward.
3. Clean the recirculation / fresh air filters by blowing
compressed air (0.2 MPa or less) to them.
4. Install the cleaned or replacement filters in the
reverse order of removal.
Install the recirculation air filter with the arrow facing rearward.
4-55
4.16.5 INSPECTING, CLEANING, OR REPLACING AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
• Wear protective glasses or respirator when using compressed air.

• Before cleaning or replacing the air cleaner element, stop the engine.
• Do not remove the inner element except for replacing with a new one.
• When replacing the inner element, cover the inlet inside the air cleaner with a clean cloth or tape to prevent dust
from entering it.
Cleaning Replacement
When the warning is displayed on the multi-

After cleaning 6 times
Outer element display
or after one year
or every 250 hours
Inner element — When replacing the outer element
CLEANING OR REPLACING OF OUTER ELEMENT

1. Use the starter key to open the side door at the left
of the machine, and hold it with the stay.
2. Remove the clamp from air cleaner cover (1) to

open it.
3. Remove outer element (2), and clean inside the air 3
cleaner. 2
4. From inside outer element (2), blow compressed air

(0.2 MPa or less) along the folds. Then blow the
compressed air from the outside along the folds,
and then from the inside again.
Do not hit the outer element to solid objects or clean
the outer element by hitting it.
5. After cleaning, check outer element (2), and if holes
and ruptures are found, replace it with a new one.
6. Install outer element (2), and place O-ring (3) to
cover (1).
4-56
Install the cover with the O-ring attached to the air cleaner.
Without the O-ring, water gets into the air cleaner, causing failure of the engine.
7. Install cover (1) to the air cleaner with the arrow facing up, and fix it with the clamp.
8. Close the side door, and lock it with the starter key.
REPLACING INNER ELEMENT

Replace the inner element when replacing the outer element.
1. Remove outer element (2), and then remove inner
element (4).
2. Cover the inlet inside the air cleaner with a clean 3
cloth or tape. 2
3. Clean inside the air cleaner.
4. Remove the cover at the inlet, and install new inner 1
element (4).
5. Install new outer element (2) and then install O-ring
(3) to cover (1). 4
6. Install cover (1) to the air cleaner with the arrow
facing up, and fix it with the clamp.
7. Close the side door, and lock it with the starter key.
4-57
4.16.6 CLEANING OR REPLACING RADIATOR CAP
HANDLING OF RADIATOR CAP

Do not loosen or remove the radiator cap when the coolant is under high pressure and temperature.
High temperature steam and the coolant will spout and could cause burns.
• When opening the radiator cap, wait until the coolant cools down, and then slowly turn and open the radiator
cap.
• The antifreeze is flammable, so do not bring flames and sparks close to it.
• The antifreeze is poisonous, so prevent it from contacting with skin. If the antifreeze gets into your eyes or on
your skin, flush the eyes or skin with plenty of water, and seek medical attention.
A loose radiator cap will let hot steam and coolant spout during operation and it may cause burns.
1. Loosen radiator cap (1) slowly. After checking that

the pressure is completely released, push the cap 1
down, loosen it further, and then remove it.
Here is the radiator filler opening.
2. Inspect locations A through C of cap (1) for foreign
materials and damage. Use a clean cloth to wipe it
or replace it if necessary.
A: Contact surface between negative pressure valve
(2) and gasket (5)
B: Both surfaces of pressure valve (3) and gasket
(5)
C: Both surfaces of external lid (4) and gasket (6)
3. Securely tighten cap (1). 4
6
3
C
B 5
2
A
4.16.7 INSPECTING SCR SYSTEM

• Check the DEF/AdBlue tank, the DEF/AdBlue supply module, and around the DEF/AdBlue pipe for water
leakage.
• Check the tubes and the hoses in the DEF/AdBlue piping for deterioration and damage.
• For the following inspections, contact your KOBELCO or KOBELCO authorized dealer.
Inspection around the DEF/AdBlue dosing module for water leakage
Inspection of the cooling water piping of the SCR system for water leakage, deterioration, and damage
Inspection of the harnesses of SCR for damage, and the connecting parts for looseness.
4-58
4.16.8 CLEANING RADIATOR, OIL COOLER CORE AND FILTER
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING

Direct strike of compressed air, steam or high pressure water to your body can cause personal injury. Wear
protective glasses, goggles, mask, and protective shoes, etc.
When using compressed air or high pressure water, keep a safe distance from the fin to prevent it from being
damaged. If the fin is damaged, it may cause water leakage or overheating.
1. Open engine hood with starter key.

2. Using starter key, and open the door at the left side
of the counterweight.
3. Push spring plate (1) and remove the projection
from the slit.
4. To remove the filter (2) pull out the filter. 2
5. Check filter (2), radiator (3), oil cooler (4), inter-

1
cooler (5) and condenser (6) for clogging.
When mud, dust and dead leaves are found, clean
them off depending on the degree of dirt.
4
3 4
5
4-59
6. Remove dust, mud and other dirt from their cores

and fins using compressed air (0.2 MPa) or water.
¥
2
7. Insert filter (2) to duct (7). Check that filter (2) is

placed correctly in receiving portion (8) of duct (7)
and spring plate (1) of the filter is placed in the slit of 7
the duct side.
8. Close the door at the left side of the counterweight,
and lock the door.
4-60

maintenance.
Perform this section together with "EVERYDAY CHECK-UP and 50, 100, 120, and 250 HOUR INSPECTION &
4.17.1 REPLACING ENGINE OIL AND ENGINE OIL FILTER
ABOUT HOT PARTS
• Contact with hot parts during operation or immediately after stopping operation may cause burns. Do not touch
the hot parts.
• Immediately after operation, the oil and oil filter are hot. Start the replacement after the temperature goes down.
• Do not reuse the filter element, O-ring and gasket.

• When replacing the O-ring or gasket, check the fitting condition at the mounting surface to prevent it from being
twisted and broken.
• Check drain engine oil, and if metal chips or powder is found in the oil, contact your KOBELCO authorized
dealer/distributor.
• Change the engine oil after 50 hours of operation has been reached for the first time.
4
• When the engine oil is replaced, replace the engine oil filter as well.
• When the engine oil filter is replaced, run the engine at low idle for several minutes until the oil is filled in the filter.
1. Loosen the seven bolts at the under cover just

under the engine and remove the cover.
2. Place a container for drain oil under drain cock (2).
Container: 17.0 L (4.5 Gal) or more
4-61
3. Clean the area around oil filler cap (1), remove the 1
cap and loosen drain cock (2) of the engine oil pan
to drain the oil. 4
4. After draining the oil, tighten drain cock (2) and oil
filler cap (1) securely.
5. Turn filter element (3) with a filter wrench and

remove it.
6. Remove dirt and foreign materials from the
mounting surface of the oil filter body.
3
7. Apply engine oil to the gasket of new filter element
and install the filter element by turning it by hand 5
until it does not turn any more.

twisted and broken.
8. Use the filter wrench to tighten the filter element about a three-quarter turn.
9. Remove the oil filler cap and refill the specified engine oil from the oil filler port, referring to "LUBRICANT,
FUEL & COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS" in Chapter 4.
10. Use level gauge (4) to check the engine oil level. Refill the engine oil to the proper level, which is between
upper limit (H) and lower limit (L).
11. Attach oil filler cap (1).
4-62
12. Start the engine, run the engine at low idle for
several minutes and stop the engine. About 10
minutes later, check the engine oil level. If the level
is low, refill the engine oil repeatedly to the proper
level.
13. Make sure that there is no leakage from the
mounting surface of the oil filter.
14. Attach the cover under the engine to the original
position.
4-63
4.17.2 REPLACING FUEL PRE-FILTER
HANDLING OF FUEL

• Do not reuse the filter element, O-ring, and gasket.

twisted and broken.
1. Place a container for drain fuel under fuel pre-filter (1).

2. Set stop valve (2) to "CLOSED" position (A).
3. Clean the area around air bleeder plug (3).
3
4. Loosen air bleeder plug (3) and drain plug (8) to
drain the fuel inside the filter.
5. Turn case (5) with filter wrench (9) to remove it. 1
Parts number: YT01T01008P1
6. Install new filter element (6) to filter bracket (4). At

this time, after the seal of fuel pre-filter element (6) 3
contacts with the mounting surface of filter bracket
(4) , tighten the fuel pre-filter element by 3/4 turn.
7. Apply a thin coat of light oil to new O-ring (7) and 4
then install it to case (5). At this time, after O-ring (7) 7
of case (5) contacts with the mounting surface at the
lower part of fuel pre-filter element (6), tighten the 6
case by 1/2 turn. 5
8. Remove dirt and foreign materials on the mounting
surface of filter bracket (4). 8
9. Turn case (5) with filter wrench (9) to install it to securely.
10. Tighten air bleeder plug (3) and drain plug (8).
11. Set stop valve (2) to "OPEN" position.
12. See "BLEEDING AIR FROM FUEL PIPING" in Chapter 4 to perform air bleeding.
13. Start the engine and run the engine at low idle for several minutes.
14. Check the mounting surface of the fuel pre-filter element for fuel leakage. If fuel leakage is found, loosen the
case once and check the seal for damage, and then tighten the case again.
4-64
4.17.3 REPLACING FUEL FILTER
HANDLING OF FUEL


twisted and broken.
1. Place a container for drain fuel under fuel filter (1).

2. See "REPLACING FUEL PRE-FILTER" in Chapter 4 to close the stop valve of fuel pre-filter.
3. Clean the area around air bleeder plug (3).
4. Loosen air bleeder plug (3) to drain the fuel in the
filter. 3
5. Remove the case (5).

6. Using filter wrench, remove the fuel filter element
(6).
Filter wrench of parts number: YW01T01014P1
7. Using shop rag, completely wipe off any adhered
fuel from mounting surface of fuel filter element (6) 1
of filter bracket (4).
2 4
8. Prepare new fuel filter element in advance, and
check it that the seal is set in groove properly.
9. Apply the seal with a gasket of clean fuel.
10. Install the fuel filter element (6) and flote (7) in the
filter bracket (4). At this time, turn the fuel filter
element (6) until the seal comes into contact with 3
the mounting surface of filter bracket (4). And
tighten it more 3/4 turn. 4
11. Prepare new O-ring for the case (5), and install the
case (5) in filter bracket(4). At this time, turn the
6
case (5) until the O-ring (8) of case (5) comes into
contact with the mounting surface of bottom of the
7
fuel filter element(6). And tighten it more 1/2 turn.
8
12. Tighten air bleeder plug (3).
13. Open stop valve (3).
5
14. Bleed air according to "BLEEDING AIR FROM
FUEL PIPING" in Chapter 4.
4-65
4.17.4 GREASING SWING BEARING
ABOUT GREASING SWING BEARING

Do not swing the machine while greasing the swing bearing because it is dangerous.
The grease nipple is at one location.

• Clean the grease nipple and swing the upper
structure by every 90 degrees for greasing.
Every time after swinging the upper structure, apply
grease until the grease comes out through the seal
of bearing.
(About maximum 30 cc per each direction)
4.17.5 CHECKING SWING BEARING MOUNTING BOLT FOR LOOSENESS
Special tool is required to tighten the swing bearing. Contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
1. Check that bolts (1) and (2), which tighten the swing
bearing are not loose.
2. When they are loose, remove bolts (1), and (2),
apply the recommended thread locking agent
(Loctite #262 or equivalent) and tighten them.
Tighten diagonally positioned bolts alternately.
1
Tightening torque
Mounting part
N·m (lbf·ft)
Inner race 279±29(206±21)
Outer race 256±25.6(189±19)
4-66
4.17.6 CLEANING FUEL TANK CAP AND STRAINER

1. Stop the engine.
2
2. Climb up the step on the control valve from the left
front of the machine. 1
3. If rubber cover (2) is attached on the fuel port,
remove it, and turn filler cap (1) to open it using the
starter key.
4. Check the seal on filler cap (1), and replace it if
damaged.
5. Wash strainer (3) with clean light oil, and install it.
Replace it if damaged.
6. Attach filler cap (1), and after locking it with the
starter key, attach rubber cover (2) by aligning the
orientation of fuel cap (1).
4-67
4.17.7 LUBRICATING PUSH ROD OF CONTROL LEVER

1. Insert a flat-head screwdriver between boot (3) and
plastic cover (4) to release four clicks one by one.
Screw driver
Push here with

a screw driver
4
2. Remove the rubber boot and the boot of the pilot

valve and apply a small amount of grease to the top
end surfaces of push rod (1) and the rotational
sliding section.
3. After applying the grease, install plastic cover (4) 2
and boot (3).
4-68
4.17.8 CHECKING AIR CONDITIONER REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT
• Do not loosen the parts in the refrigerant circuit because there is a hazard of losing sight by getting coolant in
your eyes and getting frostbite on your hands by touching it.
• Inhalation of the refrigerant may result in fatal injury. Also, do not bring a fire near the area where refrigerant gas
is generated.
• When charging or replacing the refrigerant, confirm the type of refrigerant and use the specified refrigerant.
(Refrigerant type: R-134a Quantity: 840 g ± 50 g)
The use of unspecified refrigerant may cause damage of the components.
• Operate the air conditioner at least once every week for several minutes to rotate the compressor regardless of
the season. This can prevent refrigerant gas from leaking through the compressor seal.
• If an oil stain is found around a pipe joint, it is a sign of gas leakage. Contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer
for inspection.
Be sure to follow the following regulations to protect the global environment.

• Do not release the refrigerant is sealed in this product to the atmosphere without care.
• Collect the sealed refrigerant from the unit when disposing of this product.
1. Start the engine, and set the engine speed to the middle speed position of the engine throttle. 4
2. Fully open the windows of the cab and the doors.
3. Set the air conditioner as shown in the following.
4
(1) Main Power Switch: ON
(2) Fan Speed Selector Switch: HI
(3) Temperature Setting Switch: MAX COLD
(4) Air Conditioner Switch: ON
3 2 1
4-69
4. Check the amount of the refrigerant by seeing sight

glass (inspection window) (5).
Regarding the criteria for the amount of charged
refrigerant, see the following figure.
A: The amount of refrigerant is proper.
B: The refrigerant is over charged. This will make 5
both high and low pressures rise and have an
adverse effect on the pressure switch operation and
the air conditioning system.
C: The refrigerant is insufficient. Contact your
KOBELCO authorized dealer for charging.
Refrigerant
Amount Condition of Sight Glass
A Proper
After turning ON the main power switch,

a little bubbles are visible. Then it becomes
transparent and later light opaque white.
B When
over
-charged
no bubbles are visible.
C When
insuf ficiently
-charged
bubbles are seen continuously .
With bubbles: Both gas and liquid refrigerant

are mixed.
No bubbles: All refrigerant has become liquid
and transparent.
Opaque
white color : Oil and refrigerant are separated,
showing light opaque white color .
4-70
4.17.9 CLEANING OR REPLACING ELECTROMAGNETIC FUEL PUMP
REPLACING FILTER
When removing since the fuel is present inside the pump (1), use a container or something similar to receive the
fuel, so that the fuel does not splash on the engine. Also, be cautious of fire.
• When the filter (3) is removed, make sure to replace the gasket (4) and clean the magnet portion inside the cover
(5).
• Do not disassemble the piston and its parts locating at the inside center of the electromagnetic pump.
• When removing the gasket (4), hold the outer part of the gasket with your fingers and pull it out.
Contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer for replacement of the filter.

1. Disconnect the wiring attached to the pump (1) 5
cover (5). Turn the cover using a wrench to remove
it.
A: Impossible to disassemble
2. Remove the filter (3) and gasket (4), and replace or
clean them.
As for the paper type, replace the filter and gasket 4
with new ones. For the steel mesh type, clean the 3
removed filter (3) with clean diesel fuel, and blow off
2
the dirt and other impurities using high-pressured
1
air. Then, install the filter (3) and a new gasket (4).
3. Install the cover (5). Securely tighten it all the way to A 4
the end using the wrench.
• After the cover (5) has been installed, make sure to check the airtightness.
• The interval of replacement or cleaning should be shortened depending on the status of fuel management and
refuel.
4-71
HANDLING THE FUEL PIPING

When the injection pipe (high-pressure piping) is
removed, do not reuse it. Reuse may cause fuel
leakage.
4-72

maintenance.
Perform this section together with "EVERYDAY CHECK-UP and 50, 100, 120, 250, and 500 HOUR INSPECTION &
4.18.1 REPLACING RETURN FILTER
PAY ATTENTION TO HOT PARTS
• The oil in the hydraulic oil tank is under high pressure and high temperature.
Before removing the cover, stop the engine first, remove the breather cap, press the valve, and release the
pressure from the tank.
• Immediately after engine operation, the oil is hot and it may cause burns. Wait until the oil temperature cools
down before attempting to change the hydraulic oil.
Hydraulic oil before filtration inside the filter contains dirt. When taking out the return filter, do not return the
hydraulic oil remaining in the filter back to the tank.
• Order return filter element kit (7) P/NoYN52V01025R200.

Replace the return filter after 50 hours of operation has been reached for the first time, and then every 1,000
hours.
4
For breaker specification, replace it every 250 hours.
• A warning is displayed on the gauge cluster not only when the remaining maintenance interval set from the
gauge cluster becomes 0, but also when the return filter is clogged. (See "WARNING DISPLAY SCREEN" in
Chapter 2)
Regardless of the setting time of maintenance, when the hydraulic oil filter replacement warning is displayed,
replace the return filter.

2. Park the machine in the hydraulic oil level inspection
position.
4-73
4. Remove breather cap (1) on the top of the hydraulic

1
oil tank and press the valve several times (5 to 7
times) to release the internal pressure of the
hydraulic oil tank.
5. Remove bolt (2) and cover (3) on the tank upper 2

surface.
6. Take out spring (5), check valve (6) and element 3
assembly (7) from the tank. 4
At this time, do not return the hydraulic oil remaining
in the filter back to the tank. 5
7. Replace O-ring (4) on the mounting surface of cover

(3).
6
8. Insert element assembly (7).
9. Attach the element by the reverse order of the steps
3 and 4.
7
10. Attach cover (3) with bolts (2).
Tightening Torque: 46.5 ± 4.6 N·m (34.3 ± 3.4 lbf·ft)
11. Start the engine, set the machine in the hydraulic oil
level inspection position, and check the hydraulic oil
level.
4-74
4.18.2 REPLACING AIR BREATHER ELEMENT
Immediately after engine operation, the oil is hot and it may cause in burns. Wait until the oil temperature cools
down before attempting to change the element.
• To keep the hydraulic oil clean and to extend the service life of the hydraulic components, replace the filter
element at regular intervals.
• Every 1000 hours replacement is a rough guideline. If the machine is operated in very sandy and dusty
conditions, replace the oil filter earlier than the specified interval.

oil tank and press the valve several times (5 to 7 1
hydraulic oil tank.
5. After removing breather cap (1), remove seal (2),

1
nut (3) and seal (4) in order.
2
6. Turn cover (5) in the counterclockwise direction, 3
remove the cover, and then remove element (6). 4
7. Install new element (6) and install cover (5) aligning 5
the groove.
6
8. Be sure to prevent water and dirt from entering the
air intake and exhaust ports between cover (5) and
body (7). 7
9. Attach seal (4) on top of cover (5), then attach nut

(3) and set seal (2).
To avoid breakage of bolts, do not over-tighten nut (3).

Tightening Torque: 10 to 14 N·m (7.4 to 10.3 lbf·ft)
10. Securely tighten breather cap (1) clockwise by hand.
4-75
4.18.3 CHECKING ENGINE MOUNTING BRACKET FOR TIGHTENING

CONDITION
1. Check damage and deterioration of engine
mounting bracket (1) and rubber mount (2) and
looseness of mounting bolts (3) and nuts (4) and
plate (5).
3,4
When engine mounting bracket (1) and rubber
mount (2) are damaged or deteriorated, contact
your KOBELCO authorized dealer for replacement.
2. When looseness is found, tighten mounting bolts (3) 2
and nuts (4).
For the tightening torques, see "TIGHTENING
TORQUES FOR BOLTS & NUTS (SPECIFIC
3,4
POSITIONS)" in Chapter 4.
2 1
3,4
2
2
1 3,4
4-76
4.18.4 CHECKING BATTERY VOLTAGE
HANDLING OF BATTERY
• Wear protective glasses, long-sleeve shirt and gloves when handling the batteries.
• Do not bring a fire near the battery because the combustible hydrogen gas generated by the battery can cause
explosion.
• If the dilute sulfuric acid in the battery splashes onto your skin or into your eyes, it will cause burns or blindness.
At such case, immediately wash the skin or eyes with sufficient clean water, and ask a special doctor to treat it as
soon as possible.
• Before performing inspection and maintenance on the batteries, be sure to stop the engine and set the battery
power-off switch to the "OFF" position.
• When removing the battery terminal be sure to remove the ground side (negative terminal) first and conversely,
when attaching the battery terminal, attach the ground side last.
• Do not put tools and hardware on the protective cover on the battery upper section. It may cause a short circuit
resulting in a fire or explosion.
Before turning the battery power-off switch to the "O (OFF)" position or removing the terminal of the battery, turn the
starter switch to the "OFF" position and wait 5 minutes or more.
cleaning device.
• Clean the battery terminals and apply grease or commercial anti-rust lubricant spray. 4
• Do not dispose of the battery by yourself but always ask a professional service company to dispose of it.
• If the batteries became old, do not attempt to use the old battery and a new battery together. The service life of
the new battery may be shortened. When replacing the batteries, replace the both at the same time.
• Measure the voltage of batteries and when it does not reach the specified voltage, charge or replace the
batteries.
4-77

PROCEDURES
maintenance.
Perform this section together with "EVERYDAY CHECK-UP and 50, 100, 120, 250, 500, and 1000 HOUR
INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES".
4.19.1 REPLACING COOLANT
HANDLING OF COOLANT
Do not loosen or remove the radiator cap when the coolant is under high pressure and temperature.
High temperature steam and the coolant will spout and could cause burns.
• When opening the radiator cap, wait until the coolant cools down, and then slowly turn and open the radiator
cap.
• The antifreeze is flammable, so do not bring flames and sparks close to it.
• The antifreeze is poisonous, so prevent it from contacting with skin. If the antifreeze gets into your eyes or on
your skin, flush the eyes or skin with plenty of water, and seek medical attention.
If air remains inside the coolant circuit, it will lead to damage of the machine. Perform the work according to the
procedure and do not allow the air to remain inside the coolant circuit.
Use the KOBELCO genuine antifreeze at 50 % concentration. Use clean water such as tap water for the water to be
mixed with the antifreeze.
• Use the specified antifreeze. If improper antifreeze is used, it will cause damage to the machine such as
occurrence of rust inside the coolant circuit.
• The KOBELCO genuine antifreeze is non-amine type.
• Replace the coolant earlier than the specified interval when it is dirty and/or bubbling.
1. Move the machine to a level and firm place and lower the bucket to the ground.
3. Loosen radiator cap (1) slowly. After checking that the pressure is completely released, push the cap down,
loosen it further, and then remove it.
Here is the radiator filler opening.
4. Remove the under cover under the radiator, place a container for drain coolant, and open drain plug (2) and
drain plug (3) on the side face of the engine to drain the coolant.
4-78
5. After draining the coolant, close drain plug (2) and

1
drain plug (3), and prepare a hose for pouring water,
and pour tap water from the radiator filler opening.
6. Open drain plug (2) and drain plug (3), and then
start and run the engine with low idle for 10 minutes
while washing the inside of the radiator with flowing
water.
During the washing with flowing water, regulate the
volumes of water being poured to keep the water
level in the radiator full.
And also, always check the hose used for pouring
water for coming off from the radiator filler opening.
7. Stop the engine and stop pouring water, and then 2
discharge the water. After that, close drain plug (2)
and drain plug (3).
8. Wash the radiator with cleaning solution. Regarding
how to use the cleaning solution, follow the handling
manual of the cleaning solution to be used.
9. After washing the radiator with the cleaning solution,
perform washing with flowing water again according
to procedures 5 to 7. At this time, continue the
washing with flowing water until clean water comes 4
out.
10. Drain the coolant inside the reserve tank (4) and
wash the inside of it.
11. Pour the coolant from the radiator filler opening up
to the neck of the radiator filler opening.
At this time, to avoid intrusion of air as much as 3
possible, slowly pour the coolant. (Speed of refiling
is 4 L/min)
12. To bleed the air inside the cooling circuits, start and run the engine for 5 minute with low idle and then another
5 minutes with high idle, as stand-by operation. Perform this operation with radiator cap (1) removed.
13. Stop the engine, wait approximately 3 minutes, and then pour the coolant up to the neck of the radiator filler
opening, and tighten radiator cap (1).
14. Refill the reserve tank with the coolant up to the middle between FULL (upper limit) to LOW (lower limit).
4-79
15. Install the under cover under the radiator.

16. After the coolant cools down enough, check the 4
coolant levels at the radiator filler opening and the
reserve tank (4).
• If the coolant level at the radiator filler opening
becomes low, refill the coolant.
• Refill the reserve tank (4) with the coolant up to
FULL
the middle between FULL (upper limit) to LOW
LOW
(lower limit).
4.19.2 REPLACING OIL IN SWING REDUCTION UNIT
HANDLING OF OIL IMMEDIATELY AFTER OPERATION

Immediately after operation, the oil is hot and it may cause burns. Start working after the temperature goes down.
Replace the oil after 500 hours of operation has been reached for the first time.
• Check drain oil, and if metal chips or powder is found in the oil, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
• Dispose of the drain waste oil properly as industrial waste.

4. Place a container for drain oil under drain plug (1) at 2
the rear lower part of swing reduction unit.
Container: 1.6 L (0.4 Gal) or more
5. Remove level gauge (2) and refill the specified gear
oil to the specified quantity.
When the oil level is within the specified range of the
scale of level gauge (2), it is proper.
For the specified gear oil, see "LUBRICANT, FUEL
1
6. Attach level gauge (2).
4-80
4.19.3 REPLACING OIL IN TRAVEL REDUCTION UNITS
HANDLING OF OIL IMMEDIATELY AFTER OPERATION
• Immediately after operation, the oil is hot and it may cause burns. Start working after the temperature goes
down.
• Pressure may be generated inside the traveling devices. Slowly loosen the plug to release the internal pressure.
Replace the oil after 500 hours of operation has been reached for the first time.
• Check the drain oil, and if metal chips or powder is found in the oil, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.

2. Stop the machine at a position in which drain plug
3
(1) is positioned at the lower side and lower the
bucket to the ground. 2
3. Stop the engine and move the pilot control shut-off FILL

LEVEL
4. Place a container for drain oil under drain plug (1).
Container: 2.1 L (0.6 Gal) x 2 or more
DRAIN
4
5. Remove drain plug (1), level plug (2) and fill plug (3)
and drain oil in the container.
6. After draining the oil completely, clean drain plug (1)
1
with light oil and attach it in place.
7. Refill the specified gear oil from the hole of fill plug
3
(3) until the oil comes out from level plug (2).
For the specified gear oil, see "LUBRICANT, FUEL 2
FILL
LEVEL
8. Clean level plug (2) and fill plug (3) with light oil and
install them.
DRAIN
9. Similarly, replace the oil of the travel reduction unit
1
on the other side.
4-81
4.19.4 CLEANING SUCTION STRAINER
HANDLING OF HYDRAULIC OIL TANK
• The oil in the hydraulic oil tank is under high pressure and high temperature.
• Before removing the cover, stop the engine first, remove the breather cap, press the valve, and release the
pressure from the tank.
down before attempting to change the hydraulic oil.

2. Park the machine in the hydraulic oil inspection
position.
4. Clean the area around the cover to keep the
hydraulic oil tank away from foreign materials.

hydraulic oil tank.
6. Remove bolt (2) and cover (3) on the tank upper

surface. 2
4-82
Do not drop bolts or others into the tank.
7. Take out suction strainer (4).

8. Clean suction strainer (4) with light oil or cleaning
solvent, dry it well and check it for damage. If
damaged significantly, replace the strainer with a
new one.
L: 868±1mm(34±0.04 inch)
5
9. Check O-rings (5) and (6) on the bottom of the
strainer, and if wear or damage is found, replace it
with a new one. L
10. Insert suction strainer (4) into the hydraulic oil tank.
11. Install cover (3) with bolt (2).
Tightening Torque: 46.5 ± 4.6 N·m (34.3 ± 3.4 lbf·ft)
12. Start the engine, run it at low idle for several (5 to 7) minutes. After that, extend and retract each cylinder and
swing the machine.
13. Park the machine in the hydraulic oil level inspection position, stop the engine and check the oil level. If the oil
level is low, refill the hydraulic oil.
4.19.5 GREASING SWING REDUCTION UNIT
HANDLING IMMEDIATELY AFTER OPERATION

Immediately after operation, each part is hot and it may cause burns. Start working after the temperature goes
down. 4

4. Apply grease to grease nipple (1).
When the hose for greasing is connected, apply
grease from the grease nipple at the end of the 1
hose.
4-83
4.19.6 CHECKING GREASE IN SWING GREASE BATH
When grease quality deteriorates, it can cause damage on the pinion shaft of the swing reduction unit and the
swing bearing.
When the swing bearings gears are damaged or the grease is deteriorated and needs to be replaced, contact your
Because the upper structure needs to be disassembled to replace grease for the swing grease bath, contact your
1. Loosen bolt (1) at the forward side of the upper

structure, and remove cover (2) and packing (3) for
inspection.
2. After inspection, replace with new packing (3), and
after cleaning cover (2), apply Loctite #572 and then
install it. 1
2, 3
3. If water is deposited, loosen bolt (4) and spring
washer (5) in the lower side of the lower frame, and
remove cover (6) and packing (7) to drain the water.
The grease may become clouded when mixed with
a small amount of water; however, it should not
cause trouble while the viscosity is high.
4-84
4.19.7 CLEANING PILOT LINE FILTER
Immediately after operation, hot hydraulic oil may spout and cause burns.
Wait until the oil temperature cools down before attempting to clean the pilot line filter.
Before performing the work, wait until the internal pressures of hydraulic oil tank and hydraulic system are released.
1. Open the side cover next to the pump and take out
1 3
hose (1), connector (2) and line filter (3).
2. Clean line filter (3) with light oil and install it.
4-85

PROCEDURES
maintenance.
Perform this section together with "EVERYDAY CHECK-UP and 50, 100, 120, 250, 500, 1000, and 2000 HOUR
INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES".
4.20.1 REPLACING HYDRAULIC OIL
HANDLING OF HYDRAULIC OIL TANK AND OIL
• The oil in the hydraulic oil tank is under high temperature and high pressure and it is dangerous. Before
removing the cover, stop the engine first, remove the breather cap, press the valve, and release the pressure
from the tank.
down before attempting to replace the hydraulic oil.
When the hydraulic breaker is installed, the deterioration of the hydraulic oil is faster than that of the normal bucket
digging work. See "PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF NIBBLER (CRUSHER) AND BREAKER" in
chapter 7 to maintain the hydraulic oil.

• When using the hydraulic oil KW68, the oil should be replaced every 2000 hours.

2. Swing the upper structure so that drain plug (1) on
the bottom of hydraulic oil tank is positioned to the
midpoint of right and left track shoes.
4-86
3. Retract the arm cylinder and bucket cylinder and

place the bucket and dozer (if equipped) on the
ground.
5. Clean the surface around the cover to keep foreign
materials away from the hydraulic oil tank.

hydraulic oil tank.
7. Remove bolt (3) and cover (4) on the tank upper

surface.
3 4
Do not drop bolts or others into the tank.
8. Place a container for drain oil under drain plug (1)

on the bottom of the hydraulic oil tank.
9. Loosen drain plug (1) slowly and drain hydraulic oil
completely.
10. Clean drain plug (1) and install it in place.
Tightening Torque: 108 ± 10 N·m (79.7 ± 7.4 lbf·ft)
4-87
11. Refill hydraulic oil through filler port on the top of the
hydraulic oil tank. H
Pour the oil while checking the oil level with level
gauge (G). G
L
12. Attach filler port cover (4) with six bolts (3).
Tightening torque: 46.5±4.6N·m(34.3±3.4lbf·ft)
13. Start the engine, run it at low idle for several (5 to 7)
minutes. After that, extend and retract each cylinder
and swing the machine.
14. Set the machine in the hydraulic oil level inspection
again, stop the engine and check the oil level. If the
oil level is low, refill the hydraulic oil.
4-88
4.20.2 REPLACING DEF/AdBlue SUPPLY MODULE FILTER

twisted and broken.
Contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer for the replacement of DEF/AdBlue supply module filter.
Before replacing the filter, stop the engine and wait about 30 minutes.
1. DEF/AdBlue supply module (6) is mounted to the
upper frame on the right side of the machine.
A: Filter side
2. When there is a cover around the pump, remove it.
3. When replacing the filter, DEF/AdBlue may spill.
Prepare a container to catch DEF/AdBlue under 6
pump (6) and cloth to wipe off DEF/AdBlue.
A
4. Turn filter cover (1) of the pump to remove it.
Wrench size: 27 mm (1.063 inch) 1
5. Remove equalizing filter (2).

2
6. Use removing tool (3) to replace the filter.

BLACK (B) GREY (G)
4-89
7. Insert the black side of removing tool (3), hook it to

filter (4) and take out filter (4).
8. Apply DEF/AdBlue slightly to new O-ring (5) and

attach it on new filter (4). 5
Follow with the precautions of DEF/AdBlue
handling.
9. Attach filter (4) and equalizing filter (2) to pump (6).
10. Remove the dirt and foreign materials from the
mounting surfaces of filter cover (1) and the supply
module.
11. Attach filter cover (1) with a wrench.

Tightening Torque: 20 to 25 N·m (15 to 18 lbf·ft)
12. When the cover was removed, attach it in place.
After the operation, make sure that DEF/AdBlue is not leaking from the area around the DEF/AdBlue supply
module, DEF/AdBlue tank, DEF/AdBlue piping and muffler.
4-90
［5. TRANSPORTATION］
5. TRANSPORTATION
5-1
5-2
5.1 TRANSPORTATION
When transporting the machine, observe the transportation related regulations and transport the machine dealer.
5.1.1 STRICTLY OBSERVE TRANSPORTATION RELATED REGULATIONS

When performing transportation, contact the nearest KOBELCO branch or sales office.
• When transporting this machine with a trailer, etc., consider the width, height, length and mass of the machine.
The transportation mass and dimension vary depending on the type of shoe and the specifications of the
attachment.
• Refer to masses and dimensions described in "SPECIFICATIONS" and "OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT" in this
manual to select the proper transportation method.
• Perform a previous inspection on the route such as limitations on width, height and mass (weight) of vehicles
and traffic regulations, etc.
SK140SRLC-5
CONTROL PATTERNS OF THE CONTROL LEVERS

Before operation, be sure to pay attention to the surroundings and operate each control lever slowly and confirm
that each motion is in accordance with the control pattern indicated on the label. When it is not matched, replace
the label with the proper label matching with the actual motion.
In addition, see "PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATIONS" in Chapter 1 for precautions regarding operations.
1,100 mm 7,120 mm (23'4") 3,430 mm (1 1'3")

(3'7")
3,620 mm (11'11")
2,870 mm (9'5")
2,810 mm (9'3")
3,560 mm (11'8")
100 mm (3.9")
(29.5")
750mm
5
The dimensions and weight are2.38m (7'-10") for the arm, 0.5m3 (0.65 cu·yd) bucket, and 4.68m (15'-4") boom
specification.
OPERATING MASS
MODEL
500 mm (19.7") 600 mm (23.6") 700 mm (27.6")
SK140SRLC-5 14,300 kg (31,500 lbs) 14,500 kg (32,000 lbs) 14,800 kg (32,600 lbs)
5-3
SK140SRL-5
CONTROL PATTERNS OF THE CONTROL LEVERS

Before operation, be sure to pay attention to the surroundings and operate each control lever slowly and confirm
that each motion is in accordance with the control pattern indicated on the label. When it is not matched, replace
the label with the proper label matching with the actual motion.
In addition, see "PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATIONS" in Chapter 1 for precautions regarding operations.
640 mm 7,090 mm (23'3") 3,920 mm (12'10")

(25.2")
3,050 mm (10'0")
3,800 mm (12'6")
2,820 mm (9'3")
3,570 mm (11'9")
100 mm (3.9")
(29.5")
750mm
The dimensions and weight are2.38m (7'-10") for the arm, 0.5m3 (0.65 cu·yd) bucket, and 4.68m (15'-4") boom
specification.
OPERATING MASS
MODEL
700 mm (27.6") 800 mm (31.5") 900 mm (35.4")
SK140SRL-5 16,100 kg (35,500 lbs) 16,400 kg (36,200 lbs) 16,600 kg (36,600 lbs)
5-4
5.2 LOADING/UNLOADING THE MACHINE
• Load/unload the machine on a level and hard ground.

• Use ramps, platforms, and embankment with sufficient width, length, slope, rigidity, and strength.
• Remove mud and dirt of the undercarriage to prevent the machine from skidding on the ramp. In addition,
remove any deposit on the ramp including water, snow, ice, grease, and oil.
• When loading or unloading the machine, set engine speed to LOW and travel speed select switch to LOW (1st)
speed.
• Do not use the attachment/equipment for loading and unloading the machine to avoid danger.
• Use only the travel levers when the machine is on ramps.
• When going over the ramp top to/from a trailer, the machine may lose balance due to an abrupt change in the
center of gravity. Be sure to travel slowly.
• Be sure to turn the auto acceleration switch to the "OFF" position. When the machine is operated with the auto
acceleration turned to the "ON" position, the engine speed may change abruptly.
• Do not make a turn on the ramp to avoid tipping. Make a turn after returning to the ground or the trailer bed.
• Since the LOW (1st)/HIGH (2nd) automatic travel speed select switching system automatically changes the
traveling speed, it may adversely affect machine control when the machine is going down a slope or being
loaded on or unloaded from the trailer. This abrupt change of machine control may cause severe accidents.
When the machine is going down a slope or being loaded on or unloaded from the trailer, set the LOW (1st)/
HIGH (2nd) travel speed select switch to LOW.
5-5
5.2.1 LOADING
Use the following procedure.
WHEN USING A RAMP

1. Chock the trailer tires to prevent the trailer from
moving.
2. Use a ramp with sufficient length, width, strength
and gradient. Install the ramp so its angle (A) to the
ground is 15 degrees or less.
3. Start the engine, and move down the control lock
lever to the "UNLOCKED" position.
4. On the switch panel on the gauge cluster, press the
travel speed select switch to set it to the LOW (1st) A
speed.
5. Make sure the machine position is aligned to the
ramp before going up on the ramp, raise the dozer
(if installed), and travel slowly.
When this machine is traveling up or down the ramp, fold the arm and attachment and raise the boom to avoid
interference with the ramp or trailer bed, as shown in the figure.
When the clearance between the ramp or the trailer bed is insufficient, the machine may abruptly lean to one side
when it goes over the ramp top, and strike its arm or bucket cylinder against the trailer bed, ramp, or ground,
resulting in damage to the cylinder.
6. When the machine comes to the required position,

slowly swing the upper structure 180 degrees.
7. Lower the attachment/equipment slowly.
8. Move the control lock lever to the "LOCKED"
position.
9. Perform cool-down operation with the engine in the
low idle position, and then stop the engine and
remove the starter key.
5-6
10. Lock the lock devices such as guards and doors.
WHEN USING PLATFORM OR EMBANKMENT

1. Make the embankment wide enough to the machine
width. The angle (A) of the platform or embankment
to the ground should be 15 degrees or less.
2. Check that the embankment is sufficiently sturdy to
hold the machine weight.
3. The surface of the platform or embankment must be
level to that of the trailer bed.
4. Park the trailer properly at the required position. A
LOADING A MACHINE WITHOUT ATTACHMENT/EQUIPMENT

• When loading a machine without an attachment/
equipment, adjust the travel direction so the
counterweight comes to the top of the slope.
5-7
5.2.2 FIXING THE MACHINE
• Retract the radio antenna in before transportation. In addition, remove the mirrors if required. Store the removed
parts securely in the cab.
• Place a wood block under the bucket (attachment) link to avoid contacting the ground and protect the bucket
cylinder from being damaged during transportation.
After loading the machine on the required position, fix the machine by the following procedures.
CRAWLER
1. Check that all guards and doors are locked.
2. Chock the front and rear of the crawlers and fix the
machine securely with wire ropes of appropriate
strength to prevent the body from moving back and
forth or rolling by vibration of the trailer. In addition,
secure individual parts and removed parts securely
on the trailer.
RUBBER CRAWLER AND PAD SHOE

1. Check that all guards and doors are locked.
2. Chock the front and rear of the crawlers and fix the
machine securely with wire ropes of appropriate
2 2
strength to prevent the body from moving back and
forth or rolling by the vibration of the trailer. In
addition, secure individual parts and removed parts
securely on the trailer.
Do not directly apply the wire rope (1) on the rubber 1
crawler or the pad shoe. Place pads (2) (such as
soft cloth) at the left and right of the crawler frame to
fix the rope securely on the loading platform of the
truck.
5-8
5.2.3 UNLOADING
Use the following procedure.
1. Chock the trailer tires to prevent the trailer from moving.
2. Use ramps with sufficient length, width, strength and
gradient. Attach the ramps so its angle (A) to the
ground is 15 degrees or less.
3. Remove chains or wire ropes that have been fixing
the machine.
4. Start the engine, and move down the control lock
lever to the "UNLOCKED" position.
5. On the switch panel on the gauge cluster, press the
travel speed select switch to set it to the LOW (1st) A
speed.
6. Raise the boom slowly.
7. Raise the attachment/equipment. With the arm
retracted to under the boom, raise the dozer (if
equipped) and travel slowly.
8. Level the machine at the rear end of the trailer and
stop temporarily.
9. Make sure the machine position is alighted parallel
to the ramps, and adjust the angle between the arm
and boom to 80 to 100 degrees.
Follow the procedures below to prevent damage to the arm and bucket cylinders.
When this machine is traveling up or down the ramps, fold the arm and attachment and raise the boom to avoid
interference with the ramps or the trailer bed. If the machine abruptly tips when it goes over the ramp top, the
attachment may strike the trailer bed or the ramps.
10. Until the machine completely passes through the 5

ramps, travel down the ramps slowly with moving
the boom and the arm slowly to keep the bucket
close to the ground so that it can be lowered to the
ground in an emergency.
11. Slowly swing the upper structure 180 degrees to
take the front traveling position (so the travel
reduction unit comes to the rear).
5-9
5.3 MACHINE LIFTING
This section explains a standard slinging method to be used when lifting the body.
In the actual lifting operation, the weight and center of gravity of the machine as well as the strength of the wire
ropes and sling jigs must be checked. For details, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
Expander
Center of Gravity
Place Block between

Each Cable and Frame
Wire rope
• A wire rope or other lifting tool used should have no damage nor deterioration, with sufficient strength and
length.
• Use wire ropes that form lifting angles is 90 degrees or less, and have sufficient length so they would not
interfere with the body.
• Use leather gloves when handling wire ropes.
• Never use a wire rope with a break (A), decrease in diameter (B), or kink (C), which may result in break.
• If the lifting procedure, ropes, or slings are inappropriate, the lifted machine may move or slide unexpectedly,
resulting in severe personal injury, death, or machine damage.
A B C
5.3.1 THE POSITION OF THE LIFTED MACHINE

Move the machine to a flat place. Set the boom, arm, and bucket as shown in the figure. Then move the control lock
lever to the "LOCKED" position and stop the engine. The positions to pass the wire ropes through are shown in the
labels at the sides of the crawler at both front and rear. Cover the wire ropes with cloth to prevent damage to the
machine.
Machine lifting
If the lifting method or the positions to pass the wire ropes through are inappropriate, the machine may abruptly
move during or after lifting the body.
5-10
5.4 INSTALLING AND REMOVING MIRROR

When the machine is shipped from a factory, the mirrors are not installed.
When removing and installing the mirrors, see “ADJUSTMENT OF MIIRRORS” in Chapter 3.
5-11
5-12
［6. SPECIFICATION］
6. SPECIFICATION
6-1
6-2
6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

6.1.1 SK140SRLC-5, SK140SRL-5
Item Unit SK140SRLC-5 SK140SRL-5
Operating mass kg (lb) 14,500 (32,000) 16,100 (35,500)
Bucket capacity m3 (cu·yd) 0.5 (0.65)
Engine name - ISUZU AR-4JJ1X diesel engine
Engine rated power kW/min-1 (ft-in) 78.5 / 2,000
A Overall length mm (ft-in) 7,500 (24'7") 7,450 (24'5")
B Overall height mm (ft-in) 2,870 (9'5") 3,050 (10'0")
C Overall width mm (ft-in) 2,590 (8'6") 2,740 (9'0")
D Track shoe width (Grouser shoe) mm (inch) 600 (23.6") 700 (27.6")
E Cab height mm (ft-in) 2,870 (9'5") 3,050 (10'0")
Minimum ground clearance (excluding lug

F mm (inch) 445 (17.5") 585(23.0")
height)
G Tail swing radius mm (ft-in) 1,490 (4'11")
H Crawler overall length mm (ft-in) 3,770 (12'4") 3,790 (12'5")
I Tumbler center distance mm (ft-in) 3,040 (9'12") 2,990 (9'10")
Clearance height under upper structure

J mm (ft-in) 865 (34.1") 1,050 (3'5")
(excluding lug height)
K Overall width of upper structure mm (ft-in) 2,490 (8'2")
L Crawler overall width mm (ft-in) 2,590 (8'6") 2,740 (9'0")
Ground contact pressure kPa (psi) 36 (5.2) 35 (5.1)
Swing speed min-1 (rpm) 11.0 (11.0)
Travel speed (low/high) km/h (mph) 3.4 / 5.6 (2.1 / 3.5) 3.0 / 5.3 (1.9 / 3.3)
Gradeability % (deg) 70 (35)
General specifications indicate the specifications of standard machine with the 4.68 m (15'4") boom and the 2.38 m
(7'10") arm.
Bucket capacity is indicated by ISO.
A K
G
6
B, E
J
D
I
C,L
H
6-3
6.2 SHOE TYPES AND USES
• Never use the shoes other than the grouser shoe of 600mm (23.6") in barren (a field with a lots of rocks and
gravel).
Traveling and digging work in barren could cause bent shoes and loose shoe bolts and may also damage other
travel system components (link, roller, etc.).
• The attachment is with a 2.38m(7'10") arm and a 0.5m3(0.65cu·yd) (heaped) bucket.
• The dimensions marked with * do not include height of shoe lug.
6.2.1 SK140SRLC-5
Grouser shoe
Type
500 (19.7") 600 (23.6") 700 (27.6")
For soft soil For ordinary soil For soft soil

Use
(Option) (Standard) (Option)
Operating mass
14,300 (31,500) 14,500 (32,000) 14,800 (32,600)
kg (lb)
Machine mass
11,600 (25,600) 11,800 (26,000) 12,100 (26,700)
kg (lb)
Cab height
2,870 (9'5") ← ←
mm (ft-in)
Body *Minimum ground clearance

※ 445 (17.5") ← ←
specification mm (inch)
Crawler overall length

3,770 (12'4") ← ←
mm (ft-in)
Crawler overall width

2,490 (8'2") 2,590 (8'6") 2,690 (8'10")
mm (ft-in)
Ground contact pressure

43 (6.2) 36 (5.2) 31 (4.5)
kPa (psi)
6-4
6.2.2 SK140SRL-5
Grouser shoe
Type
700 (27.6") 800 (31.5") 900 (35.4")
For soft soil For soft soil For soft soil

Use
(Standard) (Option) (Option)
Operating mass
16,100 (35,500) 16,400 (36,200) 16,600 (36,600)
kg (lb)
Machine mass
13,400 (29,500) 13,700 (30,200) 13,900 (30,600)
kg (lb)
Cab height
3,050 (10'0") ← ←
mm (ft-in)
Body *Minimum ground clearance

※ 585 (23.0") ← ←
specification mm (inch)
Crawler overall length

3,790 (12'5") ← ←
mm (ft-in)
Crawler overall width

2,740 (9'0") 2,840 (9'4") 2,940 (9'8")
mm (ft-in)
Ground contact pressure

35 (5.1) 31 (4.5) 28 (4.1)
kPa (psi)
6-5
6.3 WORKING RANGES

6.3.1 BACKHOE ATTACHMENT (SK140SRLC-5)
A
A'
C G
H
D
E
K L
F
J
B
Types of Attachment 2.38 m (7'10") Standard Arm
Item 0.5m3 (0.65 cu·yd) Bucket
A Maximum digging reach 8,340 (27'4")
A' Maximum reach at ground reference plane 8,190 (26'10")
*B Maximum digging depth 5,520 (18'1")
*C Maximum height of cutting edge 9,190 (30'2")
*D Maximum dumping height 6,740 (22'1")
*E Minimum dumping height 2,580 (8'6")
*F Vertical digging depth 4,890 (16'1")
G Minimum swing radius 2,000 (6'7")
*H Height at minimum swing radius 6,830 (22'5)
*J Eight feet level digging depth 5,290 (17'4")
K Horizontal digging stroke Stroke 4,210 (13'10")
L at ground level At minimum 2,140 (7'0")
The dimensions marked with * do not include height of shoe lug.
6-6
6.3.2 BACKHOE ATTACHMENT (SK140SRL-5)

A
A'
G
C
H
D
E
K L
F
J
B
Types of Attachment 2.38 m (7'10") Standard Arm
Item 0.5m3 (0.65 cu·yd) Bucket
A Maximum digging reach 8,340 (27'4")
A' Maximum reach at ground reference plane 8,160 (26'9")
*B Maximum digging depth 5,330 (17'6")
*C Maximum height of cutting edge 9,370 (30'9")
*D Maximum dumping height 6,930 (22'9")
*E Minimum dumping height 2,770 (9'1")
*F Vertical digging depth 4,700 (15'5")
G Minimum swing radius 2,000 (6'7")
*H Height at minimum swing radius 7,020 (23'0")
*J Eight feet level digging depth 5,100 (16'9") 6

K Horizontal digging stroke Stroke 4,240 (13'11")
L at ground level At minimum 2,100 (6'11")
The dimensions marked with * do not include height of shoe lug.
6-7
6.4 ATTACHMENT TYPE AND COMBINATION

6.4.1 FRONT ATTACHMENT VARIATION
To handle various types of work, this machine is provided with various attachments/equipment.
• When a bucket with large capacity is used, it should be used in combination with a short arm so that the machine
is stabilized and excessive load to the front part and the cylinders can be avoided.
• When a long boom or arm is used, it should be used in combination with a bucket with small capacity.
4.68 (15'4") M BOOM SPECIFICATION AND BUCKET COMBINATION
Bucket Capacity Bucket Width

ARM
(m3)(cu·yd) (mm) Number Mass
Type
SAE SAE With Side Without Side of Teeth (kg)
2.38m 2.84m
(Heaped) (Struck) Cutter Cutter
0.24 0.20
590 500 3 280 ○ ○
(0.31) (0.26)
0.31 0.23
700 600 3 300 ○ ○
(0.41) (0.30)
0.38 0.28
800 700 4 340 ○ ◎
(0.50) (0.37)
Hoe 0.45 0.35

915 815 4 360 ○ △
bucket (0.59) (0.46)
0.50 0.38
1,000 900 5 380 ◎ ×
(0.65) (0.50)
0.57 0.43
1,100 1,000 5 400 △ ×
(0.75) (0.56)
0.70 0.50
- 1,150 5 410 △ ×
(0.90) (0.65)
Breaker - - - - - - ○ ○
Nibbler
- - - - - - ○ ○
(crusher)
ABOUT SYMBOLS IN THE APPLICABLE ARM COLUMN
◎ Standard combination
○ General work: Digging and loading work of sand, gravel and clay-like earth
Light work: Operations which is mainly loading of loose soil, etc. (For example, field work and loading operation
△
of sand and gravel)
× Unusable: This is not covered by warranty and should not be used.
• When installing an attachment to this machine, use a genuine attachment or the one which is recommended by
KOBELCO.
• When a problem occurs to this machine or attachments/equipment due to use of attachments/equipment not
specified by KOBELCO, manufacturer's warranty does not apply.
• Before using an inversely installed bucket, check that it does not interfere with the arm because interference can
occur during operation and cause damage.
6-8
6.5 LIFTING CAPACITY

6.5.1 SK140SRLC-5:4.68m (15'4") BOOM
RATED OBJ ECT HANDLING KOBELCO CONSTRUCTION

CAPACITIES TABLE MACHINERY CO., LTD.
HEIGHT (m)
SK140SRLC-5
LC LOWER
SHOE WIDTH 500mm
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
10 ARM (See the following table)
9 BOOM (See the following table)
8
COUNTER WEIGHT 3,140 kg
Z2 7
6
5 WORKING CONDITIONS:
– With no tool ( bucket, clamshell..).
4 If object handling is per formed with
tool installed, the weight of the tool
3 shall be deducted from the values
of this ta ble.
2
– With retracted bucket cylinder .
1
Z1 0 – On a compact horizontal level
ground.
1 – In complete swing of the upper

WORKING CIRCUIT s tructure.
2 PRESSURE 34,300 kPa
3 HOLDING CIRCUIT
PRESSURE 34,300 kPa
Z3 4
5
AXIS OF ROT ATION
6
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OUTREACH (m)
THESE LOADS ARE VALID FOR THE HEIGHT OF

THE CONSIDERED ZONE (Z.) FOR THE INTENDED OUTREACH 6
BOOM LENGTH 4.68 m
OUTREACH IN m-
LOADS IN kg (BOOM FOOT HEIGHT)
OUTREACH (m) 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 MAX REACH

Z2 4370 3250 2130 – –
LD = 2.38 Z1 5130 2790 1890 – 1540 (7.12 m)
Z3 4440 2820 – – –
Z2 3710 2040 1840 – –
LD = 2.84 Z1 4940 2650 1760 1320 1310 (7.56 m)
Z3 4200 2660 1780 – – YY11Z00687P1
6-9
6.5.2 SK140SRLC-5:4.68m (15'4") BOOM

HEIGHT (m)
SK140SRLC-5
LC LOWER
SHOE WIDTH 500mm
LIFT POINT (AXIS)
8
Z2 7
6
of this ta ble.
2
1
Z1 0 – On a compact horizontal level
ground.

3 HOLDING CIRCUIT
PRESSURE 34,300 kPa
Z3 4
5
AXIS OF ROT ATION
6
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OUTREACH (m)

THE CONSIDERED ZONE (Z.) FOR THE INTENDED OUTREACH
BOOM LENGTH 4.68 m
OUTREACH IN m-
OUTREACH (m) 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 MAX REACH

Z2 4370 3250 2360 – –
LD = 2.38 Z1 5130 3120 2110 – 1720 (7.12 m)
Z3 4440 3150 – – –
Z2 3710 2040 1840 – –
LD = 2.84 Z1 5520 2980 1990 1490 1490 (7.56 m)
Z3 4200 2990 2010 – – YY11Z00688P1
6-10
6.5.3 SK140SRL-5:4.68m (15'4") BOOM

HEIGHT (m)
SK140SRL-5
LOGGING LOWER
LIFT POINT (AXIS) SHOE WIDTH 800mm
8
Z2 7
6
of this ta ble.
2
1
Z1 – On a compact horizontal level
0 ground.

3 HOLDING CIRCUIT
PRESSURE 34,300 kPa
Z3 4
5
AXIS OF ROT ATION
6
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OUTREACH (m)

THE CONSIDERED ZONE (Z.) FOR THE INTENDED OUTREACH
BOOM LENGTH 4.68 m
OUTRE ACH IN m-
6
OUTRE ACH (m) 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 MAX REACH
Z2 2780 2560 2570 – –
LD = 2.38 Z1 5170 3450 2330 – 1730 (7.12 m)
Z3 3940 3390 – – –
YY11Z00720P1
6-11
6-12
［7. MACHINE OPERATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM］
7. MACHINE OPERATION MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM
7-1
7-2
7.1 MACHINE OPERATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

• Machine Operation Management System is the system that manages information, such as the operating
information and failure of the hydraulic excavator.
• To use this system, communication contract is required. Consult your KOBELCO authorized dealer for the
contract.
ABOUT DISASSEMBLY AND REPAIR

Never disassemble or repair the communication controller or transceiving antenna of this system. Do not pinch the
cable or pull it by force and damage it. This may cause a failure or fire of the machine.
• Electromagnetic waves generated from the components of this system may adversely affect the medical electric
devices, such as cardiac pacemaker device.
When using medical electric devices while operating the machine, use extreme caution and consult the
manufacturers of the medical electric devices in advance.
• Do not spill water over the cable and the components of this system. This may cause a failure of the machine.
• Electrical waves used by this system is unauthorized outside of Japan. When exporting this machine, make sure
to remove the communication controller.
• Installation and removal of the components and the cable of this system is performed by your KOBELCO
authorized dealer.
• The communication controller of this system does not require inspection and operation.
• Because this system uses wireless signals, it cannot be used in a place where no radio wave reaches (in the
mountains, inside a building, in a tunnel, etc.), in a place of weak radio wave, or outside the communication area.
When making the contract, check the communication area with your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
• This system consumes very little electricity even when the starter switch is OFF (turned off).
For a long term storage of the machine, see "PRECAUTIONS FOR LONG-TERM STORAGE" in Chapter 3.
• The battery of the communication controller is consumables. Battery life may vary depending on the use
environment. However, it should be replaced regularly approximately once every year.
7-3
7.2 REMOTE DOWNLOAD SYSTEM

This system sometimes automatically renews (downloads) the software of the controller in this machine.
At that time, the instruction will appear on the gauge cluster, so that operate the switch panel of the gauge cluster.

6 7 4 5
3 10
(4) Washer Switch
(5) Wiper Switch
(8) Menu Switch
2
(9) Arrow Switch
1 9 8
1. When the renewal of the software becomes

possible, turn the starter switch to the "ON" position,
0.0h
or turn it to the "START" position and start the
SOFTWARE IS TO BE UPDATED
engine, then the following selection screen appears
AFTER KEY SW OFF, PWR OFF IS
on the gauge cluster. IMPOSSIBLE FOR ABOUT 10 MINUTES
DO YOU ALLOW UPDATE?
2. Using the up and down arrow switches (9), move ACCEPT
the cursor to "ACCEPT". CANCEL
3. Press "menu switch" (8) to set the renewal. (At this

time, the renewal of the software does not start)
4. Then the screen returns to the normal screen, so UP
DOWN OK
that continue the machine operation.

5. Then, turn the starter key to the "OFF" position to
display the following screen on the gauge cluster, 0.0h
and then the renewal of the software starts. It takes SOFTWARE IS BEING UPDATED
AUTO PWR OFF AFTER UPDATE
almost 10 minutes for the renewal.
CAUTION!
UPDATE STOPS BY KEY SW ON
DO NOT CUT BAT PWR AT UPDATE
UP
DOWN OK
During the renewal of the software, do not turn OFF the battery power-off switch or remove the battery terminals. If
the battery power is shut off during the renewal, it can damage the controller.
7-4
6. When the renewal is completed, the following

screen appears on the gauge cluster and the power 0.0h
turns OFF. SOFTWARE UPDATING IS COMPLETED
PWR OFF
• The renewal of the software is performed when required.

• The renewal of the software will not start when "CANCEL" is set, 30 seconds elapses with the selection screen
displayed, or the pilot control shut-off lever is moved to the "UNLOCKED" position, even if the starter key is
turned "OFF".
In that case, the next time the starter key turns "ON", the selection screen appears again.
• During the renewal of the software, if the starter key turns "ON", the renewal stops and the power turns OFF.
• If a certain period has passed after the selection screen appeared because "CANCEL" has been set repeatedly,
the selection screen stops to appear and the renewal of the software is not performed.
• The renewal of the software sometimes fails. At that time, the following screen appears on the gauge cluster and
the power turns OFF.
When the renewal of the software keeps failing, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
0.0h
SOFTWARE UPDATING IS FAILED
PWR OFF
7-5
7.3 DESCRIPTION OF BUILT-IN WIRELESS EQUIPMENT

H er eby, Japan Radio Co., LTD., decla r es t h a t t h e ra dio equ ipm en t t ype J RN-130K is in
com plia n ce wit h Direct ive 2014/53/E U.
h t t p://www.jr c.co.jp/en g/pr odu ct /su ppor t /docu m en t s.h t m l
С н а с т о я щ о т о , Japan Radio Co., LTD. ,д е к л а р и р а , ч е т о з и т и п р а д и о с ъ о р ъ ж е н и е

J RN-130KÌÌ е в с ъ о т в е т с т в и е с Д и р е к т и в а 2014/53/Е C.
с л е д н и я и н т е р н е т а д р е с
Tím t o Japan Radio Co., LTD., pr oh lašu je, že t yp r á diovéh o za ř ízen í J RN-130K je v sou la du
se sm ěr n icí 2014/53/E U.
H er m ed er klæ r er Japan Radio Co., LTD., a t r a diou dst yr st ypen J RN-130K er i

H ier mit er klä r t Japan Radio Co., LTD., da ss der F u n ka n la gen t yp J RN-130K der
verfügbar:
Kä esoleva ga dekla r eer ib Japan Radio Co., LTD., et kä esolev r a a diosea dm e t ü ü p

J RN-130K va st a b dir ektiivi 2014/53/E L n õu et ele.
7-6
Μ ε τ η ν π α ρ ο ύ σ α ο /η Japan Radio Co., LTD., δ η λ ώ ν ε ι ό τ ι ο ρ α δ ι ο ε ξ ο π λ ι σ μ ό σ J RN-130K

π λ η ρ ο ί τ η ν ο δ η γ ί α 2014/53/Ε E .
P or la pr esen te, Japan Radio Co., LTD., decla r a qu e el t ipo de equ ipo r a dioeléct rico
J RN-130K es con for m e con la Direct iva 2014/53/UE .
siguiente:
Le sou ssign é, Japan Radio Co., LTD., décla r e qu e l'équ ipemen t ra dioélectr iqu e du t ype
J RN-130K est con for m e à la dir ective 2014/53/UE .
Il fa bbr ica n t e, Japan Radio Co., LTD., dich ia r a ch e il t ipo di a ppa r ecch ia tu r a ra dio
J RN-130K è con form e a lla diret t iva 2014/53/UE .
Ar šo Japan Radio Co., LTD. dekla r ē, ka ra dioiekā r t a J RN-130K a t bilst Dir ektīva i
2014/53/E S.
Aš, Japan Radio Co., LTD., pa t vir t in u , ka d r a dijo įr en gin ių t ipa s J RN-130K a t it in ka
Japan Radio Co., LTD. ovim e izja vlju je da je r a dijska oprem a t ipa J RN-130K u skla du s
Dir ekt ivom 2014/53/E U.
7-7
Japan Radio Co., LTD. iga zolja , h ogy a J RN-130K t ípu sú rá dióber en dezés m egfelel a
B'da n , Japan Radio Co., LTD., n iddikja r a li da n it -t ip t a ' t a għ mir t a r-r a dju J RN-130K
h u wa kon for mi m a d-Dir et t iva 2014/53/UE .
ġ ej:
H ier bij ver kla a r ik, Japan Radio Co., LTD., da t h et t ype r a dioa ppa r a tu u r J RN-130K
internetadres:
Japan Radio Co., LTD. n in iejszym oświa dcza , że t yp u r zą dzen ia ra diowego J RN-130K jest
zgodn y z dyr ekt ywą 2014/53/UE .
O(a ) a ba ixo a ssin a do(a ) Japan Radio Co., LTD. decla r a qu e o pr esen t e tipo de equ ipa m en to
de r á dio J RN-130K está em con form ida de com a Dir et iva 2014/53/UE .
P r in pr ezen t a , Japan Radio Co., LTD. decla r ă că t ipu l de ech ipa men t e r a dio J RN-130K
est e în con for m it a te cu Dir ect iva 2014/53/UE .
Japan Radio Co., LTD. t ýmt o vyh la su je, že r á diové za r ia den ie t ypu J RN-130K je v sú la de
so sm er n icou 2014/53/E Ú.
7-8
Japan Radio Co., LTD. potr ju je, da je t ip r a dijske opr eme J RN-130K skla den z Dir ekt ivo
2014/53/E U.
Japan Radio Co., LTD. va ku u t t a a , et t ä r a diola it et yyppi J RN-130K on dir ekt iivin
2014/53/E U m u ka in en .
H ä r m ed för sä kr a r Japan Radio Co., LTD. a t t den n a t yp a v r a diou t ru stn in g J RN-130K

över en sstä m m er m ed direkt iv 2014/53/E U.
Burada, Japan Radio Co., LTD., JRN-130K tipi radyo ekipmanının 2014/53 / EU sayılı Direktife
uygun olduğunu beyan eder.
EU uyumu beyanının tam metni aşağıdaki internet adresinden edinilebilir:
Herved Japan Radio Co., LTD., Erklærer at radioutstyr typen JRN-130K er i samsvar med direktiv
2014/53 / EU.
Den fullstendige teksten i EU-erklæring er tilgjengelig på følgende internettadresse :
JRC
Japan Radio Co., LTD.
21-11, Mure 6-Chome, Mitaka-shi, Tokyo 181-0002, Japan
Note
Importer's name and address will be officially listed on separate construction machine maker
instruction manual.
7-9
7-10
［8. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT］
8. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
8-1
8-2
8.1 OPERATION OF HYDRAULIC BREAKER AND

NIBBLER (CRUSHER)
8
8.1.1 DO NOT USE FOR DEMOLITION OPERATION
Do not operate the machine with attachment/equipment (working tool - e.g.: processor or breaker) specifically
designed to demolish, cut, loosen, separate, pick up, transport and distribute component parts of buildings, civil
engineering structures.
Before you use this machine for demolition, please contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
8.1.2 SELECTION OF HYDRAULIC BREAKER AND NIBBLER (CRUSHER)

To install an optimal hydraulic breaker or nibbler (crusher) to the machine, select it considering stability of the
machine, impact power, and a required hydraulic oil volume.
8.1.3 BEFORE OPERATING HYDRAULIC BREAKER

• Consult your KOBELCO authorized dealer for the additional piping work and reinforcement for the arm to install
the hydraulic breaker or nibbler (crusher) to the machine.
• When using the nibbler (crusher) or hydraulic breaker, to get full performance of its function and avoid damage to
the machine, nibbler (crusher) or hydraulic breaker, fully understand and read the operation manual of its
manufacturer and "PROHIBITED WORK IN USE OF BREAKER" in Chapter 7.
8.1.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR IMPURITY AND HYDRAULIC OIL

When the hydraulic breaker or nibbler (crusher) is removed, apply plugs to the tube end of the tip of the arm and the
hose end on the hydraulic breaker or nibbler (crusher) to keep them away from dust and water. Before operation,
check for looseness of the bolts on the clamps fixing the tubes, and leakage from the connections of the tubes and
hoses.
8.1.5 PRECAUTIONS IN USE OF BREAKER

DO NOT PRY AND BREAK FORCIBLY
Do not break a rock or concrete by prying it with the
breaker. Prying may cause damages to the boom, the
arm, and the breaker.
8-3
DO NOT USE BREAKER FOR OTHER THAN INTENDED PURPOSE

Do not break a rock or concrete by falling or hitting the
breaker.
Hitting may cause damages to the boom, the arm, the
breaker, and the base machine.
DO NOT MOVE DEBRIS

Do not use the breaker for moving debris and others.
Especially, when pulling down rocks and others with the
flank of the breaker by using the swinging force, it may
cause damages to the boom, the arm, the breaker, and
the base machine.
CYLINDER ROD AT STROKE END

Operate the cylinder rod with leaving some space to the
stroke end.
Operating the hydraulic cylinder at the stroke end during
demolition work may cause excessive loads on the
boom, the arm, and the base machine, resulting in
damages.
8-4
CONTINUOUS USE FOR 1 MINUTE OR LONGER

If an object cannot be broken by hitting the same point
for 1 minute or more, change the target point.
Using the breaker continuously causes increase of the 8
hydraulic oil temperature or abnormal wear of the Within
One Minute
breaker chisel.
NEVER PERFORM LIFTING WORK

Never use the breaker for lifting work.
DO NOT OPERATE BREAKER IN WATER

Do not operate the breaker in water.
Working in the water can cause rust on the breaker and
Do not operate breaker in water
damage the sealed portions. Consequently, rust, dirt,
and water may enter the hydraulic oil and damage the
hydraulic components of the base machine.
Chisel
STOP WORKING WHEN HOSE SWINGS

When the hydraulic hose swings abnormally during
breaker work, stop the work and immediately contact
your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
If you continue working, it may cause damages to the
hydraulic components and piping.
8-5
DO NOT OPERATE BREAKER WITHOUT OBJECT

Do not operate the breaker without an object. Operation
without an object causes increase of the hydraulic oil
temperature and damages to the breaker.
PAY ATTENTION TO LIFTING UP OF MACHINE

The lifting amount of the machine during breaker work
shall be 10 to 15cm.
If the lifting amount is large, it can cause damages to the
boom and the arm.
Press
against
ground
Raise slightly
10 to 15 cm
ARM IN VERTICAL POSITION

Do not work with the arm positioned perpendicular to the
ground.
It will cause the arm cylinder to swing largely, resulting in
oil leakage from the cylinder.
8-6
DO NOT WORK FACING SIDEWAYS

Do not operate the breaker when the machine is facing
sideways. Work fa cing s ide wa ys is prohibite d
It will cause excessive loads on the travel system, 8
resulting in bending of the shoe plates and oil leakage
from the roller.
Work fa cing Work fa cing
forward is all owe d forwa rd is a llowe d
Work fa cing s ide wa ys is prohibite d
PAY ATTENTION TO DIRECTION OF BREAKER

The pushing direction of the breaker shall be in the same
direction of the chisel axle. Apply the chisel
perpendicularly to a surface to be broken during
operation.
If you work in an unnatural posture, the sealed portions
of the breaker may be damaged, causing foreign
materials or water to enter the machine and resulting in
damages to the hydraulic components.
DO NOT OPERATE BREAKER IN HORIZONTAL OR UPWARD DIRECTION

Do not operate the breaker in the horizontal or upward
direction.
It will cause excessive loads on the boom, the arm and
the base machine, resulting in damages.
8-7
PAY ATTENTION TO INTERFERENCE BETWEEN CHISEL AND BOOM

When the machine is in a position of holding the breaker
inward, it may cause interference between the chisel and
the boom. Be careful about operation.
8-8
8.1.6 PRECAUTIONS IN USE OF NIBBLER (CRUSHER)
8
To protect the operator from flying debris and demolished structures, install the front guard and top guard on the
cab before demolition.
DO NOT PRY OBJECT

Do not pry or pull down an object while holding it by the
nibbler (crusher).
Prying may cause damages to the boom, the arm, and
the nibbler (crusher).
DO NOT USE NIBBLER (CRUSHER) FOR OTHER THAN INTENDED PURPOSE

Do not fall or hit the nibbler (crusher) to an object.
Hitting may damage the boom, the arm, the nibbler
(crusher), and the base machine.
DO NOT SWING DURING NIBBLER (CRUSHER) WORK

Do not demolish or pull down an object by using the
swinging force of the machine while holding the object by
the nibbler (crusher).
It may cause damages to the boom, the arm, the nibbler
8-9
DO NOT TRAVEL DURING NIBBLER (CRUSHER) WORK

Do not demolish or pull down an object by traveling the
machine while holding the object by the nibbler
(crusher).
It may cause damages to the boom, the arm, the nibbler
DO NOT WORK ON UNSTABLE PLACE

Do not perform work when the machine is on a weak
ground or debris.
Working under unstable condition may cause the
machine to tip over.
WATCH OUT FOR FALLING OBJECTS OVERHEAD

Operating the nibbler (crusher) over the machine can
cause demolished structures to fall onto the machine.
8-10
PAY ATTENTION TO GROUND

If an object under the machine is demolished, it causes
the ground of the machine to be unstable, resulting in
falling of the machine. 8
DO NOT OPERATE MACHINE ABRUPTLY

Do not operate or stop the boom, the arm, and the
nibbler (crusher) abruptly.
It can cause damages to each cylinder and the machine
to tip over.
CYLINDER ROD AT STROKE END

Operate the cylinder rod with leaving some space to the
stroke end.
Operating the hydraulic cylinder at the stroke end during
demolition work may cause excessive loads on the
boom, the arm, the link portions, and the base machine,
resulting in damages.
8-11
DO NOT HOLD OBJECT OBLIQUELY BY NIBBLER (CRUSHER)

Do not set the machine in a position or posture in which
the nibbler (crusher) has to hold an object obliquely.
It will cause excessive loads on the arm and the link
portions, resulting in damages.
NEVER PERFORM LIFTING WORK

Never use the nibbler (crusher) for lifting work.
DO NOT LIFT BASE MACHINE

Do not lift up the base machine by pushing the nibbler
(crusher) against the ground.
It will cause damages to the boom, the arm, and the
nibbler (crusher).
DO NOT WORK FACING SIDEWAYS

Operating the nibbler (crusher) while the machine is
facing sideways causes the crawlers to be raised off the
ground and the machine to become unstable. So operate
the machine slowly.
8-12
PAY ATTENTION TO INTERFERENCE BETWEEN NIBBLER (CRUSHER) AND BOOM

When the machine is in a position of holding the nibbler
(crusher) inward, it may cause interference between the
nibbler (crusher) and the boom. Be careful about 8
operation.
8-13
8.2 SELECTION OF ATTACHMENT MODE AND

SELECTOR VALVE
8.2.1 SELECTION OF ATTACHMENT MODE
It is necessary to switch the attachment mode according to the attachment being installed.
• When working with a hydraulic breaker or nibbler (crusher) installed, be sure to check that an appropriate
attachment mode is selected, by seeing the attachment mode select switch and the multi-display.
mode so that the attachment to be used matches the attachment mode.
• When the attachment mode is not selected appropriately, it will cause malfunction or failure of the machine.
not proper.
The attachment mode is always set according to the

position of the attachment mode select switch. Before
beginning work, make sure that the selected attachment
H
mode is appropriate. 12h
(1) Nibbler
(2) Breaker
(3) Bucket
3 1 2
Attachment
Switch Condition Multi-Display Indication Selection of Attachment
Mode
S 12:15 The breaker symbol
Breaker mode The work mode of the attachment like a
"S", "E", or "H" is shown breaker requires the single
upper left. flow circuit.
S 12:15
The nibbler symbol
Nibbler mode The work mode of using the attachment with
"S", "E", or "H" is shown a flow and return circuit like
upper left. a nibbler (crusher).
S 12:15
The bucket symbol
Bucket mode The work mode of
digging.
"S", "E", or "H" is shown
upper left.
8-14
• When performing breaker work, be sure to select the breaker mode. Working in a mode other than the breaker 8
mode causes damage in the hydraulic components and/or breaker.
particular, switching to the breaker mode during nibbler (crusher) work may cause a holding load to fall off.
not proper.
WORK MODE AND HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT
Set Pressure of Overload

Attachment Attachment Mode Hydraulic Circuit
Relief Valve
The return circuit will
In case of single flow circuit automatically become a
Breaker mode Factory setting: 24.5 MPa
attachment, such as breaker circuit which does not go
through the control valve.
The return circuit will

In case of flow and return
automatically become a
circuit attachment, such as Nibbler mode Factory setting: 24.5 MPa
circuit which goes through
nibbler (crusher)
the control valve.
• When the breaker is installed, the return circuit needs to be returned to the return filter directly without going
through the control valve. Therefore, make sure to select the breaker mode. Do not use the breaker mode for
other than the breaker.
• The set pressure of overload relief valve is set to 24.5 MPa when being shipped from the factory. Depending on
the attachment, adjustment may be required. In that case, contact your KOBELCO authorized dealer.
8-15
8.2.2 SWITCHING SELECTOR VALVE

Selector valve (1) switches the flow of hydraulic oil. The
selector valve is switched automatically according to the
selected attachment mode. Therefore, it is necessary to
switch to an appropriate attachment mode according to
1
the attachment being installed.
For switching the attachment mode, see "SELECTION
OF ATTACHMENT MODE" in Chapter 8.
Mechatro Controller
Hydraulic Circuit Mechatro Controller Input
Output
Attachment Mode
Selector Switching Selector Switching Selector Detecting
Piping
Valve Valve FB Pressure FB
Digging/Nibbler OFF Nibbler piping OFF OFF
Breaker ON Breaker piping ON ON
When the indication of selector valve failure is displayed on the multi-display, the output and input signals of the
mechatro controller may be different from the table.
Turn the attachment mode select switch to select the appropriate attachment mode again. When the indication of
selector valve failure does not go off even when the appropriate attachment mode is selected, it may be due to an
electric failure. Contact your KOELCO authorized dealer.
8-16
8.3 SWITCHING STOP VALVE

Stop valves (1) at the arm top end are used to stop the flow of hydraulic oil. When installing and removing the
attachment, the stop valves must be switched to the stop position. 8
VALVE POSITION
Free: Hydraulic oil flows
Stop: Hydraulic oil stops
Breaker/nibbler (crusher) opening/closing

1
Free Stop
TOOLS
Wrench Size
Hydraulic Circuit Stop Valve
(H)
Breaker/nibbler opening/closing 1 30mm
8-17
8.4 FLOW RATE ADJUSTMENT

Depending on the attachment being installed, the flow rate of service circuit needs to be changed.
For the setting procedure of flow rate, see "USER MENU SETTING" in Chapter 2.
The flow rate specification varies according to each breaker.

Using the breaker at a flow rate over that described in the specification may cause seizure or overheat of the
breaker. Make sure to check the specification of each breaker and adjust the flow rate accordingly.
8-18
8.5 CONTROL OF PROPORTIONAL HAND CONTROL

EXTRA, NIBBLER (CRUSHER), BREAKER
8
ATTACHMENT TO BE INSTALLED
The operation methods are explained based on the example of a nibbler (crusher) or breaker installed as a front
attachment.
The explanation is based on a case that the opening/closing operation system or breaker operation system is
connected to the nibbler (crusher) pipings.
Operation may differ depending on a manufacturer and specification of an attachment installed.
Check the operation manual for the manufacturer specification of the attachment before operation.
ABOUT USE OF PROPORTIONAL HAND CONTROL

Read, fully understand and follow all safety precautions and procedures in this manual before attempting any
operation of the machine.
When using the nibbler (crusher) or the breaker, see "SELECTION OF ATTACHMENT MODE AND SELECTOR
VALVE" in Chapter 8.
1 3
2 4
Left Control Lever Switch Right Control Lever Switch
1 Extra control switch 3 Nibbler control switch

2 Horn switch 4 Breaker control switch
8-19
8.5.1 EXTRA HAND CONTROL

Slide switch (1) on the left control lever to actuate the
1
extra.
The table below shows that when switch (1) is slid, the
left and right, which side of the front attachment the high
pressure oil flows when seeing it from the inside of the
cab.
Operation procedures Oil flow

Sliding to the left R.H
Sliding to the right L.H
8.5.2 HORN SWITCH

For horn switch (2), see "HORN SWITCH" in Chapter 2.
8.5.3 NIBBLER (CRUSHER) OPERATION

Slide switch (3) that is located on the right control lever
to open or close the "nibbler (crusher)". 3
cab.
4

Sliding to the left L.H
Sliding to the right R.H
NIBBLER (CRUSHER) OPERATION

Do not touch breaker switch (button) (4) when operating the nibbler (crusher).
PRECAUTIONS FOR LEAVING THE OPERATOR'S SEAT

Do not leave the machine with the engine running.
According to the slide distance of the nibbler (crusher) control switch, the hydraulic oil flow rate increases.
8-20
8.5.4 BREAKER OPERATION

To operate the breaker, press switch (4).
3
left and right, which side of the front attachment the high 4 8
cab.
Operate the breaker for 30 seconds, then release the
switch.

Press switch (4) L.H
Release switch (4) Stops (does not flow)
The breaker can be operated by sliding nibbler control switch (3) to the left. However, use breaker control switch
(button) (4) as much as possible.

8-21
8.6 CONTROL OF PROPORTIONAL HAND CONTROL

NIBBLER (CRUSHER), BREAKER
ATTACHMENT TO BE INSTALLED
The operation methods are explained based on the example of a nibbler (crusher) or breaker installed as a front
attachment.
The explanation is based on a case that the opening/closing operation system or breaker operation system is
connected to the nibbler (crusher) pipings.
Operation may differ depending on a manufacturer and specification of an attachment installed.
Check the operation manual for the manufacturer specification of the attachment before operation.
ABOUT USE OF PROPORTIONAL HAND CONTROL

Read, fully understand and follow all safety precautions and procedures in this manual before attempting any
operation of the machine.
When using the nibbler (crusher) or the breaker, see "SELECTION OF ATTACHMENT MODE AND SELECTOR
VALVE" in Chapter 8.
1 3
Left Control Lever Switch Right Control Lever Switch
1 Horn switch 2 Nibbler control switch

3 Breaker control switch
8-22
8.6.1 HORN SWITCH

For horn switch (1), see "HORN SWITCH" in Chapter 2.
8.6.2 NIBBLER OPERATION

Slide switch (2) that is located on the right control lever
2
to open or close the "nibbler (crusher)".
cab. 3

Sliding to the left L.H
Sliding to the right R.H
NIBBLER (CRUSHER) OPERATION

Do not touch breaker switch (button) (3) when operating the nibbler (crusher).

According to the slide distance of the nibbler (crusher) control switch, the hydraulic oil flow rate increases.
8-23
8.6.3 BREAKER OPERATION

To operate the breaker, press switch (3).
2
cab.
Operate the breaker for 30 seconds, then release the 3
switch.

Press switch (3) L.H
Release switch (3) Stops (does not flow)
The breaker can be operated by sliding nibbler control switch (2) to the left. However, use breaker control switch
(button) (3) as much as possible.

8-24
8.7 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF

NIBBLER (CRUSHER) AND BREAKER
8
8.7.1 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE CHART OF NIBBLER
(CRUSHER) AND BREAKER
When this machine is used with the hydraulic breaker, the deterioration and contamination of hydraulic oil becomes
faster than that of the normal bucket digging work because the machine is used under more severe conditions.
Neglecting the maintenance could result in a failure of the base machine, hydraulic breaker, and hydraulic
components. To extend the service life of hydraulic components, replace the hydraulic oil and the filter elements, at
the following intervals.
Inspection and Replacement Interval (Hours)

Item
Maintenance Point First Time Second Time Periodic
Hydraulic oil Hydraulic oil tank — — 1000
Return filter element kit
Hydraulic oil tank 50 250 250
(P/No.YN52V01025R200)
8.7.2 REINFORCEMENT OF ATTACHMENT

When this machine is used with a proper breaker or nibbler (crusher), the factory standard arm does not basically
require reinforcement. However, when using the machine for a special purpose, contact your KOBELCO authorized
dealer.
8-25
8.8 PRECAUTIONS FROM BREAKER MANUFACTURERS

When installing the breaker, first read the precautions for use of the breaker and the precautions from the breaker
manufacturer carefully.
Depending on the breaker manufacturer, details of precautions, such as for piping and handling, vary slightly. Install
the breaker upon consultation with the breaker manufacturer.
The following is the summary of the handling methods based on the catalogs and operation manuals of the breaker
manufacturers.
This is a general summary and the details may vary according to each breaker model.
For details, consult with the breaker manufacturer before starting installation.
8.8.1 INSTALL HIGH- AND LOW-PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS

NPK Installation required
Toku (Different in each model)
Okada Check the breaker pressure pulsation amplitude. When the pulsation is large, be sure to
Furukawa install the accumulator.
8.8.2 ACCUMULATOR INSTALLATION CRITERIA

HIGH PRESSURE SIDE
Measure the pressure pulsation amplitude on the max
breaker high pressure side at the pump delivery
pressure inspection port, while operating the breaker at
the full engine speed at the H mode. The difference
between the maximum and minimum pressures should
be 20% or less of the excavator system pressure 34.3
min
MPa.
When the difference exceeds 20%, install the high-
pressure accumulator.
Max. pressure - Min. pressure < System pressure x
LOW PRESSURE SIDE 20%
Measure the line filter inlet pressure on the breaker side
while operating the breaker at the full engine speed at the H mode. When the maximum pressure exceeds 5.4 MPa,
install the low-pressure accumulator.
Maximum pressure < 5.4 MPa
Before installing the accumulator, consult with the breaker manufacturer for the accumulator capacity and the
sealing pressure, etc.
The pulsation amplitude should be 34.3 MPa × 20% = 6.9 MPa. If the pulsation amplitude exceeds this value, be
sure to install the accumulator.
8-26
8.8.3 INSTALL RELIEF VALVE

(1) Breaker piping (on high pressure side)
(2) Breaker piping (on low pressure side)(return)
8
(3) Plug
(4) Boom 3
Installation is not required

NPK (Installation may be required depending on a model. For details, contact the breaker
manufacturer.)
Installation required
Toku
Installation of the relief valve is instructed by the breaker manufacturers. The installation
Okada
method of the relief valve varies according to each manufacturer. Follow the instruction of
Furukawa
the manufacturer for installation.
8-27
8.9 OBJECT HANDLING

8.9.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
When performing lifting work by this machine, follow the
following precautions and be careful about safety.
• Perform the lifting work according to regulations of
each country and field.
• Before start the work, check the parts of this machine
such as the hook, for possible failure.
• Move the machine to a level and firm ground to avoid
performing work at a slope or with the condition that
the machine is tilted.
• Keep away other workers from the swing area to
prevent them from entering the area under a lifted
load.
• Use lifting tools (hook, and chain, etc.) with a proper
length and without wear and damage.
• Use the hook attached to the bucket link and do not lift
a load with the bucket teeth, etc.
• Turn the overload alarm select switch “ON” and then start the work.
• Perform slowly the lifting work and slowly travel the machine while lifting a load.
• Do not lift a load exceeding the maximum lifting capacity.
• Do not perform towing operation and pulling out operation with the devices for lifting work.
• Do not leave the operator’s seat while lifting a load. When stopping the lifting work, lower the load to the ground.
• When strong winds blow, do not perform lifting work.
8-28
8.9.2 LIFTING WORK
CHECKING LIFTING TOOLS 8

The holding valve, the hook of the bucket link, the warning device, and the rated lift capacity chart are the parts
necessary to perform lifting work. If some of them are missed, or a failure is found on them, do not perform lifting
work.
1. Check the rated lift capacity chart inside the cab and 1
make sure that a total load including the weight of a
load to be handled does not exceed the maximum
load.
2. Before starting lifting work, press switch (1).
(See “OVERLOAD ALARM SELECT SWITCH” in
Chapter 2.)
3. Using a wire or chain with a proper length, lift the
load by hook (2) of the bucket link.
CHECKING LIFTING TOOLS
• Check the lifting tools (hook, and chain, etc.) for wear and damage.
• Do not use these devices for towing operation and pulling out operation.
8-29
4. Perform lifting work slowly and avoid rapid

movement that may cause the lifted load to swing. If
the value of the lifted load becomes close to the
maximum load at each working range, the warning
appears on the multi-display and the warning buzzer
sounds. At that time, change the working range, or
reduce the load.
5. Lower the load to a level and firm surface and after
placing the load on there, remove the wire, etc.
PRECAUSIONS FOR LIFTING WORK
• If a lifted load swings or rotates, it may contact with the workers around the machine and the cab. Check that the
workers around the machine are not in the swing area and perform lifting work slowly.
• If the warning buzzer sounds during lifting work, lower the load to the ground.
8-30
8.9.3 RATED LIFT CAPACITY CHART

(1)Boom length
(2)Arm length
8
(3)Distance of load from swing center line
(2)
(4)Maximum load (ton) according to tipping limit based (1)
on ISO010567 (stability 75 % and hydraulic system 87 (7)
%)
(5)Maximum load at each working range from axis of
swing
(6)Maximum load at maximum working range from axis
of swing
(7)Counterweight (8)
(8)Set pressure of main relief valve/ holding valve in
hydraulic system
(1)
(5)
(3)
(2) (4) (6)
8-31
8.10 QUICK HITCH
HANDLING QUICK HITCH

Regarding a quick hitch to be installed, use the quick hitch having an automatic mechanical locking mechanism
such as a lock pin that will ensure the lock.
Because when the hydraulic pipes or electric wires are damaged, the hydraulic holding power will be lost, resulting
in falling off of the front attachment.
8.10.1 PROHIBITED WORKS

DO NOT PERFORM LIFTING WORK
Never perform any lifting work using the quick hitch. A
lifted load may fall and cause serious accidents.
DO NOT WORK WITHOUT FRONT ATTACHMENT

Do not lift a load or the machine, when the front
attachment is not installed. It may cause damage to the
quick hitch.
8-32
DO NOT LIFT OR MOVE PERSONNEL

Never lift or move personnel by using the quick hitch.
The lifted personnel may fall off, causing severe
accidents. 8
8.10.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE

CHECK OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL OF QUICK HITCH
Before installing the quick hitch, carefully read the operation & maintenance manual of the quick hitch.
CHECK EFFECTS TO OPERATING RANGE AND LIFTING CAPACITIES

When the quick hitch is installed, the operating range and the lifting capacities will be changed. Also, according to
the installed quick hitch or front attachment, it may interfere with the attachment/equipment or the base machine.
Before starting work, check the operating range, and make sure that the total loads including the weight of the quick
hitch, the front attachment, and a load to be handled do not exceed the maximum load described in the rated lift
capacity chart inside the cab.
CHECK QUICK HITCH OPERATION SWITCH

When the front attachment is installed, check that the
operation switch is in the neutral position before starting UNLOCK
the engine.
(See "QUICK HITCH OPERATION SWITCH" in Chapter
2.)
LOCK
INSPECTION BEFORE OPERATION

Before operating the machine, check the installation part for engagement and looseness, and the pipes for oil
leakage.
8-33
8.10.3 REMOVING FRONT ATTACHMENT
REMOVING FRONT ATTACHMENT
• Work on a stable and level ground to prevent the front attachment from falling down.
• Be sure to lower the front attachment to the ground before operating the quick hitch.
The quick hitch shown in the explanation figures is an example.

Before performing this work, carefully read the operation & maintenance manual of the installed quick hitch.
1. Move the machine to a level ground and lower the
front attachment to the ground.
2. Push the "UNLOCK" side of the quick hitch

operation switch to move movable hook (1) to
release the front attachment.
(See "QUICK HITCH OPERATION SWITCH" in
Chapter 2.)
1
3. Move the attachment/equipment of the machine
side to remove the front attachment.
Some kinds of quick hitch may be difficult to remove from the front attachment. In that case, operate the pressure
reducing valve to make the removal work easier.
(See "MANUAL SWITCHING OF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE FOR QUICK HITCH" in Chapter 8.)
8-34
8.10.4 INSTALLING FRONT ATTACHMENT
INSTALLING FRONT ATTACHMENT 8

• Work on a stable and level ground to prevent the front attachment from falling down.
• After installing the front attachment, make sure that the quick hitch holds the front attachment securely.
The quick hitch shown in the explanation figures is an example.

Before performing this work, carefully read the operation & maintenance manual of the installed quick hitch.
1. Place the front attachment on a level ground. 2
Attach pins (2) and (3) to the front attachment. 3
2. Operate the machine to lower the quick hitch and

engage fixed hook (4) with pin (2).
3. Extend the bucket cylinder so that the quick hitch

comes in contact with pin (3).
At that time, make sure that fixed hook (4) engages
with pin (2).
4
3
4. Push the "LOCK" side of the quick hitch operation

switch to engage movable hook (1) with pin (3).
(See "QUICK HITCH OPERATION SWITCH" in
Chapter 2).
5. Check that the front attachment is securely installed,
according to the operation & maintenance manual of
the installed front attachment.
8-35
If the engagement of the quick hitch cannot be fully checked from the operator's seat, get off the machine and
check the engagement at a place close to the quick hitch.
8.10.5 MANUAL SWITCHING OF PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE FOR

QUICK HITCH
Some kinds of quick hitch may be difficult to remove from the front attachment.
In that case, switch the pressure reducing valve manually to apply a high pressure on the "UNLOCK" side of the
quick hitch to make it easier to remove.
• Turn switch knob (1) of the valve to the left (A:
direction of the lock symbol) and fix it at the place
where click sound can be heard. Then the pressure at
the "UNLOCK" side (rod side) of the quick hitch is
increased.
Remove the front attachment with this condition.
(See "REMOVING FRONT ATTACHMENT" in
Chapter 8) 1
• Turn switch knob (1) to the right (B: direction of |
symbol) to return switch knob (1) to the previous
position. Then the pressure at the "UNLOCK" side
(rod side) of the quick hitch is reduced.
When installing the front attachment, turn the switch
knob right. 1
B
8-36
8.11 TRAVEL ALARM SWITCH

The travel alarm function sounds alarm to people around
the machine while the machine is traveling.
If the (1) side of the travel alarm switch is pressed to turn
8
1
"ON" the travel alarm, the alarm sounds while the
machine is traveling.
If the (2) side of the travel alarm switch is pressed to turn
"OFF" the travel alarm, the alarm does not sound while
the machine is traveling.
2
If the alarm does not sound even though the travel lever (or pedal) is operated after the travel alarm function is
turned "ON", stop the engine immediately and ask your KOBELCO authorized dealer for repair.
Do not continue the operation with the travel alarm failed.
8-37
8-38
［9. SPECIAL PROCEDURES］
9. SPECIAL PROCEDURES
9-1
9-2
9.1 SPECIAL PROCEDURES AT ENGINE FAILURE

• This chapter describes how to release the brakes of the travel motor and the swing motor and how to lower the
attachment to the ground.
• These operations should be performed only by an experienced and trained operator who fully reads and
understands this manual.
9-3
9.2 LOWERING ATTACHMENT TO GROUND

When an engine failure occurs, the attachment can be lowered to the ground in the following procedure.
ABOUT LOWERING THE ATTACHMENT TO THE GROUND

When lowering the attachment to the ground, make sure that there is no one under the attachment before starting
the work. A person could be hit and injured by the attachment being lowered.
1. At first, if the holding valve is attached to the boom cylinder, loosen lock nut (3) of the port relief valve of holding
valve (1) and loosen adjusting bolt (2).
2. Loosen lock nut (5) of emergency manual valve (4) at the head side of the boom cylinder and loosen needle
valve (6).
3. The hydraulic oil at the boom cylinder head side flows to the drain circuit through the orifice and then the boom
lowers slowly.
It will take 4 to 8 minutes until the boom lowers to the ground though it may differ according to the machine
position and the holding pressure.
4. After placing the attachment on the ground, tighten each part of the holding valve (1) and the emergency
manual valve as before.
1
Front S ide 4
Boom cylinde r he a d s ide

H
Main control valve Ab port
Dra in circuit
Lever lock XAb port 5

solenoid valve Shuttle valve
Remote cont rol va lve
9-4
9.3 RELEASING TRAVEL MOTOR BRAKES

TOOLS
• Chock block: 4 pcs.
• Allen wrench: 1 pc. (12 mm)
• Torque wrench: 150 to 170 N･m (111 to 125 ft･lbf)
• Plastic mallet or soft mallet
• Container for drain oil: 2 pcs. (6 L)
• Eye bolt: 1 pc. (M10:1.5 x 30 mm)
9
• Lifting device (100 kg or more)
• Screw seal (for drain plug, level plug, and fill plug)
CHOCKING THE CRAWLER

When releasing the brakes of the travel motor and the swing motor, chock the front and rear of the crawlers. See
"LOWERING ATTACHMENT TO GROUND" in Chapter 9 to lower the attachment to the ground. On a slope or soft
ground, the upper structure and the machine may move unintentionally and it is very dangerous.
• Do not damage the cover of the travel motor. Not following this may cause oil leakage.
• Prevent contamination of the removed parts. Intrusion of dust may cause a failure of the machine.
• When installing or removing the planetary gear assembly, be careful not to get the hands caught.
1. Chock the front and rear of each crawler to prevent the machine from moving before releasing brakes.
2. See "LOWERING ATTACHMENT TO GROUND" in Chapter 9 to lower the attachment to the ground.
4. Remove the inspection plug and fill plug from the
travel motor with an Allen wrench. Remove the inspection/
fill plug with a 12 mm
Allen wrench
5. Place the container for drain oil under the drain plug
Remove the drain
of travel motor and remove the drain plug from the plug with a 12 mm
travel motor. Allen wrench
Container for drain

oil with 6 L capacity
9-5
6. Remove the bolts (16 places) from cover (1) of the

travel reduction unit. Remove 16 mounting
bolts with an 8 mm
Allen wrench
1
7. Remove the bolts (2 places) from the boss part of Remove the bolt from attach the M10-1.5 x 30 mm
cover (1) and attach the eye bolt to each hole. the boss with an 8 mm Allen eye bolt to each boss
wrench and
8. Attach the sling to the eye bolt and remove slack of 1 1
the chain or cable.
9. Strike the end of the cover lightly with a plastic
mallet and remove cover (1).
10. Remove thrust plate (2) and drive gear (3).
11. Attach the eye bolt to planetary gear assembly (4).

Attach the M10-1.5 x 30 mm
12. Attach the sling to the eye bolt and remove slack of eye bolt to the pinion gear
shaft
the chain or cable. 4
13. Remove planetary gear assembly (4) from the
housing.
14. With planetary gear assembly (4) removed, attach
cover (1) to the housing by tightening bolts (16
places).
15. Refill the oil from the hole of the fill plug.
16. Perform the above procedures to the right and left Lift the planetary gear
travel reduction units and move the machine to a assembly from the housing
and remove it by hands
place where it can be repaired.
9-6
17. After completing repair of the machine, reinstall the removed parts in the reverse procedure.
Tightening torque
Cover mounting bolt: 67N·m(49ft·lbf)
Plug: 59N·m(44ft·lbf)
9-7
9.4 RELEASING SWING BRAKES
CHOCKING THE CRAWLER

When releasing the brakes of the travel motor and the swing motor, chock the front and rear of the crawlers. See
"LOWERING ATTACHMENT TO GROUND" in Chapter 9 to lower the attachment to the ground. On the slope or
soft ground, the upper structure and the machine may move unintentionally and is therefore very dangerous.
9.4.1 SWING BRAKE RELEASE PROCEDURE WITH HYDRAULIC HAND

PUMP
1. See "LOWERING ATTACHMENT TO GROUND in Chapter 9 to lower the attachment to the ground.
2. Remove all the hoses and connectors connected to
the swing motor.
3. Attach the connector of a proper size for the

hydraulic hand pump to the PG port of the swing DB
motor and connect the PG port with the hydraulic PG
hand pump.
L.IP
PB PA
B A
2-M10 DEPTH 18
LIFTING CAPACITY
220kg/2 bolts
C DB
A,B
PG
9-8
4. Apply a pressure of 2.8 MPa using the hydraulic hand pump and release the swing brake.
Torque
Symbol Name Size
N·m (lbt·ft)
A, B Main port 2–PF1/2 108 (80)
C Make-up port PF3/4 167 (123)
DB Drain port PF3/8 74 (55)
PG Break release port PF1/4 36 (27)
L Gear oil level port

PT3/4 98 (72) 9
IP Gear oil filler port
PA, PB Pressure measurement port PF1/4 36 (27)
5. Swing the machine.

6. After completing repair, reinstall the removed parts in place.
9-9
9.4.2 SWING BRAKE RELEASE PROCEDURE BY DISASSEMBLY

When the hydraulic hand pump cannot be prepared, release the swing brake in the following procedure.
TOOLS
• Eye bolt: 2 pcs. (M12:1.75 x 22 mm)
• Lifting device (100 kg or more)
• Torque wrench: 320N·m(236ft·lbf)
• Plastic mallet or soft mallet
• Waste cloth or paper towel
• Plug and cap
• Tools to remove/install hoses, tubes, and connectors.
1. See "LOWERING ATTACHMENT TO GROUND" in Chapter 9 to lower the attachment to the ground.
2. Remove all the hoses and connectors connected to
the swing motor.
3. Attach the plugs or caps to the hoses, tubes, and

connectors.
4. Attach the eye bolt to lifting position (A) of valve

casing (1).
C
PA
PB
B A
Top cover
9-10
5. Remove two mounting bolts (B) of valve casing (1)

facing each other from the diagonally opposite side,
1
among four mounting bolts (B).
6. Attach the sling to the eye bolt and remove slack of
the chain or cable.
C
B
7. Remove the remaining two mounting bolts from PA
PB
valve casing (1) slowly.
B A
When the remaining two mounting bolts are removed, the valve casing comes up by the spring pressure. Releasing
the spring pressure may cause the machine to move.
8. Using the lifting device, remove valve casing (1) slowly.

9. Remove spring (2) inside the swing motor and put it 2
in the container filled with new hydraulic oil.
To prevent contamination of the container, put the
cap to the container.
10. Align the holes of valve plate (3) in the swing motor
to the front and rear of the housing of the swing
motor.
9-11
11. Put valve casing (1) on top of the swing motor so

that positioning pins (4) of valve casing (1) match 4
the holes of valve plate (3).
12. Push valve casing (1) into the swing motor by hand
and fix it with the mounting bolts (4 positions).
13. Swing the machine.
14. After completing repair of the machine, reinstall the
removed parts in place.
• Do not damage the valve casing. Not following this may cause oil leakage.
• Prevent contamination of the removed parts. Intrusion of dust may cause a failure of the machine.
9-12

Operator Manual Kobelco Sk140srlc-5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator Manual Kobelco Sk140srlc-5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

APPLICABLE No.

READ, UNDERSTAND AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY

Book Code No. S2YH00011ZE10 2018.10

1.8 HANDLING OF THE ACCUMULATOR OR GAS SPRING ..................................................................1-48

2.5.2 Pilot Control Shut-Off Lever........................................................................................................2-47

2.13.5 HEAD REST ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................................. 2-102

3.2.13 CHECKING OF AIR CLEANER INLET ......................................................................................3-16

4. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

4.2.2 PRECAUTIONS OF INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ..............................................................4-5

4.16 250 HOUR (3-MONTH) INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ........................................4-48

7. MACHINE OPERATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

8.7.1 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE CHART OF NIBBLER (CRUSHER) AND

Use of this product and this manual

STORE OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS ON THE MACHINE

SAFETY INFORMATION IN MESSAGES OR LABELS IN THIS

Notice indicates information considered important, but not hazard related .

Note indicates information that may be helpful for the operator.

Example of the safety label including signal words

Example of a pictorial only safety label

SUMMARY OF THE MACHINE

FRONT, REAR, RIGHT & LEFT OF THE MACHINE

Hour Meter Load Status

During the break-in period

QUALIFICATION FOR OPERATING THE MACHINE

FLUORINATED GREENHOUSE GASES

TYPE OF F GAS HFC-134a

TOTAL EQ(CO2) 1.2

"EC" DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

VIBRATION TO THE OPERATOR

Basic emissions value Standard deviation

Excavation 0.44 0.27 0.30 0.24 0.16 0.17

Level of sound pressure at operator's compartment

CAB WITH ROPS (ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE)/

ORDERING PARTS AND SERVICE

. ENGINE SERIAL No.

. MACHINE SERIAL No.

1.1 SAFETY LABELS & DECALS

READ THE OPERATOR'S MANUAL

1.1.2 LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS & DECALS

VIEW III VIEW IV

1.1.3 SAFETY LABELS

DO NOT INSERT HAND IN THE MOVING PART

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STOPPING ENGINE

KEEP CLEAR WORKING AREA

ATTACHMENT MODE SELECT SWITCH

CHECKING CONTROL LEVER PATTERN

LOCK THE FRONT WINDOW AT THE HOUSED POSITION

HANDLING THE QUICK HITCH

DO NOT USE COUNTERWEIGHT LIFTING

WORKING ABOVE GROUND

ENGINE ROTATING PARTS WARNING

PRECAUTIONS OF HANDLING DEF/AdBlue

WORKING ABOVE GROUND 1

PRECAUTIONS OF HANDLING QUICK HITCH

HANDLING EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE

• READ THIS MANUAL

1.2 PRE-START SAFETY

READ THE OPERATOR'S MANUAL

1.2.1 OPERATION RULES

ENSURE WORKSITE SAFETY

OPTIONAL ATTACHMENT / EQUIPMENT

1.2.2 PROTECTION TOOLS

PREPARE FOR EMERGENCY

1.2.3 ABNORMAL AND EMERGENCY CONDITION